Home

HP E1429A User's Manual

1. Single Ended Single Ended 10MHz 20M3 a s 12 16 or 32 500 750 Filter oe T 16 Tie A D Chi p Vv Differential a 1MQ Level v Detection Lo 1MQ Local Bus right Trigger vxlbus and Timebase 16 or 32 Level 12 Detection Single Ended Single Ended 10MHz dio dl IE Filter qazon i E 500 O wN A D Ch2 Hi Differential o E1429A FIG3 1 1M0 Lo 1MQ Figure 3 1 HP E1429 Digitizer Block Diagram 104 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 The Message and Register Interfaces Digitizer Command Paths External Controller i e Series 300 400 PC w HP82335 HP IB Card HP IB HP E1406 Command Module VXlbus Binary l l l l l l Register Data l l l l l SCPI Commands SCPI Commands The HP E1429 digitizer can be programmed as a message based device or as a register based device Appendix C When the digitizer functions as a message based device the processor within the message interface Figure 3 1 converts SCPI ASCII command strings to register reads and writes through the register interface When the digitizer functions as a register based device command opcodes are written directly to the digitizer registers from the register interface Figure 3 2 shows the command paths used when programming the digitizer as a message based device or as a regist
2. Figure 1 2 HP E1429A B Logical Address Switch Location Chapter 1 Getting Started 17 Note The Digitizer Bus Request Level Bus Request Level Guidelines Installing the Digitizer The digitizer s servant area switches are not used and should be left in their factory set 0 position The bus request level is a priority at which the HP E1429A B digitizer can request the use of the VME VXI Data Transfer Bus e There are four bus request lines BGO BG3 from which one is selected Figure 1 2 Bus request line 3 has the highest priority bus request line 0 has the lowest priority It is not necessary to change the bus request level setting BG3 on the digitizer e More information on the Data Transfer Bus can be found in the C Size VXIbus Systems Installation and Getting Started Guide The HP E1429A B digitizer can be installed in any mainframe slot except slot 0 However in applications where the HP E1429B is generating data over the Local bus install the digitizer in the left slot adjacent to the module s receiving the data Figure 1 3 shows the installation of a sample Local bus configuration Adjacent Slots bus Mainframe HP E1429B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer HP E1488 HP E1485 HP E1445 Memory Digital Arbitrary Module RQ Signal XJ Function Processor Generator HP E1429A FIG1 3 Local Bus backplane Interface direc
3. Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel numeric 1 2 3 none start_addr numeric O through 524287 none count numeric 1 through 2000 none e Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No 218 Command Reference DIAGnostic Subsystem DIAGnostic FETCh e Refer to the Memory Management section in Chapter 3 for information on where segmented readings are stored in memory e Both channels can be fetched interleaved by specifying DIAG FETC3 When both channels are fetched the channel 1 data is the first data point and the count specified is the number of readings to be taken on each channel and is thus limited to 1000 per channel e The start_addr must be divisible by 4 If it is not then the next lowest memory location divisible by 4 will be the actual start_addr used i e a start_addr of 511 would be rounded down to be 508 e Data is sent back in binary block format with a header string preceeding the data The header is made of the ascii string number_of_digits number_of_bytes where indicates binary block data number_of_digits is how many ascii digits make up the following byte count and number_of_bytes is the byte count After the header the stream of data bytes occurs Example 2 below shows how to accomodate the header string using the HP Rocky Mountain Basic programming language e Related Commands ABORt FORMat INITiate MMediate ARM STARt CO
4. 362 Register Programming Appendix C The Memory Control Registers The following memory control registers are used to initialize digitizer memory The Traffic Register base 0216 The traffic register is a read write register that selects data and clock sources for the high speed data bus The bits are defined as follows Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 0216 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Purpose Data Register Mode not used Read High Speed Clock High Speed Data Data Source Source Setting 0 0 invalid O data 00 pulse register 0 0 A D 0 1 channel 1 not ready 0 1 A D 0 1 data register 1 0 channel 2 1 0 data register 1 0 not used 1 1 alternate 1 data 11 Local bus 1 1 memory data channels ready Traffic Register Power on Reset Settings At power on or following a reset the traffic register is set to 1100 0100 or C416 Bit Descriptions Data Register Mode Bits 7 6 specify how data will be presented when read by the data register and how it will be written into memory as written by the data register Writing data to only one channel s memory is not recommended since invalid data is placed in the unselected channel When alternate channels is selected the two channels alternate beginning with the channel previously selected For example alternate channels beginning with channel 2 can be achieved by setting the Data Register Mode field to 1 0 and th
5. EBUS A 4 J Frame 2 Frame 1 Data Flow E1429A fig3 16 Figure 3 15 HP E1429B Local Bus Data Transfer Protocol Handshake Protocol The LDAV8 and LREQ9 lines are used to handshake bytes of data across the Local bus Each data generating device asserts the LBLOCK11 flag with the last data byte in the block The device which generates the last block in the frame asserts the LFRAME10 flag along with the LBLOCK11 flag Local Bus Modes There are several modes of operation used to generate or receive data over the Local bus The most common modes follow The digitizer modes are shown in bold and more information on these modes is contained in the section Setting the Local Bus Transfer Mode on page 162 Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 157 AMAA Generate ae AN AAAA Sra Z Consume wvv w pan 55 IE ABAA BBBBAAAA TF Append B B B AAA AAABBB Insert gt gt gt BBBAAA BBB Strip gt gt bb gt gt gt AAAAAA Eavesdrop J AAAA BBBB TT 7 Transform Generate In this mode a device is sending data to the Local bus Consume In this mode a device is receiving data from the Local bus Pipeline In this mode a device is neither generating nor consuming data Data is passed through from the device on the left to the device on the right Append In this mode a device pipelines the data until the end of fr
6. 396 Register Programming Appendix C write middle significant byte of post arm count sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x79 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command write most significant byte of post arm count sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x7B 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command initialize the sample rate registers sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x63 8 129 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x61 8 255 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command disable reclocking of the reference divider enabled for reference divider values of 100 000 or greater sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x4B 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit_pat retain register settings disable reclocking bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg amp OxEF sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x4B 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set the sample rate to 10 kHz 100 us set decade division register for a division by 1 000 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x61 8 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set binary division register for a division by 2 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld
7. A D Overrange 9 900000E 037 2046 negative reading S E Input Amplifier Overrange or 9 900000E 037 2048 Differential Input Amplifier Overrange A single ended input amplifier overrange occurs when the input signal exceeds 5V A differential input amplifier overrange occurs on the 0 1V 0 2V 0 5V 1V 2V and 5V ranges when the signal on the HI or LO input exceeds 11V An overrange occurs on the 10V 20V 50V and 100V ranges when the signal on the HI or LO input exceeds 110V digitizer s Questionable Signal Status Register However the overrange does not generate an error message Retrieving Readings Each time the digitizer is INITiated it takes a new set of readings Readings are retrieved directly from the A D converters or from digitizer memory Figure 3 11 Each new set of readings overwrites any readings currently in memory Retrieved readings are transferred over the VME VXI data transfer bus or over the Local bus The methods used to retrieve readings are listed below relative to their transfer rates e READ page 139 slowest e FETCh page 139 e DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress page 141 e VME bus Data register access page 146 e Local bus transfers page 156 fastest These methods are described in the following paragraphs Table 3 4 summarizes the digitizer s data transfer modes and transfer rates Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 137 Table 3 4
8. NA 00000 5 HP E1429 Data Register in A24 Address Space REGISTER a WORKS 3E16 A24 200000 6 3C16 ADDRESS 7 o o o o SPACE o o 200000 REGISTER ADDRESS OE g Dato Low Register 221000 4 Y IFCOOO SPACE OCig Data High Register 220000 6 OAs _ Response Data Extended Register 200000 A16 E OB _ Protocol Signal_Register 1F0000 y ADDRESS 2 080 768 O6 _ Offset_Register S SPACE AN 044 Stotus Control Register 0245 Device Type Register 000000 5 F O0 g _ ID Register s HP E1429A B A16 Configuration Register Map A16 Base Address IFC000 logical address 64 s r E1429A FIG3 12 o 2 080 768 logical address 64 A16 Register Address Base Address Register Offset Figure 3 12 Digitizer Registers in A16 and A24 Address Space Note Determining the A24 Base Address The following information on determining the data register address is based on the computer configuration shown in Figure 3 12 and on address mapping as performed by the HP E1406 Command Module s resource manager For configurations with embedded controllers or configurations with a resource manager other than the HP E1406 Command Module refer to those manual s containing information on A24 address mapping There are three ways to determine the digitizer s A24 base address 1 Note the base address assigned by the resource manager at power on The HP E1406 resource manager configuration sequence can be
9. NOTE If the non volatile mode of memory is enabled MEMory BATTery STATe ON then all of the maximum reading counts shown above decrease by four These four memory locations in each segment hold the data necessary to recover all readings after a power failure 274 Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger STARt COUNt Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command This command is coupled to SENSe SWEep POINts SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts ARM STARt COUNT and MEMory BATTery STATe e TRIGger STARt COUNt values between 1 and 7 will be rounded to 1 or 7 whichever is closer to the specified count e If the count is set to INFinity or 9 9E 37 the ABORt command must be used to return the trigger system to the idle state before any readings taken may be read from memory Due to this the READ command can not be used when TRIGger STARt COUNT is set to INFinity attempts to do so will result in error 214 Trigger deadlock e Multiple bursts of a measurement process involving both pre arm and post arm readings ARM STARt COUNt gt 1 and SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts lt 0 is a special case which causes memory partitioning to occur This partitioning of memory is handled automatically by the instrument and is a function of ARM STARt COUNt and TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe SWEep POINts TRIGger STARt COUNt is satisfied first and then ARM STARt COUNt is attempted e Related Commands ABORt INITiate MMed
10. 336 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 3 HP E1429A B Error Messages Cont d Code Message Description 161 Invalid block data The number of bytes in a definite length data block does not equal the number of bytes indicated by the block header 168 Block data not allowed Block data was specified when another parameter type i e discrete numeric boolean is required 171 Invalid Expression The expression used to calculate a parameter value is invalid 178 Expression data not allowed An expression cannot be used to calculate a parameter value 181 Invalid outside macro definition A macro parameter placeholder lt number was encountered outside of a macro definition 183 Invalid inside macro definition A command was encountered that is not allowed inside a macro 184 Macro parameter error A command inside the macro definition had the wrong number or wrong type of parameters 211 Trigger ignored A trigger was received and the digitizer was not in the wait for trigger state Or a trigger was received from a source other than the specified source 212 Arm ignored An arm was received and the digitizer was not in the wait for arm state Or an arm was received from a source other than the specified source 213 Init ignored INITiate IMMediate received while the digitizer was initiated 214 Trigger d
11. Comments 1 The Arm Window The arming window set by this program is 4V to 6V on the digitizer s 10V range The upper boundary of the window 6V is set with the ARM LEVel1l NEGative command This means when a NEGative going input signal reaches 6V the digitizer is armed Similarly the lower boundary 4V of the window is set with the ARM LEVell POSitive command Thus when a POSitive going input signal reaches 4V the digitizer is armed Because the NEGative going level is greater than the POSitive going level the digitizer is armed each time up to the arm count the signal enters the window 2 Additional Information Level arming is covered in detail in Chapter 3 in the section Arming and Triggering 52 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Pre and Post Arm Readings This program demonstrates e how to program the digitizer to take a minimum of 100 pre arm readings and 100 post arm readings e how to set the arm source to an external signal applied to the Ext 1 BNC PREPOST C RST CLS reset and clear the digitizer CONF1 ARR VOLT 200 2 3 set 200 readings total 2V range Diff input port 3 ARM SOUR1 EXT arm source is front panel Ext 1 BNC SENS1 SWE OFFS POIN 100 set 100 pre arm readings INIT put digitizer in wait for arm state FETCH retrieve pre and post arm readings Comments 1 Pre arm and Post arm Reading Count When measurements consist of pre and p
12. trigger source is period derived from the TRIG TIM command set sample period to 20 us set up input port 4 on channel 2 set voltage range on channel 2 the arm and trigger sources are the same as for channel 1 Using the Digitizer 57 Comments digitizer commands INIT put digitizer 1 in wait for arm state INIT put digitizer2 in wait for arm state Command Module commands OUTP TTLTO STAT ON enable line TTLTO Press Enter return to arm the digitizers OUTP TTLTO IMM apply a pulse to TTLTO digitizer commands FETC1 retrieve readings from digitizer1 channel 1 FETC2 retrieve readings from digitizer1 channel 2 FETC1 retrieve readings from digitizer2 channel 1 FETC2 retrieve readings from digitizer2 channel 2 1 Synchronizing Digitizers By routing OUTPut the reference clock from one digitizer to all digitizers in the system the sample rate is derived from the same reference Digitizer samples can then be taken at precise intervals of each other 2 Input Channels In this program samples are taken on the single ended and differential inputs of two digitizers for a total of four channels When sampling either the channel s single ended input or the differential inputs can be used You cannot use both sets of inputs simultaneously on a single channel 3 CONFiguring Channels Independently In this p
13. 59 e VME Bus Data Transfers 00 000 e eee eee 63 VME REAL Gein 5 cis Selendis tenedor eat 63 VME SEGLO ye Ou a 67 e VME Bus Data Transfers Using an Embedded Controller tee italiano ls on dalt 72 SEGTSTIO CPP aiii e da a 72 SEGIS TIZ CPP iow ore re SY as PERE Re Ges dad Be 74 e Local Bus Data Transfers 00 00 0200 eee 83 LOCAL ADC oi oer wes a ni a2 83 EBUS2PS T C tp 30 gens a Soke eee tes 88 EBUSAUTO Comisario teas 93 e Using the Digitizer Status Registers 101 Usi ng the Prog ramS Each example program listed in this chapter and on the example programs disk begins with the CONFigure command and then uses lower level digitizer commands Chapter 1 Table 1 3 to customize the configuration Using this format the programs can easily be modified to match your application The Programming Each example in this chapter lists only the digitizer s SCPI commands with Language the exception of the VME and Local bus data transfer programs The I O input output constructs of the programming language you use need to be added to the programs Note that the example programs disk HP P N E1429 10302 contains copies of the programs compiled and tested using Borland Turbo C Version 1 0 and Microsoft QuickCO Version 2 0 The program name is shown prior to the program listing in the chapter Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 49 Configuring the Digitizer Input This program demonstrates t
14. Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes This command will cause a settings conflict error if the same TTL trigger line is used in any of the following ARM STARt SOURcel ARM STARt SOURce2 or TRIG STARt SOURce e Unlike the ECLTRG trigger lines the TTLRG trigger lines are not independent with regard to FEED All TTLTRG triggers enabled will be outputting the same synchronization signal specified by the OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt FEED command e Routing synchronization pulses to the TTLTRG trigger lines is independently enabled disabled for each line e RST Condition OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe OFF Example Enabling sync pulse output to TTLTRGO and TTLTRG5 OUTP TTLTO ON OUTP TTLT5 ON Enable TTLTRGO Enable TTLTRG5 248 Command Reference OUTPut Subsystem READ lt chan gt The READ command is used to cause a measurement and to retrieve the readings from that measurement It is equivalent to executing the commands ABORt INITiate MMediate FETCh lt chan gt Subsystem READ lt chan gt query only Syntax READ READ lt chan gt returns readings from the specified channel in the format specified by the FORMat DATA command Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 2 none Comments READ or READ will return data from channel 1 only READ2 will return data from channel 2 only e A READ1 followed by a R
15. The command which removes the block header from the readings is IOENTERAB The parameters passed to IOENTERAB are ADDR the address of the digitizer rdgs the array name which will store the readings bytes a variable specifying the maximum number of bytes to be read swap a variable specifying how the bytes are placed into memory 2 bytes per reading Converting Packed The equation for converting packed readings is Readings reading voltage readingpacked 16 reading resolution Reading resolution is a function of the signal range The resolutions for the digitizer signal ranges are given in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Reading Resolutions for Packed Data Conversions Signal Range Resolution Signal Range Resolution 0 1023 to 0 10235 0 00005 5 115 to 5 1175 0 0025 0 2046 to 0 2047 0 00010 10 230 to 10 235 0 005 0 5115 to 0 51175 0 00025 20 460 to 20 470 0 010 1 0230 to 1 0235 0 0005 51 15 to 51 175 0 025 2 0460 to 2 0470 0 0010 102 30 to 102 35 0 05 136 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Overrange Indications The digitizer indicates an overrange condition input greater than the selected range can measure by returning the values shown in Table 3 3 An amplifier overrange single ended or differential input sets bit 0 in the Table 3 3 Digitizer Overload Readings Condition Reading A D Code A D Overrange 9 900000E 037 2047 positive reading
16. 388 Register Programming Appendix C All other digitizer parameters e g arm source arm count remain as set by the previous CONFigure command Note The following program contains a C function which re initiates the digitizer void initiate long base_addr This function shows the exact sequence the registers must be written to in order to successfully re initate the digitizer When modifying this program be sure that the sequence for re initiating the digitizer remains the same Appendix C Register Programming 389 REG_PROG C REG_PROG C This program configures the digitizer using register reads and writes The program sets an initial digitizer configuration using the CONFigure command and takes a set of readings using the READ command Register reads and writes are then used to change the measurement range change the trigger source change the post arm reading count re initiate the digitizer and retrieve the readings Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library define ADDR 70905L VO path between the digitizer and PC define CMD_MOD 70900L I O path between the PC and the Command Module Function prototypes long get_base_addr void void rst_clr void void conf_read void
17. Continued on Next Page 26 Getting Started Chapter 1 prt strtok Irmdata printf n t s prt Print out each LRN data token while prt NULL prt strtok NULL Exit when data returned by OPC 1 is reached if atoi prt 1 break Print one user screen s worth of LRN data have user press Enter to see the next screen of data if loop gt 23 printf n nPress VEnterY to continue scanf c amp ch fflush stdin loop 0 printf n t s prt loop increment counter Chapter 1 Getting Started 27 Instrument and Programming Languages SCPI Programming Command Listings Note Coupled Commands The purpose of this manual is to teach you how to use the HP E1429A B digitizer To do this the manual uses block diagrams flowcharts and example programs In most cases the manual s example programs list only the digitizer s SCPI commands The I O input output constructs depend on the programming language you use SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments is an ASCII based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments The message based digitizer has an on board microprocessor which interprets the ASCII command strings and returns ASCII formatted results The typical format of commands listed in the command reference and throughout this manual is TRIGger STAR1
18. RFTRigger When Ready For TRigger is selected the normally high output level goes low after an ARM event occurs and the ARM DEL ay specified has been met At this point the HP E1429 is ready to accept sample triggers The level stays low until all sample triggers TRIGger STARt COUNT associated with the current arm cycle have completed 244 Command Reference OUTPut Subsystem Note Parameters OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED SENSe 112 SWEep OFFSet POINts Changes the normally high output level to low after the pre arm count SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts has been met This would be used to determine when an arming event could occur without getting an Arm ignored error due to the pre arm count not being satisfied The level would not return to high again until either the next arm cycle if ARM STARt COUNt gt 1 or the next INITiate command if this is the last or only arm cycle This source is only useful when pre arm and post arm readings are being taken it is allowed without error in post arm measurements but is not of any real use SENSe 112 ROSCillator The reference oscillator clock is output For all reference oscillator sources except EXTernal the resulting output signal is the inverse of the actual reference i e the output pulse goes low on the rising edge of the reference oscillator For SENSe ROSCillator SOURce EXTernal the output level goes low on the falling edge Note that this signal begins being ou
19. Reading 32 bit Packed Reading Format pa VME BUS LOCAL BUS E1429A FIG3 11 Figure 3 11 Retrieving Readings from Digitizer Memory 138 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Retrieving The most common method of retrieving readings from the digitizer is using Readi ngs U sing the READ subsystem which consists of the command READ READ lt chan gt The lt chan gt parameters are 1 returns readings from channel 1 default channel 2 returns readings from channel 2 READ is equivalent to executing the following sequence of commands e ABORt aborts the readings after the arm count and trigger count is reached e INITiate places the digitizer in wait for arm state e FETCh lt chan gt retrieves the readings from memory and places them on the VME VXI data transfer bus As a result READ is used for applications that require readings to be immediately available to a computer rather than remaining in digitizer memory Because each READ initiates the digitizer executing READ1 followed by READ2 causes the digitizer to take two sets of measurements If it is necessary to obtain readings from both channels during the same period use INIT and FETCh which are described in the next section Retrieving One method of retrieving readings from memory involves the digitizer s
20. This program represents one method that can be used to Icheck for programming errors in HP BASIC programs Assign I O path between the computer and HP E1429A B ASSIGN A_d TO 70905 COM A_d Define branch to be taken when an HP E1429A B error occurs Enable HP IB interface to generate an interrupt when an error loccurs ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 Clear all bits in the standard event status register unmask the standard event status group summary bit in the HP E1429A B status byte Iregister decimal weight 32 unmask the query error device Idependent error execution error and command error bits decimal sum 60 in the HP E1429A B standard event status register Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 45 140 OUTPUT A_d CLS 150 OUTPUT A_d SRE 32 160 OUTPUT A_d ESE 60 170 180 Subprogram calls would be here 190 200 WAIT 1 allow error branch to occur before turning intr off 210 OFF INTR 7 220 END 230 240 SUB Errmsg 250 Errmsg Subprogram which displays HP E1429 programming errors 260 COM A_d 270 DIM Message 256 280 Read digitizer status byte register and clear service request bit 290 B SPOLL A_d 300 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 310 OUTPUT A_d 320 OUTPUT A_d ABORT abort digitizer activity 330 REPEAT 340 OUTPUT A_d SYST ERR read digitizer error queue 350 ENTER A_d Code Message 360 PRINT Code Messa
21. readcnt rdgs configure the digitizer for 20 readings 5V range on input port 3 IOOUTPUTS ADDR CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 5 3 26 check for errors in the CONFigure command check_error conf_read initiate the digitizer and read fetch the readings IOOUTPUTS ADDR READ 5 IOENTERA ADDR rdgs amp readings for i 0 i lt readings i printf nReading d f i readcnt free rdgs printf nPress Enter return to change configuration with register reads and writes scanf c go Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Programming 391 PRR ORE OC ORR ERR RRR ERE N void input_config long base_adar This function changes the measurement range from 5V as set by the CONFigure command to 1V using the A D shift register The range is changed by enabling disabling various attenuators on the input signal path int shift_count 55 bit_set 0 float bit 0 char stat_read 80 stat_write 80 strobe_write 80 create DIAG PEEK command which reads the A D status register sprintf stat_read DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x03 8 Set channel 1 range to 1V by setting bits 38 37 35 34 and 10 as required in the A D shift register for shift_count 55 shift_count gt 0 shift_count switch shift_count turn channel 1 14 dB internal attenuator off read bit 38 by reading the
22. A The reference from which the arm delay is derived is set with bit O of the arm control register The setting of bit O to 0 or 1 depends on the reference clock and the amount of delay required Determine the reference from which the delay is derived and set bit 0 accordingly Retain the settings of bits 7 1 If delay reference clock period lt 65 534 bit O is set to 1 and the maximum delay is 65 534 reference period If delay reference clock period gt 65 534 bit 0 is set to 0 and the maximum delay is 655 350 reference period 2 Load the arm delay registers A Write the decimal equivalent of the most significant byte to register 51 Write the decimal equivalent of the least significant byte 1 to register 53 The additional count 1 is required because there is always a one reference cycle delay from when the digitizer is armed to when it enters the wait for trigger state i e is ready to begin sampling For example to program an arm delay of 1 ms MSB LSB 01001110 00100001 7810 3310 7810 is written to register 51 3310 is written to register 53 The reference source from which the sample rate is derived is set with the register listed below e Reference oscillator register base 4F 16 Write the decimal equivalent bit pattern for the desired reference source to the reference source register base 4F16 Retain the settings of bits 7 3 Appendix C Register Programming
23. Real time during measurements paced by arm trigger system From memory after measurements paced by receiving module on local bus Maximum speed 80 MByte sec 1 e can do full speed on channels Size Slots Connectors Weight kg Device Type VXIBus Revision Compliance Register Level Documentation SCPI Revision Manufacturer Code Model Code Slave both C 1 P1 P2 1 9 Message Based Servant 1 4 Subset 1992 0 4095 Decimal 448 Decimal A16 A24 D08 D16 D32 328 Specifications Appendix A Currents in Amps typical E1429A E1429B 5V I pm 2 9 3 1 I dm 0 5 0 5 12V I pm 0 2 0 2 I dm 0 04 0 04 12V pm 0 2 0 2 I dm 0 04 0 04 24V I pm 0 1 0 1 I dm 0 05 0 05 24V_ I pm 0 1 0 1 I dm 0 05 0 05 5 2V I pm 3 6 4 1 I dm 0 36 0 36 2V_ Ipm 1 2 1 3 I dm 0 12 0 12 5VS I pm 0 0 I dm 0 0 Typical Watts Slot 41 5 45 3 dPressure H20 0 8mm AirFlow liters s 3 8 EMC To meet EMC requirements in Europe a backplane connector shield kit is included Built In Test Extensive built in test checks memory timebase much of the trigger system and part of the analog signal path Notes pertaining to IEEE 1057 1057 1 Based on Code Transition Levels per 4 1 2 except that levels 2047 and 2046 are not included in this characterization The minimum code transition level characterized is from 2046 to 2045 the maximum is from 2046 to 2047
24. STATus OPERation QUEStionable EVENt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units unmask numeric or O through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands STATus subsystem SRE STB e RST Condition unaffected e Power on Condition STATUS OPERationIQUEStionable ENABLE 0 Example Setting the Operation register enable mask STAT OPER ENAB H0040 Enable summary on Waiting for ARM bit OPERation QUEStionable EVENt STATus OPERation QUEStionable EVENt returns the contents of the appropriate event register Reading the register clears it to 0 Comments Both event registers are also cleared to O by the CLS common command e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands STATus subsystem SRE STB e RST Condition unaffected e Power on Condition Both event registers are cleared to 0 Example Querying the Operation event register STAT OPER Query Operation event register 268 Command Reference STATus Subsystem STATus OPERation QUEStionable NTRansition OPERation QUEStionable NTRansition STATus OPERation QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt sets the negative transition mask For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the associated conditi
25. TRAC DEL ALL delete all readings on memory card TRAC DEF SET1 80 store readings 80 bytes in SET1 VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE CONS set Local bus mode to consume STAT OPC INIT OFF execute OPC after INIT is parsed Execute each command in digitizer1 using a loop length sizeof digitizer1 sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop E A digitizer1 loop strlen digitizer1 loop Execute each command in digitizer2 using a loop length sizeof digitizer2 sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop eros digitizer2 loop strlen digitizer2 loop Execute each command in memory length sizeof memory sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop ROSAE NEN memory loop strlen memory loop check for digitizer and memory card configuration errors check_error digitizer1 ADDR_G check_error digitizer2 ADDR_ check_error memory ADDR_MEM Continued on Next Page 410 Local Bus Interleaved Transfers Appendix D reer ee a OR CECE CRE CECE CORE REECE ECC void initiate void int i 0 readings 40 swap 0 bytes 0 length 1 rdgs float rdy char If_remove 1 dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 40 sizeof float allocate computer memory for reading storage swap sizeof int each reading
26. The following registers are used to set the digitizer s arm and trigger parameters base 4116 The function of the Abort and Arm Immediate register depends on whether you are writing to the register or reading the register Its useage is defined as follows Address 5 4 3 2 base 4116 register write measurements aborted register read arm immediate Writing any 8 bit value to this register aborts the current measurements Reading this register arms the digitizer if the digitizer is initiated wait for arm state Once armed the digitizer moves to the wait for trigger state base 4316 The arm status register monitors states and conditions associated with the digitizer s arming hardware The register bits are defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 4316 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Purpose Pre Stage2Q No arm Last Begin Delayed Initiated Initialized delay TRG samp Pre delay Bit 7 is set to 1 when an arm signal is received but the arm delay as set by the arm delay register must elapse before the digitizer is armed When arm immediate is used with the dual rate sampling mode bit 5 base 4B 16 bit 7 is set to 1 one reference period before the digitizer is actually armed Stage2Q Bit 6 is set to 1 when an arm signal other than an arm immediate is received No arm Bit 5 is set to 1
27. clock source and as the data source bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg amp OxFO 0x04 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x02 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command initiate the timebase processor load the arm count and initialize the trigger counters sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x59 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command send the timebase processor initiate pulse sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x45 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command Continued on Next Page 398 Register Programming Appendix C YR Re A ROT COCR OU ORR MCR MURR RM CCR RR CCR ERECT RRC void memory_retrieve long base_addr This function sets the address locations of the readings in digitizer memory and enables the readings to be retrieved using the digitizer s data register char command 80 int bit_reg 0 float bit_pat 0 using the traffic register set the pulse register as the high speed clock source the A D is still the data source sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x02 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD 8bit_pat retain register settings set pulse register as the high speed clock s
28. 9 Query error register IOENTERS ADDR into amp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit while atoi into 0 printf Error s in function s n n into func_tion IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS ADDR into amp length Querying Command Settings As you configure the digitizer it is often useful to determine command settings programmatically This can be done by adding a question mark at the end of any SCPI command header except the MEASure command and then sending the command without parameters The following programs query the parameters of the CONFigure command Assuming the CONFigure command was executed as indicated in program CONF C the following query response is returned ARR 20 1 000000 0 000500 1 where 20 reading count size parameter 1 000000 expected value 0 000500 reading resolution 1 input port Chapter 1 Getting Started 43 HP BASIC DIM Setting 1 000 OUTPUT 70905 CONF query CONFigure command ENTER 70905 Setting PRINT Setting END QUERY C This program queries HP E1429 settings Include the necessary header files include lt stdio h gt include lt string h gt include lt cfunc h gt from HP IB command library Define E1429 HP IB address macro define ADDR 70905L VO path between the PC and the
29. Appendix A Specifications 329 Notes 330 Specifications Appendix A Appendix B Useful Tables Appendix Contents The tables in this appendix contain information often referred to during HP E1429A B programming The tables in this appendix include e Table B 1 HP E1429A B Example Program Listing 332 e Table B 2 HP E1429A B Power on Reset Conditions 334 e Table B 3 HP E1429A B Error Messages 336 Appendix B Useful Tables 331 Table B 1 HP E1429A B Example Program Listing Location Program Name Language Description Chapter 1 IDN C HP BASIC C Program to test communication between the PC and the digitizer SLFTST C S E1429A B Self Test RSTCLS C Resetting and clearing the digitizer LRN C z Power on reset configuration MEAS C i Making a measurement with the digitizer CONF C Configuring the digitizer QUERY C Queries SCPI command settings ERRORCHK C Error checking program Chapter 2 INPUT C C Configures the digitizer input ARMCNT C i Takes a burst of readings ARMLEVEL C Arm on a specified input signal level PREPOST C E Taking pre and post arm readings SAMPLE C Specifying a sample rate DUALSAMP C s Pre and post arm dual rate sampling MULT_AD C Uses multiple digitizers PACKED C i Uses the packed data format VME_REAL C y VME bus data transfers VME_SEG1 C Transfers segmented readings SEGTST16 CPP C VME bus data 16 bit transfers using
30. CALibration lt chan gt SECure STA Te lt mode gt lt code gt enables or disables calibration security Disable the calibration security to calibrate the HP E1429 change the security code or change the protected user data Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1or2 none mode boolean OFF O ON 1 none code character 1 to 12 characters none data Executable when initiated Yes Coupled Command No Either channel may be referenced enabling disabling is done to both channels at once with this command The code parameter must be present to disable the security or it generates error 109 Missing parameter The value supplied must match the currently programmed security code or it generates error 224 Illegal parameter value A 1 second delay will then occur before the HP E1429 executes any subsequent commands To enable security the code parameter is not required but is checked if it is present If a code is given and is incorrect error 224 Illegal parameter value will be generated Security must be disabled to calibrate the HP E1429 or to use the PUD command Related commands CALibration GAIN CALibration ZERO CALibration STORe CALibration SECure CODE PUD RST Condition unaffected Example Disabling calibration security CAL SEC STAT OFF E1429 Disable security assuming factory set security code 206 Comman
31. CALibration lt chan gt ZERO e MINimum and MAXimum are not allowed with this command e Optional parameters that are left blank are filled from left to right Therefore it may be necessary to use the syntax DEFault to note that a particular parameter has been defaulted For example to default the number of readings and specify a sample rate the command would appear as CAL ZERO DEF 05 one e CALibration ZERO forces the internal reference 20 MHz oscillator to be used Sample rates are attained using that reference e The default number of readings is 1000 and the default period is 1 0E 4 seconds These numbers were chosen such that the product of the two is a period that is an integral multiple of both 50 Hz and 60 Hz line cycles 0 1 seconds in this case e The product of the period and number of readings will be checked to see if it exceeds 10 seconds and if so error 221 Settings conflict Calibration time too long occurs e The default lt mode gt is ONE which calibrates using the current settings of SENSe VOLTage RANGe and SENSe FUNCtion Specifying lt mode gt ALL will do a zero calibration on all voltage range settings for both of the ports on the specified channel e Related commands CALibration GAIN CALibration VALue CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition none Example Performing a zero calibration CAL SEC STAT OFF E1429 Disable security assuming factory set security code CAL1 ZERO DEF D
32. SRE 16 Enable request on MAV STB STB returns the value of the Status Byte Register Bit 6 decimal weight 64 is set if a service request is pending STB should not be used to read the Status Byte register if a service request is generated by a message available MAV condition Comments STB is a query Thus sending the command in response to a MAV condition will generate Error 410 Query interrupted e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands SRE e RST Condition none TRG TRG is the command equivalent of the HP IB Group Execute Trigger and the VXIbus Trigger word serial command and has exactly the same effect Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands ARM and TRIGger subsystem SOURce commands e RST Condition none Chapter 4 Command Reference 308 TST TST WAI Caution Comments Comments TST causes the HP E1429 to execute its internal self test and return a value indicating the results of the test A zero 0 response indicates that the self test passed A one 1 response indicates that the test failed A failure also generates an error message with information on why the test failed Additional information on the failure is provided by the DIAGnostic TEST command When the test completes all commands are set to their RST values Executing the self test using TST erases all data in the digitizer s
33. TRIGger STARt TlMer1 lt period gt TRIiGger STARt TIMer2 lt period gt Removes the digitizer from the wait for trigger state Specifies the total number of pre and post arm readings taken during each arm cycle Sends an immediate trigger to the digitizer A reading is taken if the digitizer is in the wait for trigger state Sets the trigger source Sets the digitizer sample rate Sets the post arm sample rate for dual rate sampling VINStrument VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS RESet VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts lt count gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO lt mode gt VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA lt voltage_list gt VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED lt source gt VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE lt mode gt VINStrument CONFigure VME SEND ADDRess DATA VINStrument IDENtity Sets the Local bus data source Places the digitizer in the wait for trigger state and starts the data transfer from digitizer memory to the Local bus Sets the Local bus operating mode Resets the digitizer s E1429B Local bus chip Sets the number of readings per Local bus transfer block Sets the digitizers to the Local bus interleaved transfer mode Tests the Local bus by tra
34. The Status Byte register can be read with either of the following commands STB SPOLL Both commands return the decimal weighted sum of all set bits in the register The difference between the commands is that STB does not clear bit 6 RQS service request The serial poll SPOLL does clear bit 6 All bits in the Status Byte register with the exception of MAV are cleared with the command CLS MAV is cleared when data is read from the output queue The Service Request The Service Request Enable register specifies which status group Enable Register summary bit s will send a service request message to the computer over HP IB The bits are specified unmasked with the command SRE lt unmask gt All unmasked bits in the Enable register can be determined with the command SRE The Service Request Enable register is cleared at power on or by specifying an lt unmask gt value of 0 Presetting the Enable The Enable registers and Transition Filters in the Questionable Signal and Register and Transition Operation Status Groups can be preset initialized with the command Filter STATus PRESet All bits in the Enable registers are masked i e lt unmask gt is 0 and all bits in the Condition registers set corresponding bits in the Event registers on positive 0 to 1 transitions Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 173 Synchronizing the One method of synchronizing the digitizer with other digitizer
35. i rdgs i 0 0025 free rdgs JFTRFRRRE SDE RR AREA ERRE AER ERRE R RRA A RENA A ERAN ER ARENA AREA AR ERAARARA AE ARA DARE long get_base_addr void base address of generator digitizer s A24 offset register in A16 address space long base_addr 0x1FC00O 40 64 6 generator digitizer logical address is 48 float a24offst A24 offset from A16 offset register char rd_addr 80 command string variable Create the command string which reads the A24 base address from the offset register sprintf rd_addr DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 16 Send DIAG PEEK command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD rd_addr strlen rd_addr Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 97 Read value from offset register IOENTER CMD_MOD amp a24offst Multiply offset value by 256 for 24 bit address value a24offst 256 return long a24offst PRES II ISIS O OO pCO POOP PEC COCO CC CCC CCE CCC CECE COO COTO C CTC SO TEL void rst_clr long address Reset and clear the instruments IOOUTPUTS address RST CLS 9 A PRRPRESPERERDELEARE LER RAR RRE AE ARAN AR ARA ARRE AE REE PARRA AREAS ERASE void check_error char array long address char _ into 161 intlength 160 IOOUTPUTS address SYST ERR 9 Query error register IOENTERS address into amp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determin
36. s are changed to reset values and that both the local bus VINStrument LB US and VME bus VINS VME are turned off Be aware that these new states will still be in effect after the MEASure command is complete See the mumble which section for a complete list of the reset settings for the HP E1429 The following states are set up after the reset and thus in most cases will not be the RST value for that command a SENSe lt n gt FUNCtion is set to VOLTage DC lt port gt b SENSe lt n gt VOLTage DC RANGe is set to the value implied by the expected value given c INPut lt port gt FILTer is set to ON d SENSe SWEep POINts and TRIGger STARt COUNt are set to the lt size gt parameter e Related commands SENSe FUNCtion SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe SENSe S WEep POINts SENSe ROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt subsystem ARM STARt subsystem e RST Condition none Example Measuring 1 5 V on the differential input of channel 1 MEAS1 ARRay VOLT 20 1 5 3 Set up take and bring back 20 readings of 1 5 Volts peak on port 3 of channel 1 MEASure lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 239 MEMory The MEMory subsystem controls whether memory will be non volatile and determines the battery charge Subsystem MEMory Syntax BATTery STATe lt state gt CHARge query only BATTery STATe MEMory BATTery STA Te lt state gt enables or disables non volatile memory If state ON 1 is set then
37. s or with Digitizer other instruments is to determine when the digitizer parser is idle This is done using the command STATus OPC INITiate lt state gt together with the commands OPC OPC WAI The behavior of OPC OPC and WAI depends on the state set by STATus OPC INITiate When state is ON sending OPC OPC or WAI following INITiate MMediate VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate or VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate requires the digitizer to complete all measurements or complete the VME or Local bus data transfer before allowing further digitizer operations to continue ON is the power on state When state is OFF the execution of OPC OPC or WAI following the above commands indicates the previous commands have executed and that further operations command execution can resume without the digitizer in the idle state Digitizer commands that can be executed during this time are identified in the command reference Chapter 4 as being executable when initiated Refer also to the command reference for detailed information on OPC OPC and WAL Saving Digitizer Configurations To minimize repeated programming up to 10 digitizer configurations can be saved and later recalled The configuration saved is restored with the exception of the STATus subsystem parameters the CALibration SECure command state or any other parameters not affected by RST A configuration is identified by a n
38. 6 SPACE 0Ci6 Data High Register A16 OA 6 Response Bala Extended Register ADDRESS FEa0O 08 Protocol Signal Register 16 SPACE 2 080 768 0616 Offset Register IFOOOO 6 Ne O46 Status Control Register 026 Device Type Register IFOO00 16 001 6 ID Register HP E1429A B A16 Configuration Register Map A16 Base Address IFCOOO 6 logical address 64 g 000000 y r o 2 080 768 logical address 64 o A16 Register Address Base Address Register Offset E1429A FIGC 1 Figure C 1 HP E1429A B A24 Address Space Appendix C Register Programming 343 Note Determining the A24 Base Address The following information on determining register addresses is based on the computer configuration shown in Figure C 1 and on address mapping as performed by the HP E1406 Command Module s resource manager For configurations with embedded controllers or configurations with a resource manager other than the HP E1406 Command Module refer to those manuals containing information on A24 address mapping When you are reading or writing to a digitizer register a hexadecimal or decimal register address is specified An A24 register address is A24 register address A24 base address register offset There are three ways to determine the digitizer s A24 base address 1 Note the base address assigned by the resource manager at power on The HP E1406 resource manager configuration sequence can be monitored using an RS 232 terminal or printer
39. ABORt CONFigure INITiate FETCh Subsystem MEASure lt chan gt Syntax ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input port gt ARRay VOLTage DC MEASure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input port gt will configure for taking lt size gt number of readings on the specified channel and lt input port gt The lt expected value gt and lt resolution gt parameters are used to set SENSe VOLTage RANGe to an appropriate setting for making the measurement on the specified input port and channel If no expected value is given the 1V range 1 0235 V peak is used If a resolution is specified it is checked for correctness against what is possible with the expected value range and if too fine for the given expected value error 231 Data questionable CONF or MEAS unable to attain resolution specified will occur Each channel consists of two ports one port is single ended and the other is differential The two ports on channel 1 have odd numbers port 1 is the single ended input and port 3 is the differential input On channel 2 the single ended input is port 2 and the differential input is port 4 The expected value parameter specified should be the maximum expected measurement value The voltage range is set according to the expected value supplied If the expected value is greater than 98 of a given rang
40. HP does not warrant that the operation of the product or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation Of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied prod ucts or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or im proper site preparation or maintenance The design and implementation of any circuit on this product is the sole responsibility of the Buyer HP does not warrant the Buyer s circuitry or malfunctions of HP products that result from the Buyer s circuitry In addition HP does not warrant any damage that oc curs as a result of the Buyer s circuit or any defects that result from Buyer supplied products NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CON TRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice HEWLETT PACKARD HP MAKES NO WAR RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
41. INSerter digitizer reading 1 INSerter digitizer reading n GENerator digitizer reading 1 GENerator digitizer reading n The memory card stores the readings in the digitizer s packed data format Packed readings are signed 16 bit numbers preceded by the ANSI IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block header Packed readings are always numbers between 1 0230 2046 and 1 0235 2047 To convert the readings to voltages each reading is divided by 16 to remove the data label bits 0 3 and is multipled by 0 0025 which is the reading resolution for the 5V range 6 Additional Information Additional information on Local bus operation and on the Local bus commands can be found in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer and in Chapter 4 Command Reference Information on the digitizer s Arm Source register can be found in Appendix C Register Programming 100 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer Status Registers This program demonstrates e how to use the condition register transition filter enable register and status byte to determine when events monitored by the condition register occur One of the conditions monitored by the operation status groups condition register is when the digitizer receives an arm signal When armed a high to low transition of the wait for arm bit bit 6 in the condition register occurs In this program the digitizer is set to arm when the input signal on
42. TRIGger COUNt or SENSe SWEep POINts When the count is reached the state is exited otherwise the instrument waits for another trigger and takes another reading Upon exit from this state the instrument returns to the initiated state and checks to see whether or not ARM COUNt is satisfied If the arm count is reached the instrument returns to the idle state If not another loop is executed by entering the wait for arm state The following controls can be specified from the ARM subsystem e The event s which will cause the transition out of the wait for arm state ARM SOURce1 and ARM SOURce2 There is a rich set of event sources to choose from and when both sources are enabled neither set to source HOLD a logical OR of the two sources occurs The occurrance of the appropriate event on either source will cause the HP E1429 to exit from the wait for arm state e The number of start arm events to occur before the digitizer returns to the idle state ARM COUNt Another way to think of this is the number of bursts of readings which will occur 186 Command Reference ARM Subsystem Subsystem Syntax STARt COUNt ARM STARt COUNt e The active edge for generation of an arm event ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt on the selected arm source n 1 orn 2 e The measurement signal level to attain before allowing a measurement to begin ARM STARt LEVel lt n gt This is used with ARM SOURce INTernal lt n gt It is also possible to cr
43. The C Size VXIbus Systems Installation and Getting Started Guide contains information on connecting a terminal 2 Execute the following HP E1406 Command Module command VXI CONFigure DeviceLIST lt logical_address gt The C language example programs disk contains the program Query C By changing the line define ADDR 70905L E1429 digitizer address to define ADDR 70900L E1406 address and entering the command VXI CONF DLIS 40 or the current E1429 logical address a program string similar to the following is returned when the program executes vxi conf dlis 40 40 0 4095 448 1 0 MSG A24 H00220000 H00001000 Ready MBinstr INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 5 344 Register Programming Appendix C 3 The hexadecimal number in bold is the digitizer s A24 base address 4 Read the digitizer s offset register in A16 address space As shown in Figure C 1 the Offset register is one of the digitizer s configuration registers In a system where the HP E1406 Command Module allocates address space the A16 base address of the configuration registers is computed as 1FC00016 LADDR 64 16 2 080 768 LADDR 64 where 1FC00016 is the starting location of the configuration register addresses LADDR is the digitizer s logical address and 64 is the number of address bytes in A16 per VXI device The digitizer s factory set logical address is 40 If this address is not changed the base addr
44. The available sources are e BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET HP IB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command e ECLTrg0 and ECLTrgl The VXIbus ECL trigger lines e DECLtrg Samples are taken at a dual rate using the VXIbus ECLTRGO trigger line to pace pre arm readings and the ECLTRGI trigger line to pace the post arm readings 276 Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger STARt SOURce e DEXTernal Samples are taken at a dual rate using the signal on the Ext 1 input to pace pre arm readings and the signal on the Ext 2 input to pace the post arm readings e DTIMer Samples are taken at a dual rate using the TRIGger STARt TIMerl rate to pace pre arm readings and the TRIGger STARt TIMer 2 rate to pace the post arm readings e TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e EXTernall The HP E1429 s front panel Ext 1 BNC connector e EXTernal2 The HP E1429 s front panel Ext 2 BNC connector e HOLD Suspend triggering The TRIGger STARt MMediate command must be used to trigger a reading e TIMer Use the period specified by TRIGger STARt TIMerl as the sample rate e VME This source is used to either trigger readings from VME A24 register accesses or to read measurement data out of the HP E1429 internal memory by reading a VME A24 address This allows for faster data transfer rates over the VME bus than would be possible over HPIB For more information on how to transfer data out over the VM
45. VME MEMory INITiate lt lt ee ee ee ee ee 294 PCONFigure VME MODE 4 tcc a akg odie e ee a oe a Be a 295 CONFigure VME SEND ADDRess DATA 0 0 0 o 296 TIDENDE a AR ARA RARA A A A de A 297 TEEE 488 2 Common Commands ee 298 A A 299 DNC corria o A a a RA 299 Contents HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual 5 ESE id BSE ok ke eee he SRR SD ERAS GS ee HR KEEDE HES 300 ERE RO de RARAS RS he RARA BR he ae Ee 301 PMG y AAA PETE EIA RIADA EEE GES 301 A cases ake es ab ge Spe a SSO oe E oda ah he A Ree Spe ods Gade eae he ot 302 PLM dira ESHER a a EEO a ODE SE SD 302 TR ee she se gw de ke A Pics AA he ee A Eee ke A 303 OV She Oe ees Sb eRe OAR OS Sh eas Be Se eR hoes See 303 e pedi Ea ae A eh ak ae we Gob eee ag 304 PMC ARA OES RR HG DRE Ee OR RROD 304 PUD Sil PU 6c ee GK ER A SERED KSA KSEE SAREE EERERE 304 PROG eigar ehir E A IDE ARA AAA 305 AAA A AA 306 EST iaa E e A A a A 306 a A E AR 307 SRE IDA SRE oe DA IRA S 307 e e a i pe hn p gt oe di e e e RR a a 308 PIR dd deere 308 PUN e ER AA A A A RARA AA de di ETA A 309 A O E 309 SCPI Cantomiance IRA 6 ck E ARA E bo 314 Appendix A Specifications 00 000 e 317 APP COMETE cen a a a HH ORES ES ds ES 317 Memory Characteristics a cr Se e a dre a di aa a 317 Amplitude Characteristics and Signal Conditioning 319 Frequency and Sample Rate Characteristics gt o 323 Parea A BG i hy
46. and the low order 16 bits are the channel 1 reading Figure 3 11 If it is necessary to identify readings from channel 1 and channel 2 a data label can be assigned to the readings as described in the section Assigning a Data Label on page 130 152 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Reading the Data As shown in Figure 3 12 the digitizer s data register is mapped into the Register HP E1406 Command Module s A24 address space A command used to read the data register is the Command Module command DIAGnostic PEEK lt address gt lt width gt lt address gt the address A24 base offset of the data register lt width gt the number of bits per digitizer reading For the VME transfer modes width is 16 bits with the exception of modes MEMory BOTH32 and CONVerter BOTH32 which are 32 bits The HP E1406 Command Module cannot do 32 bit transfers to from the VME VXI data transfer bus However 32 bit transfers at approximately 8 MByte second transfer rates are possible using an embedded controller Note Additional information on the Command Module s DIA Gnostic PEEK command is located in the HP E1406 User s Manual Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer contains examples of 16 bit and 32 bit data transfers using an embedded PC VME Bus Data Format Data is transferred real time or post measurement over the VME bus in the digitizer s packed A D format Data in this format are left justified signed
47. e lt non zero digit gt is a single digit number which shows the number of digits contained in digits For example if the digits value is 100 or 2000 the non zero digit value is 3 or 4 respectively e lt digits gt is the number of 8 bit data bytes which follow the header e lt 8 bit data byte gt are the digitizer readings For the PACKed format each reading is two bytes For the REAL 64 format each reading is eight bytes Following the last reading in each block is the line feed LF character The line feed must be read from the buffer to prevent error 410 Query INTERRUPTED occurs the next time data is read from the digitizer Packed Reading When the packed reading format is specified with the FORMat command Conversions or when readings are read from memory and transferred to the VME bus or Local bus the readings must be converted from signed two s complement numbers to voltages Additionally when FETChing packed readings the definite length arbitrary block header must be removed This section explains how to separate the block header from the packed data and how to convert the data to voltages 134 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Removing the Arbitrary Block Header Following are two methods of removing the block data header The first method uses the HP BASIC programming language The second method uses a command from the HP 82335 HP IB Command Library for C HP BASIC Example D
48. float bit_pat 0 read trigger source register sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x4D 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD 8bit_pat retain register settings set trigger source to reference period n bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg 8 OxE3 0x10 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x4D 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command FSERSEREEAES EASES EERES ESSE SLE SESLERESLRAASARASS ARRAS ARAASARRAR ABSA ARRAS ASSES void initialize long base_addr This function initializes digitizer memory This includes initializing the memory control register specifying the data storage locations in memory and enabling data to be written to memory Note that the registers must be read and written to in the sequence shown char command 80 int bit_reg 0 float bit_pat 0 Continued on Next Page 394 Register Programming Appendix C initialize the memory control register by setting bits 2 O to 0 sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x21 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit_pat retain register settings set memory control register bits 2 0 to 0 bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg OxF8 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_
49. ld d base_addr 0x0C 40 Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Programming 401 Send the DIAG UPL SADD command which accesses the data register and retrieves the readings IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD rd_mem strlen rd_mem retrieve and enter the readings IOENTERAB CMD_MOD rdgs amp bytes swap remove the block header remove the line feed which trails the last data byte IOENTERS CMD_MOD If_remove amp length convert and print each reading as a voltage for i 0 i lt 20 i rdgs i 16 remove label from each reading if rdgs i gt 2047 rdgs i lt 2046 printf nReading overrange else printf nReading d 6E i rdgs i 0 0005 free rdgs JAFRFRR REF RRA RA RRA ERRE AER RRA ERE RAR RENA ARENA RO ER EOCRER EERE RR ORARAR ARERR A SEAS long get_base_addr void This function returns the digitizer s A24 base address digitizer logical address long logical_addr ADDR 70900L 8 base address of A24 offset register in A16 address space long base_addr 0x1FCO000 logical_addr 64 6 float a24offst A24 offset from A16 offset register char rd_addr 80 command string variable Create the command string which reads the A24 base address sprintf rd_addr DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 16 Send DIAG PEEK command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD rd_adar strlen rd_addr Rea
50. lt chan gt VOLTage DC RANGe Range Measurement Resolution Allowable Setting Range V Volts V Ports 0 10235 10230 to 10235 00005 1 2 3 4 0 2047 2046 to 2047 00010 1 2 3 4 0 51175 5115 to 51175 00025 1 2 3 4 1 0235 1 0230 to 1 0235 0005 1 2 3 4 2 047 2 046 to 2 047 0010 3 4 5 1175 5 115 to 5 1175 0025 3 4 10 235 10 230 to 10 235 005 3 4 20 470 20 460 to 20 470 010 3 4 51 175 51 150 to 51 175 025 3 4 102 35 102 30 to 102 35 05 3 4 Executable when initiated Yes Coupled Command Yes The command is coupled to ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive and SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion Though the range setting may be changed while the HP E1429 is taking readings INITiated it will take at least 3 ms for the relay to settle Also it is up to the user to determine where in the data archive the new range setting was switched in as the HP E1429 does not stamp the data in any way If the data format is not PACKed then the HP E1429 will use the resolution associated with the final range setting to convert all readings into voltage values when FETCh is executed MAXimum values for the range setting will depend on the current SENSe FUNCtion setting for that channel For single ended ports 1 and 2 MAXimum is 1 0235 and for differential ports 3 and 4 MA Ximum is 102 35 RST Condition SENSe1 VOLTage
51. monitored using an RS 232 terminal or printer The C Size VXIbus Systems Installation and Getting Started Guide contains information on connecting a terminal Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 147 2 Execute the following HP E1406 Command Module command VXI CONFigure DeviceLIST lt logical_address gt The C language example programs disk contains the program Query C By changing the line define ADDR 70905L E1429 digitizer address to define ADDR 70900L E1406 address and entering the command VXI CONF DLIS 40 or the current E1429 logical address a program string similar to the following is returned when the program executes vxi conf dlis 40 40 0 4095 448 1 0 MSG A24 H00220000 H00001000 Ready MBinstr INSTALLED AT SECONDARY ADDR 5 The hexadecimal number in bold is the digitizer s A24 base address 3 Read the digitizer s offset register in A16 address space As shown in Figure 3 12 the Offset register is one of the digitizer s configuration registers In a system where the HP E1406 Command Module allocates address space the A16 base address of the configuration registers is computed as 1FC00016 LADDR 64 16 2 080 768 LADDR 64 where 1FC00016 is the starting location of the configuration register addresses LADDR is the digitizer s logical address and 64 is the number of address bytes in A16 per VXI device The digitizer s factory set logica
52. rate then the Post Count readings can be measured at another sample rate The possible sample rate sources occur in pairs There are four possible pairs EXT1 BNC pre EXT2 BNC post or vice versa ECLTRGO pre ECLTRG1 post or vice versa REFERENCE pre REFERENCE N post REFERENCE N pre REFERENCE post N 2 4 10 20 40 4E8 40 psec record size 32K Each event in this subsystem allows acquisition of one waveform record i e a burst of one or more dual channel A D conversions Note that in SCPI each A D conversion event is a Trigger Sources VXI Trigger Busses TTL and ECL External BNC plus input channel voltage The logical OR condition of any two of these sources may be used Each channel s detection circuitry uses two programmed voltage levels so that it is possible to generate the arm event when the signal either enters or leaves a defined voltage window Voltage level set points typically are accurate to 3 of full scale and have hysteresis 0 5 of full scale Rate when not taking Pre Arm count readings up to 2M sec when taking Pre Arm count readings 650 usec typical Count 1 to 65535 or continuous no pre arm readings 1 to 128 with pre arm readings Delay Specifies additional programmed time delay from an arm s causative event to when the arming actually occurs This is in addition to irreducible internal delays 326 Specifications Appendix A Bus
53. y endif include lt stdlib h gt include lt stdio h gt include lt string h gt include inst h define BUFLEN 200 k kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k Reginst Reginst RegiInst Mappedinst NULL Reginst Reginst UWORD lAdadr char Buf 32 BaseAddr NULL MapSpace 0 PageStart 0 PageCount 0 sprintf Buf vxi u Addr Valid Inst iopen Buf l NULL 1 0 Mapped 0 Reglnst Reginst void if Inst NULL Unmap iclose Inst Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 79 void Reginst SetMapping int mapSpace unsigned int pageStart unsigned int pageCount UBYTE suggestedAdar int WasMapped if this NULL WasMapped Mapped if Mapped Unmap MapSpace mapSpace PageStart pageStart PageCount pageCount SuggestedAddr suggestedAddr if WasMapped Map void Reginst Map void if this NULL Valid 0 if Inst NULL Mappedinst gt Unmap BaseAddr imap Inst MapSpace PageStart PageCount SuggestedAddr if BaseAddr NULL MappedInst this Valid 1 Mapped 1 void Reginst Unmap void if this NULL Valid 0 if Inst NULL if this Mappedinst iunmap Inst BaseAddr MapSpace PageStart PageCount Mappedinst NULL Valid 1 BaseAddr NULL Mapped 0 Continued on Next Page 80 Using the Di
54. 0 2046V 0 51125V to 0 5115V 1 0225V to 1 0230V Overload Flagged on the fly as FS in binary data Input impedance remains nominally constant up to 5V transient and continuous Input voltages substantially exceeding this level cause a protection relay to trip which resets itself when the overload is removed Never exceed 42 Vpk DC Accuracy 0 4 of reading 0 25 of peak to peak full scale Appendix A Specifications 321 Single ended inputs supplemental characteristics Differential Inputs Accuracy is specified for the average of 100 readings with CAL ZERO performed within 24 hours prior to reading in a stable environment For temperatures outside 18 28 degrees C add the following temperature coefficients for each degree below 18 C or above 28 C Range of peak to peak full scale per degree 0 1 0 055 0 2 0 035 others 0 025 Analog Bandwidth 4 6 1 filter off gt 50 MHz 1V range gt 40 MHz other ranges Effective bits on different ranges For performance on 1V single ended range see the previous A D section Typical effective bits relative to 1 v range Range 500 kHz 10 MHz 0 1 0 4 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 5 0 0 Crosstalk between channels 4 11 Relative to full scale input DC 10 MHz 80 dB Connectors Two BNCs one with positive gain to A D one with negative gain to A D The BNCs outer shells shield though not grounded at the front panel ARE connected internally to groun
55. 0E 7 4 2 0E 7 10 5 0E 7 20 1 0E 6 40 2 0E 6 100 5 0E 6 200 1 0E 5 400 2 0E 5 1000 5 0E 5 2000 1 0E 4 4000 2 0E 4 10 000 5 0E 4 20 000 1 0E 3 40 000 2 0E 3 100 000 5 0E 3 200 000 1 0E 2 400 000 2 0E 2 1 000 000 0 050 2 000 000 0 10 4 000 000 0 20 10 000 000 0 50 20 000 000 1 0 40 000 000 2 0 100 000 000 5 0 200 000 000 10 0 400 000 000 20 282 Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem VINStrument The VINStrument subsystem operates with the ARM and TRIGger subsystems to control the virtual instrument features of the HP E1429A B These features include the ability to use the Local bus and the VME VXI data transfer bus to obtain buffered measurement data from memory or real time measurement data directly from the analog to digital converter Local Bus transfers There are two ways to transfer data over the Local bus Data can be transferred directly from the analog to digital converter s using the ARM and TRIGger subsystems in conjunction with the INITiate command Everything proceeds exactly the same as if readings were going to HP E1429B internal memory except in this case readings are going to the Local bus as well as to internal memory If the consumer on the Local Bus is unable to maintain the data transfer sampling rate then the data going out over the Local bus is lost and an error is indicated The second method of transferring data over the Local bus is to empty the HP E1429B intern
56. 2 s complement numbers See Packed Reading Conversions on page 134 for information on converting the readings to voltages Segmented Reading Multiple arms bursts of pre arm and post arm readings segment digitizer Transfers memory Figure 3 13 Real time and post measurement transfers of segmented readings are also achieved by reading the data register For high speed configurations such as those which use an embedded controller the time at which post measurement readings can be retrieved and a delay partition window while the digitizer sets up the next memory segment for reading storage and retrieval must be accounted for Figure 3 13 Post measurement readings either segmented or non segmented can be retrieved when bit 4 of the traffic register base 0216 is set high 1 The partition window delay is monitored by reading bit 1 of the arm status register base 4316 or by reading bit 9 READY of the digitizer s Condition register in the Operation Status Group page 169 For real time transfers monitoring either partition window bit is best accomplished when the arm source is immediate ARM STARt SOURce IMMediate Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 153 To transfer segmented readings the data register is accessed until each reading pre and post arm in the segment is transferred After the last reading is transferred bit 1 of the arm status register base 4316 or bit 9 of the condition register is mon
57. 20E 6 set sample period to 20 us READ put digitizer in wait for arm state and retrieve the readings Comments 1 Sample Period and Sample Count The period at which to sample a 1 kHz signal and include the 11th harmonic is determined by period 1 4 fe 1 4 11 kHz 22 7 us where fe is the frequency of the 11th harmonic 11 kHz Because of the trigger source used in this program TIMer the sample periods available are 1 2 4 through 1E8 2E8 4E8 multiples of the reference clock the internal 20 MHz oscillator set by the CONFigure command Therefore given the 22 7 us sample period calculated the actual sample period used is 20 us The number of samples to take is computed by sample count signal period fundamental actual sample period 001 000020 50 54 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 2 Specifying the Sample Count The sample count i e trigger count is specified by the size parameter 50 of the CONFigure command This is the most convenient way to specify the sample count since size is a required parameter of CONFigure TRIGger STARt COUNt can be used to set change the sample count without also changing the entire configuration with CONFigure 3 Additional Information Additional information on trigger sources and sample rates is found in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer and in Chapter 4 Command Reference Dual Rate Sampling This program demonstrates e how to
58. 223 CALibration lt chan gt 198 TESTA ora ta che teeteded irs 223 COUN eey e enue e 198 DATA ua iia a A 199 FETCh lt chan gt o o o o o 224 DELAY 20d es ld ORS 201 COUNT e edu au ei es td 226 GAIN anme nerds bee nace 202 RECOVER cc ita deb kes 227 SECure 0 0 ec eee 205 CODE inet cate etic we 205 FORMate turista lata 228 STATS ao oe 206 EDATAJ s sacred nie ate 228 STORE ve ace ek Peete ey ch ead ed 207 AUTO toa oh eo 208 INiTiate Guti tada 230 MALO caia aa os 208 IMMediate 005 230 ZERO inar etna dai 210 INPut lt port gt 0 0 cee eee 233 CONFigure 0 e eee eee 212 FILT SD a ae iria 233 HLPASS eiii aaa a 233 DIAGnostiC 00 eee eee 216 STATE ween a ees 233 CALibration eis hae oes hv 216 IMPE dAaNCE terio Ave asta alee 233 CONVerge 2 0 eee 216 ESTATE uc a 234 GAN iaa le 217 Chapter 4 Command Reference 177 MEASure 000 0000 ee 236 CONDition 004 267 ENAB S 0 ott hee renee 267 MEMory 2 20 000e ee eeee 240 EVEN gt outs 268 BATTEN isis ta e ad 240 NTRansiti0ON o o o o o 269 SSTATe 202000 ee 240 PTRansition 4 269 CHARQe 20e eee 241 PRESO ana te 270 OUT PUL aia i tana sadn Sade ed a ee 242 SYSTEM coc Hotel bate has oe das 271 ECLTTO Oir a wan ties 242 ERRO vce aces eee eke 271 FEEDS Sirah eee De naa
59. 266 Command Reference STATus Subsystem Comments Example STATus OPERation QUEStionable CONDition Executable when initiated Yes Coupled command No Related commands OPC OPC RST WAI ABORt INITiate MMediate VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate STATus PRESet RST Condition unaffected Power on Condition STATus OPC INITiate ON Setting immediate completion mode STAT OPC INIT OFF Complete immediately for OPC etc OPERation QUEStionable CONDition STATus OPERation QUEStionable CONDition returns the contents of the appropriate condition register Reading the register does not affect its contents Comments Example Executable when initiated Yes Coupled command No Related commands STATus subsystem SRE STB RST Condition all bits of both condition registers are cleared as a result of the state present after RST except for the CALibration bit in the Questionable Signal register which will remain set if the error condition persists Querying the Operation condition register STAT OPER COND Query Operation condition register OPERation QUEStionable ENABle STATus OPERation QUEStionable ENA Ble lt unmask gt specifies which bits of the associated event register are included in its summary bit The summary bit is the bit for bit logical AND of the event register and the unmasked bit s STATus Subsystem Command Reference 267
60. 32 bits see Retrieving Readings from Memory When a digitizer reading is expanded to 16 or 32 bits as it is retrieved from memory the four least significant bits are normally set to 0 s You can assign the bits a decimal value from 0 to 15 using the command DIAGnostic CHANnel lt chan gt LABel lt abel gt Assigning a data label allows you to identify the channel from which the readings came The assigned lable appears in the four least significant bits of each reading when the readings are retrieved in the digitizer s PACKed 16 data format The label is ignored if the data format is ASCii 9 or REAL 64 130 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Digitizer Memory Bits 23 12 Bits 11 0 e Y Y Channel 2 Reading Channel 1 Reading 12 bit Reading o000 12 bit Reading a0000 O s added or label as defined O s added or label as defined by DiAGnostic CHANnel LABel by DIAGnostic CHANnel LABel to expand to 16 Bits when to expand to 16 Bits when reading is retrieved reading is retrieved 16 Bit Reads 16 Bit Reads ae 12 bit Reading 0000 Fe 12 bit Reading Jo000 1 Channel 2 Channel 32 Bit Reads E1429A FIG3 8 Figure 3 8 HP E1429 Digitizer Reading Storage Segmented Memory The HP E1429 digitizer is capable of pre arm and post arm readings Pre arm readings are taken after the digitizer is INITiated and before an arm is re
61. 375 Setting the Trigger The register used to set the digitizer s trigger sample source is listed below Source e Trigger source register base 4D16 Procedure The trigger source can be set changed when the digitizer is in the idle state or while it is initiated 1 Setting changing the trigger source while in the idle state A Write the decimal equivalent bit pattern to the trigger source register while retaining the settings of the other bits base 4D 16 2 Setting changing the trigger source while initiated A Suspend the sample trigger by setting bit 7 of the trigger source register base 4D16 to l Retain the settings of the other register bits B Write the decimal equivalent bit pattern for the desired trigger source to the trigger source register C Enable the sample trigger by setting bit 7 of the trigger control register base 4D16 to 0 Retain the settings of the other register bits Sending an Arm An arm immediate signal arms the digitizer overriding arm source hold Immediate Sig nal and any programmed arm delay The registers used to send an arm immediate signal are listed below e Abort and Arm Immediate register base 4116 e Arm Status register base 4316 Procedure 1 Determine the arm state A Read bits 7 and 5 of the arm status register base 4316 If bit 7 is 1 the digitizer is already armed and it is not necessary to send an arm immediate If bit 5 is 1
62. 4 ABORt ABORt The ABORt command removes the HP E1429 from the wait for trigger state and places it in the idle state irrespective of any other settings Measurement is halted and can only be restarted by another INITiate IMMediate command There is no query form of this command Comments ABORt does not affect any other settings of the HP E1429 e Both measurement channels are aborted with this command e Local bus and VME bus data transfers are aborted e The Pending Operation Flag as defined by IEEE 488 2 will be set false as a consequence of entering the idle state OPC will therefore return 1 after an ABORt command e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e Ifan ABORt or power failure occurs during a sequence of measurements the digitizer will return FETCh or recover FETCh RECover between one and TRIGger STARt COUNt number of readings Because the digitizer processor does not know when the arm occurs the readings returned may be pre arm only post arm only or a combination of both If less than TRIGger STARt COUNt readings have been taken then that number of readings are returned If at least TRIGger STARt COUNt readings have been taken then TRIGger STARt COUNt readings are returned e Related Commands INITiate FOPC OPC e RST Condition After a RST the HP E1429 is placed in the trigger idle state as if ABORt had been executed Example Aborting a measurement ABOR Place HP E142
63. 524288 none Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No e RST Condition none MEMory lt chan gt ADDResses DIAGnostic MEMory lt chan gt ADDResses returns a binary block of integers which comprise a list of memory address data for each segment in memory If there 1s no valid data then an error occurs and no values are returned otherwise a 32 bit value is returned for each segment in memory containing valid data Bits 0 and 1 contain flags for segment wrapped and segment aborted respectively the next 19 bits are the final value of the address counter AO to A18 when the segment was completed or aborted and bits 21 through 31 are filled with 0 Be aware that the address counter value returned is actually 1 greater than the location of the last data point taken in the segment Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No 220 Command Reference DIAGnostic Subsystem PEEK Example DIAGnostic PEEK e The wrapped bit bit 0 usually indicates that enough pre arm data was taken to cause data to be overwritten since each segment is a circular buffer It is possible for a wrapped bit to be set even though no data was actually overwritten This occurs because the address counter always points to the next location in memory that is to be filled and therefore a false wrap indication will occur if exactly buffer size data points were taken The buffer size is a number
64. Access and Connectors Let the Reference period be T Added delay can be OT to 65534T in steps of T 65540T to 655350T in steps of 10T Front Panel Connectors BNC Channel 1 Inputs 50Q 75Q single ended 1 MQ 1 MQ Channel 2 Inputs as for channel 1 Ext 1 In Arm Trigger Out Arm Trigger Reference Ready for Trigger Pre Arm Count Complete Ext 2 In Trigger Reference VXIECLTrig In Arm Trigger Reference Out Arm Trigger Reference Ext 1 BNC signal VXI TTLTrig In Arm Trigger Out Arm Ready VME Bus The HP E1429A can be used as either a VXI Message Based or register based instrument Message Based operation Uses Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI This provides easy operation with an industry standard programming interface Register Based operation Registers controlling the hardware are directly accessible providing the highest possible throughput at the cost of programming effort Documentation provided includes descriptive material and C source code Some functions such as calibration can only be performed with the assistance of the on board 68000 processor Appendix A Specifications 327 General Characteristics P2 Local Bus E1429B only Modes per HP Virtual Instrument Protocol Append Generate Off Pipeline Data Source Data can be sourced directly from the A Ds or from memory either channel or both channels interleaved Pacing
65. Arm Count ARM STARt COUNt 1 Arm Delay ARM STARt DELay 0 Trigger Source TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt TIMer1 Pre arm Readings SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts 0 OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt Trigger Count TRIGger STARt COUNt lt number gt lt number gt is set to the lt size gt parameter of MEASure or CONFigure SENSe lt chan gt SWEep POINts lt number gt Sample Rate TRIGger STARt TlMer1 lt period gt 50 ns single Sample Rate TRIGger STARt TlMer2 lt period gt 100 ns dual Output State OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt OFF OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt OFF OUTPut EXTernal1 STATe lt mode gt OFF Output Feed OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt TRIGger STARt ECLTrg0 EXTernali ECLTrg1 ARM STARt OUTPut EXTernal1 FEED lt source gt TRIGger STARt VME Bus Mode VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE OFF lt mode gt VME Bus Feed VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED MEMory BOTH32 lt source gt Local Bus Mode VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE OFF HP E1429B only lt mode gt Local Bus Feed VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED MEMory BOTH HP E1429B only lt source gt Reading Format FORMat DATA lt type gt lt ength gt ASCII 9 Data label DIAGnostic CHANnel lt chan gt LABel lt label gt O channel 1 O channel 2 Chapter 1 Getting Started 35 Prog ramming The recommended sequence for progr
66. Bit 2 TIME Set 1 if the divide by n of the reference oscillator source can not generate a sample rate that is within 1 of the rate specified by TRIG TIMer1 or TRIG TIMer2 Cleared 0 otherwise Bit 8 CALibration Set 1 if an error has been detected in the non volatile calibration memory Cleared 0 otherwise Subsystem STATus Syntax OPC INITiate lt state gt OPERation QUEStionable CONDition query only ENABle lt unmask gt EVENt query only NTRansition lt unmask gt PTRansition lt unmask gt PRESet no query OPC INITiate STATus OPC INITiate lt state gt controls whether the FOPC OPC and WAI commands will complete immediately or whether the y will wait for all measurements to complete With STATe OFF set these commands will complete immediately which indicates that the parser is idle and ready for the next command even though the HP E1429 may still be in the INITiated state and taking a measurement With STATe ON set these commands will wait for the Pending Operation Flag set true by INITiate MMediate VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate or VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate to return false indicating that the trigger system is in the idle state and that all measurements have completed or been aborted by the ABORt or RST commands Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units state boolean OFF O ON 1 none
67. C C language programming 28 C language programs development 30 C program format 32 Certification 9 Channels configuring with MEA Sure or CONFigure 37 Checking for errors 45 Clock reference 124 Command Abbreviated 179 Linking 184 Separator 179 Types 178 Command coupling 28 Command line compiling 31 Command listings as found in the manual 28 Command parameters SCPI 180 Command Reference ABORt subsystem 185 Command settings querying 43 Commander E1429A B digitizer 16 Commands ABORt 185 coupling groups 182 Common Command Format 178 Compiling and linking programs 31 Compiling in the integrated environment 32 Condition register Operation status group 169 Questionable signal status group 167 Condition register reading 167 169 Configuration Local bus restrictions 161 CONFigure HP E1429A B User s Manual Index 415 Using 39 when to use 39 CONFigure command using 34 CONFigure taking readings 40 Configuring the channels 37 Configuring the digitizer input register based 368 Conformance Information SCPI 314 Conformity declaration 11 Converting packed readings 136 Coupled Commands Executing 29 Coupling groups 182 Coupling groups with MIN and MAX parameters 183 D Data flow and storage 129 Data flow digitizer 129 Data format Local bus transfers 163 VME bus transfers 153 Data formats 133 Data Register Offset 150 Data register locating 146 Data r
68. COUNt See the following table for limits 188 Command Reference ARM Subsystem ARM STARt COUNt ARM STARt COUNt Number of Maximum Readings Memory TRIGger STARt COUNt Segments 1 1 524 288 2 2 262 144 3 4 4 131 072 5 8 8 65 536 9 16 16 32 768 17 32 32 16 384 33 64 64 8 192 65 128 128 4096 NOTE If the non volatile mode of memory is enabled MEMory BATTery STATe ON then all of the maximum reading counts shown above decrease by four These four memory locations in each segment hold the data necessary to recover all readings after a power failure e Normally when only post arm readings are specified an error will occur if ARM COUNt TRIG COUNt exceeds memory size since post arm data would be overwritten if this were allowed There are two exceptions to this rule a The first exception is when the local bus is enabled VINS LBUS MODE GEN and VINStrument LBUS FEED is the A D converter CONVerter xxx In this case an ARM COUNt TRIG COUNt greater than memory size is allowed Readings sent out directly over the local bus are also routed to memory at the same time and counts greater than memory size simply overwrite older data in memory Thus a FETCh command will return a historical record of what was sent over the local bus in the last memory size transfers This block of readings returned will be in chronological order with the oldest readings first and the most recen
69. Command 178 SCPI Command 179 Front panel description 13 G Getting Started 13 H Handshake protocol 157 High speed data transfer Local bus 156 VME bus 146 How readings are stored in memory 130 How to make measurements 37 HP E1429A B Digitizer Features 13 HP E1429A B VXIbus configuration 15 HP IB addressing digitizer 19 Immediate arming 118 Impedance setting 108 Implied keywords 180 Initializing digitizer memory retrieving data 385 storing data 378 Initializing the time base processor procedure 382 Initializing the timebase processor register programming 380 INITiate subsystem syntax 230 Initiated executing commands when 183 Input filter enabling 108 Input impedance setting 108 Input port selecting 107 Input ports enabling 108 Input section 106 Input signal range setting 109 Installation mainframe 18 Instrument language SCPI 28 Interfaces message 105 register 105 Interleaved transfer mode 406 example program 408 Interleaved transfers 405 Introduction to programming 33 Introductory programs 20 checking for errors 45 Digitizer self test 21 querying the power on reset configuration 25 resetting and clearing the digitizer 23 Sending the IDN command 20 Inverting and non inverting differential input ports 108 K Key words optional 180 implied 180 L Languages C 28 Level arming window boundaries 116 Line feed terminating commands 29 Linking Comman
70. Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes this command will cause a settings conflict error if the EXTernall BNC connector is already in use The following commands can use the EXTernall connector ARM STARt SOURcel or ARM STARt SOURce2 e RST Condition OUTPut EXTernal 1 STATe OFF Example Enabling sync pulse output to the front panel Ext 1 BNC OUTP EXT ON Enable sync pulse output on Ext 1 BNC TTLTrg lt n gt FEED OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt selects which event will cause a pulse or level change on the TTL trigger line s Note that unlike the ECL trigger lines there is only a single FEED that goes to all TTL trigger lines Therefore it does not matter what value of lt n gt is specified with this command because all TTL trigger lines share the same feed The available feed sources are 246 Command Reference OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt FEED ARM STARTI SEQuence 1 Changes the normally high output level to low as soon as an ARM event ARM STARt SOURce is processed The level remains low until the ARM cycle is completed by TRIGger STARt COUNt readings being taken This signal begins at the detection of the arm event and does not include any programmed delay ARM STARt DELay The expected use of this signal is to allow a master module to detect an arm event and then arm other modules by using this signal READy Changes the normally high output level to
71. DC RANGe 1 0235 and SENSe2 VOLTage DC RANGe 1 0235 SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC Subsystem Command Reference 263 SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC RESolution Example Selecting the 102 35 Volt range on channel 2 SENS2 FUNC VOLT4 Connect differential port 4 to channel 2 SENS2 VOLT RANG 75 Select 102 35 volt range Any number greater than 51 175 forces the next highest 102 35 V range RESolution SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC RESolution returns the resolution associated with the current SENS VOLT RANGe setting on the specified channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 112 none Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e RST Condition None Example Querying the current resolution on channel 2 SENS2 VOLT RES Query channel 2 for resolution setting 264 Command Reference SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC Subsystem STATus The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI defined Operation and Questionable Signal status registers Each is comprised of a condition register an event register an enable mask and negative and positive transition filters Each status register works as follows when a condition occurs the appropriate bit in the condition register is set or cleared If the the corresponding transition filter is enabled for that bit the same bit is set in the associated event register The co
72. Digitizer User s Manual Contents Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technol ogy formerly National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by that organization s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Hewlett Packard product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from date of ship ment Duration and conditions of warranty for this product may be superseded when the product is integrated into becomes a part of other HP products During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard HP Buyer shall pre pay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with a product will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that product
73. E aes 296 OPERation QUEStionable 267 ADDRess 296 DATA ects sath da cis 296 PIDENUHLY ence See ee a 297 Command Types Commands are separated into two types IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and SCPI Commands Common The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the Common commands that perform Command Format functions like reset self test status byte query etc Common commands are four or five characters in length always begin with the asterisk character and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character Some examples of Common commands are shown below RST CLS ESE lt unmask gt OPC STB 178 Command Reference Chapter 4 SCPI Command Format Keyword Separator Abbreviated Commands The HP E1429 digitizer is programmed with SCPI commands SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subtrees or subsystems An example is the digitizer s ARM subsystem shown on the following page ARM STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt number gt DEL ay lt period gt IMMediate no query LEVel lt n gt NEGative lt voltage gt POSitive lt voltage gt SLOPe lt n gt lt edge gt SOURCce lt n gt lt source gt ARM is the root keyword of the
74. For example to program 100 000 post arm readings with no pre arm readings a post arm reading count of 99 997 100 000 3 is loaded into the post arm registers A count of 1 is written to the pre arm registers MSB MIDSB LSB 0000 0001 1000 0110 10011101 110 13410 15710 15710 is written to register 77 13410 is written to register 79 110 is written to register 7B 3 Initialize the sample rate registers A Write the decimal value of 129 to register base 6316 and write the decimal value of 255 to register base 61 16 B Disable reference divider reclocking for divider values greater than 100 000 see Step 4 Set arm control register base 4B 16 bit 4 to 0 while retaining the settings of the other bits Appendix C Register Programming 383 4 Set the sample rate A If the trigger source is not reference period N base 4D 16 bits 4 2 1 00 the decade division register and binary division register must be set as follows write a value of to base 6116 write a value of 132 to base 6316 B If the trigger source is the reference period N base 4D 16 bits 4 2 1 0 0 then to set the sample rate period you must know the rate you want and the reference frequency From these values a value N is determined as shown below N reference frequency required sample rate The reference frequency is then divided by N Ref N to obtain the sample rate N is represented by the decade division regi
75. HP E1429A B Data Transfer Methods and Rates Transfer Method Transfer Rate Transfer Mode Reading approximate Type Local Bus 80 MBytes s Real Time Pre arm Post Measurement Post arm Embedded Controller 8 MBytes s Real Time Pre arm VME bus with SICL Post Measurement Post arm DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress 80 KBytes s Real Time Pre arm VME bus Post Measurement Post arm READ FETCh 11 KBytes s Post Measurement Pre arm VME bus Post arm Real time readings come directly from the A D Post measurement readings come from memory The transfer mode is set using the digitizer s VINStrument LBUS FEED and VINStrument VME FEED commands See VME Bus DataTransfers and Local Bus Data Transfers later in this chapter for more information Reading 16 bit 4 FETCh lt chan gt L 12 bit reading 10000 FETCh lt chan gt RECover MEMory CHANnel1 MEMory CHANnel2 MEMory BOTH CONVerter CHANnel 1 CONVerter CHANnel2 CONVerter BOTH Format ASCII ASCII data byte Reading both channels Ch2 11 4 3 0 0000 Chi Real Packed 11 Header 3 0 0000 non zero diait 8 bit FE 12 bit reading T 0000 12 bit reading T0000 One Channe digit gns data byte Channel 2 Channel 1 1 MEMory BOTH32 7 210000 CONVerter BOTH32 Reading L 12 bit reading 0000
76. MAXimum selects either the 1 0 volt range single ended ports or the 100 V range differential ports DEFault selects the 1V range For resolution MINimum MAXimum and DEFault select the same value Settings Maximum expected value settings per range are shown in the following table along with the resolution associated with each range The highlighted area shows the setting used when the expected value is not specified or DEFault is used CONFigure lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 213 CONFigure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC Comments Maximum Voltage Resolution Expected Range Volts Value V Volts tai 0 10235 00005 2 0 2047 00010 5 0 51175 00025 teat 1 0235 0005 2 2 047 0010 5 5 1175 0025 10 10 235 005 20 20 47 010 50 51 175 025 100 102 35 05 Executable when initiated No Coupled Command No If no input port is given CONFigurel defaults to 1 and CONFigure2 defaults to 02 Resolution varies by range and is constant for each range For any given range specifying MINimum MA Ximum or DEFault for resolution yields the same result It is important to note that the expected value determines the resolution and not vice versa The digitizer always uses 12 bit resolution and a coarser resolution value has no effect If for some reason a coarser resolution is desired specify a larger expected value See the previous ta
77. POKE lt address gt lt bits gt SGET lt bit gt SPUT lt bit gt lt value gt TEST FETCh lt chan gt COUNt RECover MEMory BATTery CHARge STATe lt state gt OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt EXTernal 1 FEED lt source gt STATe lt mode gt TTLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt STATus OPC INITiate lt state gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt MEMory INITiate MODE lt mode gt RESet SEND POINts lt count gt AUTO lt mode gt TEST DATA lt voltage_list gt VME FEED lt source gt MEMory INITiate MODE lt mode gt SEND ADDRess DATA IDENtity Chapter 4 SCPI Conformance Information 315 Notes 316 SCPI Conformance Information Chapter 4 Appendix A Specifications Appendix Contents NOTE NOTE Memory Characteristics Architecture This appendix contains the HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer operating specifications Except as noted the specifications apply under the following conditions e Period 1 year e Temperature 0 55 C e Relative humidity lt 65 0 40 C e Warm up time 1 hour References to the Local Bus Interface apply ONLY to E1429B otherwise E1429A and E1429B are identical except as noted Characteristics given as typical nominal or supplemental are non warranted they provide add
78. Power on Reset Settings At power on or following a reset the trigger source register is set to 0010 0000 or 2016 Appendix C Register Programming 357 Bit Descriptions Sample Hold Setting bit 7 to 1 sets sample trigger hold which prevents the digitizer from accepting sample trigger signals Sample Infinite Setting bit 6 to l sets infinite sample triggers Triggering continues until aborted base 4116 or until the bit is set to 0 and the post arm reading count is reached One sample trigger occurs after the bit is set to 0 even if the post arm trigger count is reached Sample Infinite overrides Sample Once bit 5 Sample Once Setting bit 5 to 1 causes the digitizer to take one sample and return to the idle state regardless of the pre arm and post arm reading counts This bit should not be set if the pre arm and post arm reading mode is set arm control register bit 3 base 4B 16 The bit is overridden by bit 6 Sample Infinite Trigger Source Bits 4 2 set the digitizer trigger sample source Setting bits 4 2 as follows sets the trigger source indicated 000 reference oscillator output 0 0 1 ECLTrg0 trigger line 0 10 Ext 1 BNC connector 0 1 1 internal TTL source as specified by bits 1 O 1 00 reference period n 1 0 1 ECLTrg1 trigger line 1 10 Ext 2 BNC connector 1 11 notused Internal TTL Sources Bits 1 O are additional sample sources which are sel
79. RST Condition none OPC causes the HP E1429 to wait for all pending operations to complete The Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event Status Register is then set If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set the Operation Complete bit will be set when all commands received prior to the OPC have been executed If ON is set OPC waits for the digitizer to return to the idle state before setting the Operation Complete bit No other commands will be executed until the Operation Complete bit is set e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands OPC WAI e RST Condition none 303 Command Reference Chapter 4 OPC Comments PMC Comments PUD and PUD OPC OPC causes the HP E1429 to wait for all pending operations to complete A single ASCII 1 is then placed in the output queue If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set the ASCII 1 will be placed in the output queue when all commands received prior to the OPC have been executed If ON is set OPC waits for the digitizer to return to the idle state before placing the 1 in the output queue No other commands will be executed until the 1 is placed in the output queue e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands OPC WAI e RST Condition none PMC purges all macro definitions e Use the RMC command to purge an single macro definition e Executable when initiated Yes e Coup
80. Readi ngs U sing FETCh command shown below FETChing readings from memory places FETCh them on the VME VXI data transfer bus Figure 3 11 FETCh lt chan gt COUNt RECover FETChing Readings Recall that the HP E1429 digitizer samples both channels simultaneously from Memory and stores the readings as a single 24 bit number Figure 3 8 Using the FETCh command each channel s readings can be retrieved from memory individually Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 139 The commands used to fetch retrieve readings from memory are FETCh lt chan gt If the lt chan gt parameter is 1 or is not specified the readings pre and post arm from channel 1 and from the most recent INITiate ARM TRIGger sequence are retrieved If the lt chan gt parameter is 2 the readings from channel 2 are retrieved FETCh lt chan gt RECover This command is used to retrieve readings from non volatile battery backed memory following a power failure The command is also used to retrieve readings after a digitizer configuration change or reset Attempting to fetch retrieve readings using FETCh lt chan gt following any of these conditions would cause error 230 Data corrupt or stale to occur If the lt chan gt parameter is 1 or is not specified the readings from channel 1 are recovered If the lt chan gt parameter is 2 the readings from channel 2 are recovered Determining t
81. Units number numeric 0 through 9 none Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command No e Related Commands LRN RST SAV 305 Command Reference Chapter 4 RMC Comments RST Comments RMC RST Condition all saved states set to the same state as the RST state RMC lt name gt purges only the specified macro definition NOTE At printing time RMC is a command proposed and accepted for a revision and re designation of IEEE 488 2 Use the PMC command to purge all macro definitions in one command Executable when initiated Yes Coupled command No Related commands DMC PMC RST Condition none RST resets the HP E1429 as follows Sets all commands to their RST state Aborts all pending operations including VME bus or Local bus transfers Loads calibration constants from non volatile calibration memory RST does not affect The state of VXIbus word serial protocol The output queue The Service Request Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register The enable masks for the OPERation Status and Questionable Signal registers Calibration security state Protected user data The memory backup battery Executable when initiated Yes Coupled command No RST Condition none Chapter 4 Command Reference 306 SAV SAV Parameters Comments SRE and SRE Parameters Comments SAV lt number gt stores the current programming st
82. VINStrument Subsystem VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED CONFigure VME FEED VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED lt source gt selects which data source will feed the VME VXI data transfer bus The bus is driven by reading the data register offset 12 0C16 in A24 address space Sources beginning with MEMory are the post measurement modes sources beginning with CONVerter are the real time modes The possible sources are MEMory CHANnell Channel 1 memory is the data source for the VME bus One 16 bit reading is returned MEMory CHANnel2 Channel 2 memory is the data source for the VME bus One 16 bit reading is returned MEMory BOTH Both channels of memory are the data source for the VME bus In this mode channel 1 will be output the first time the data register is accessed channel 2 is output the second time the data register is accessed One 16 bit reading is returned with each access MEMory BOTH32 Both channels of memory are the data source for the VME bus In this mode accessing the data register returns a 32 bit number where the high order 16 bits are the channel 2 reading and the low order 16 bits are the channel 1 reading CONVerter CHANnell The channel 1 A D converter is the data source for the VME bus One 16 bit reading is returned CONVerter CHANnel2 The channel 2 A D converter is the data source for the VME bus One 16 bit reading is returned CONVerter BOTH Accessing th
83. a ERE RE 180 Parameter Types Explanations and Examples o 180 Optional Paralelos SER ESAS EE SLES HE EH EERE GER 182 Querying Parameter Seting correrse DRA Re ER RES 182 SCPI Command Ex cution 25242548 KER e ERA KEE RE KRESS A 182 Command Coupling 625264 54424604 O4445 684 baw ee eee OHS 182 Executable When Initiated Commands cs corras ER RR RS 183 Linking Coma kk the heh e RA Oe ee 184 SCPI Command Reference ng ck A MWR EER REE KERRY KES HEH 184 ABROR 2 pk tees eke oe She 4S OSPR ESSE SS AEE EERE R ESSE SKS 185 ARs obo be lok Ss ee ee oe eee eh ae A 186 eee COMING ot gi heh Re AAA dekh a A 187 CSTAR DELAY ck 4 ok ERASER EE EK REDS SRR EAH KEKE SO 190 Contents HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual 3 eS PARA I ciao A A A de RR Joe 191 STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt o ee 192 STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive lt voltage gt o ooo o 193 ESTAR SLOPESES siria ERED SEES a 194 ESTARE SOU PRS a ed ee kee k ok ee RO ek A 196 CAL bration lt 2pgn Visca ORE ER EERE EEE RR RS ORE OB 198 CRUE e SR GMSMA RA ARA OP CORES 198 DATA ee eee AAA A Oe ee eee ae 199 DEI Re a a e A ee eee E ee 201 CTY 48 oak E to Ger Bud aide eo Bie Lh Gas En rd SG a OS OF eS So 202 SEMICON kok RRS eR ERA Ba SA eee EE EERE EATS 205 ECM TARE 6h edhe eh eae eee eee Bee ee ee eRe 206 STURE ri eh oe oe ei th cate he ee he ee ee aoe ce WR oleae ee hk ek he We A 207 STORSAUTO ck 4 eo ee He RR
84. and 0V ARM SOUR1 INT1 Set arming source I to be channel 1 level s ARM LEV1 POS 0 50 ARM LEV1 NEG 0 ARM SLOP1 EITH Specify that both ARM LEVel1 POS and ARM LEVell NEG will be used to form a window If the signal rises above the 0 5 volt level the POSitive slope level specified or falls below the 0 volt level the NEGative slope level specified arming will occur and the measurement will proceed STARt SLOPe lt n gt ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt lt edge gt selects which edge POSitive NEGative or EITHer on arming source lt n gt will cause the arm event to occur ARM STARt SLOPe is only active when either of the two arm sources is set to EXTernall INTernall or INTernal2 The ElTHer setting may be used only when the corresponding ARM STARt SOURce is set to INTernal lt n gt The ElTHer setting causes the window specified by ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive and ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative to be in effect Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n numeric 112 none edge discrete NEGative POSitive none ElTHer 194 Command Reference ARM Subsystem ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes A settings conflict error occurs if ARM STARt SLOPe ElTHer is set and ARM STARt SOURce EXTernal is set The ElTHer setting is only valid when the associated ARM STARt SOURce is set to INTernal lt n
85. and CONFigure Commands aoao a 34 Programming SEeguenge g era aa Re eke a SH Oe oe eR A A 36 Confipuiring the Chamels ois 24 oud Re RARH AAA 37 How to Make Measurements s s o 6444 P eb dE 4 OE EPS ES Oe HR REDE 37 Using FAS 2 eee ee gts A eg ho a Rok Re dk eA eo ea 37 Usne CONFIG shh badd rar be hepeaed ped 39 Querying Command Settings saesae cn Gk seb RR RERE ERE AS REWER 43 Checking for EMOS 2245 54 4G46G5 C1 GSE 5 OE ERE SES REESE 45 Digitizer Command Module Deadlock o o oo oo 47 WHE TIO NERO 2c ote od era ad AA de db 48 Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 2 0 0 ooo SEH OEE eee rs a 49 Chapter Comto es ak tee ee he Rh he ee Oe ee 49 Vie POTINS a 4 gk Cee RK e a RR amp 49 Configuring the Digitizer Input iros rada ee ae ee Ee ESS es 50 PO oe Oe RS ea ae Ee Ke ee Ee Re ae Se aed 50 CONDERS 2 e rd e A ee 50 Taking a Burst of Readings 4 5 642 644 5b nee 51 ARMCNTC birria ARA AA ERS SER 51 COMEN ea e a Ai a o ERNE a SO 51 Contents HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual 1 Bel Pe 42 5 pi ee E Ake eh a E ays 52 ARMLEVEL GC ida heh iea a DE a a RE a ES 52 COIA kot oe tke e oe Mn RA ee ee da ta ee a 52 Pi and PostArm Readings 445446449444 4b4 4 2 ES SEEKERS DHE 53 PREPUSTES 420 ada gor e Bo de kode a he ee kod ke 53 COMMONS aa ea Oe OAKS Se eG 33 Specifying a Sample Rate acord AAA 54 ANP o AR aa A 54 COMMS 6 BERGE a e EEE a A EH OSs 54 Dual Rate Sample soe ee REA EROS OR HE DARED RARA 35 DUA
86. and beginning addresses in memory where the data will be stored and enabling data to be written to memory For the complete digitizer re initiation to occur the registers must be read and written to in the sequence covered in the procedure 378 Register Programming Appendix C Procedure 1 Initialize the memory control register A Set bits 2 0 of the memory control register base 2116 to 0 Retain the settings of bits 7 3 2 Determine the starting address of the memory segment A The segment size is the number of readings to be taken and must be divisible by 4 The starting address is computed as starting address ending address segment size 1 The re initiation procedure assumes one segment of post arm readings Therefore the ending address 524 287 is the size of digitizer memory 3 Set the terminal ending address A The terminal address is the ending address of the memory segment This address is computed as terminal address ending address 4095 2048 Again the procedure is for one segment of post arm readings Therefore the terminal address is terminal address 524 287 4095 2048 254 B Divide the starting address see Step 2 by 4 If this value is gt 65 535 FFFF16 add 1 to the terminal address value 254 C Write the terminal address to the terminal address register base 2B 16 4 Set the base starting address A The base address is the starti
87. arm immediate must not be sent since the pre arm reading count has not been reached 376 Register Programming Appendix C Sending a Trigger Immediate Signal Procedure Aborting Measurements Procedure 2 Send the arm immediate signal A Read the Abort and Arm Immediate register base 4116 Reading the registers sends an arm immediate signal A trigger immediate signal triggers the digitizer overriding the sample hold bit of the trigger source register The registers used to send a trigger immediate signal are e Trigger Immediate register base 5D16 e Trigger Source register base 4D 16 1 Suspend sample triggers e g trigger hold A Set trigger source register base 4D16 bit 7 to 1 to suspend sample triggers Be sure retain the settings of bits 6 0 2 Send a trigger immediate signal A Write any 8 bit value to the trigger immediate register base 5D 16 3 Re enable sample triggers A Set bit 7 base 4D 16 to 0 to enable sampling for the next reading measurement sequence Retain the settings of bits 6 0 The registers used to abort digitizer measurements are shown below base is the A24 base address e Trigger Source register base 4D16 e Abort and Arm Immediate register base 4116 1 Suspend sample triggers e g trigger hold A Set trigger source register base 4D16 bit 7 to 1 to suspend sample triggers Be sure retain the settings of bits
88. arm readings only MAXimum 524 288 ARM STARt COUNt Memory battery enabled MAXimum 524 288 ARM STARt COUNT 4 A D converter to VME VXI data transfer bus MAXimum 16 777 215 A D converter to Local bus MAXimum 16 777 215 Digitizer memory pre and post arm readings see below ARM STARt COUNt Number of Maximum Readings Memory TRIGger STARt COUNt Segments 1 1 524 288 2 2 262 144 3 4 4 131 072 5 8 8 65 536 9 16 16 32 768 17 32 32 16 384 33 64 64 8 192 65 128 128 4096 failure NOTE If the non volatile mode of memory is enabled MEMory BATTery STATe ON then all of the maximum reading counts shown above decrease by four These four memory locations in each segment hold the data necessary to recover all readings after a power 260 Command Reference SENSe lt chan gt SWEep Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt SWEep POINts lt count gt Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes This command is coupled to TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts ARM STARt COUNt and MEMory BATTery STATe e SENSe SWEep POINts values between 1 and 7 will be rounded to 1 or 7 whichever is closer to the specified count e If the count is set to INFinity or 9 9E 37 the ABORt command must be used to return the trigger system to the idle state before any readings taken may be read from memory Due to this the READ command can not be used when SENSe
89. base 4316 Arm Status Register C 353 base 4516 Sample Trigger Register Timebase Initiation Register C 354 base 4716 Arm Trigger Register C 355 base 4916 Arm Source Register C 355 base 4B16 Arm Control Register C 356 base 4D16 Trigger Source Register C 357 base 4F16 Reference Oscillator Register C 359 a base 5116 MSByte Arm Delay Register C 360 eee base 5316 LSByte Arm Delay Register C 360 base 5516 MSByte Arm Count Register C 360 base 5716 LSByte Arm Count Register C 360 base 5D16 Trigger Immediate Register C 361 base 5F16 Timebase Reset Register C 380 base 5916 Arm Count Latch Register C 360 base 6116 Decade Division Register C 361 base 6316 Binary Division Register C 361 base 6516 Interpolator Control Register C 380 base 6716 Stop Data Register C 380 base 6916 Interpolator Calibration Register C 380 base 6B16 Self test Register C 380 base 7316 LSByte Pre arm Count Register C 362 base 7516 MSByte Pre arm Count Register C 362 base 7716 LSByte Post arm Count Register C 362 base 7916 MIDByte Post arm Count C 362 Register base 7B16 MSByte Post arm Count Register C 362 base 7D16 Timebase Initialization Register C 380 base 7F16 Timebase Initialization Register C 380 348 Register Programming Appendix C Category Address Read Registers Write Registers See Page base 0216 Traffic Register C 363 base 0816 Pulse Register C 364 base 0A16 Ch
90. between transfer of each segment while the CPU switches the memory address to point to the next segment e This command has no query form e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE e RST Condition None Example Send both channels of memory data to consumer VINS CONF LBUS MODE GEN Set this modules mode to GENerate data for the Local bus VINS CONF LBUS FEED MEM BOTH _ Set data source to be both channels Set up modules to the right of this one Last module on right must be in VINS LBUS MODE CONSume VINS LBUS MEM INIT Begin sending data from memory out over the Local bus CONFigure LBUS MODE VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt selects the operating mode for the VXI Local bus The available modes are APPend Local bus data is received from the left and passed on to the right until an end of frame is detected When end of frame is received from the left side all data from this module is appended followed by an end of block flag and a new end of frame flag After sending the end of frame flag the module enters the paused state This mode requires a module to the left that is in GENerate mode The mode is not active until either an INITiate command ora VINStrument LBUS MEMory INITiate command is sent GENerate Local bus data originates in this module and is passed to the right followed by an end of frame flag The mode is not active until either an INITiate command or a VINStrument LBUS MEMory INITi
91. bit bit 18 of the memory segment s base address The Base Address Registers base 2D16 and base 2F16 The base address registers are read write registers that specify the beginning of a memory segment This is the address where the segment starts after either being reset by the address count enable bit bit 2 of the memory control register or after reaching the terminal address Address 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 base 2D16 Base address 0 start address MSByte Address 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 base 2F16 Base address 1 start address LSByte The most significant byte of the segment s base address is store in the least significant byte of register base 2D16 The least significant byte of the base address is stored in the least significant byte of base 2F16 The data written to these registers is held in a temporary register until it is loaded into the actual address counter by clearing and then setting the address count enable bit bit 2 of the memory control register base 2116 Appendix C Register Programming 367 Configuring the Digitizer Input This section contains the procedures used to configure the digitizer s input section The configuration includes e Enabling the Single Ended and Differential Inputs e Setting the input impedance e Enabling the 10 MHz filter e Setting the measurement range The digitizer must be in the i
92. bus chip is reset Next the Local bus mode is set to GENerate and the feed data source is set to CONVerter BOTH Finally the interleaved transfer mode is set The number of readings per block is set to 2 and the end of block and end of frame flags are sent after each set of readings These settings are sent as a single command string in order to prevent Settings conflict errors 2 INSerter Digitizer Configuration Like the GENerator digitizer both channels of the INSerter digitizer are CONFigured for 10 readings on the 5V range Each block of data generated is four bytes two bytes reading followed by the end of block EOB flag The INSerter digitizer s trigger source is its internal trigger This trigger is transferred to the GENerator digitizer over the VXI backplane ECLTO trigger line In this program the INSerter digitizer s sample rate is set to 1 us thus both digitizers sample and transfer readings at approximately a 1MHz rate For all digitizers in the interleaved transfer configuation the Local bus chip must be reset first Next the Local bus mode is set to INSert and the feed data source is set to CONVerter BOTH Finally the interleaved transfer mode is set 3 Digitizer Trigger Sources and Sample Rates When doing interleaved transfers over the Local bus all digitizers must have the same trigger source and the same sample rate The maximum Local bus transfer rate is 80 MBytes second which is equivalent to 40
93. check_error ad_conf PRIORI SC RTO E TOO a ROO OTIS o TOSI OO OS OOOO SO Ne void ad_read long base_addr int i readings 20 index 0 loop 0 float rdgs bit char read_str 80 bit_str 80 command string variables dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 40 sizeof float Create the command string which reads the data register sprintf read_str DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x0C 16 Continued on Next Page 68 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Create the command string which reads bit 1 sprintf bit_str DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x43 8 Send DIAG PEEK to access the data register 20 times while loop lt 2 two bursts Segments for i index i lt readings i IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD read_str strlen read_str IOENTER CMD_MOD amp rdgs i Check bit 1 of offset register 43h before proceeding with the next segment do decimal value of bit 1 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD bit_str strlen bit_str IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit while int bit amp 2 0 index 20 increment index for next segment readings 20 increment readings for next segment loop increment loop Convert to voltages and print the readings for i 0 i lt 20 i rdgs i 16 remove label from reading if rdgs i gt 2047 rdgs i lt 2046 printf Reading overrange else printf
94. d d base_addr 0x63 8 132 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command For systems using an embedded controller it may be necessary to monitor bit 1 of the arm status register base 43 until it is cleared set to 0 before continuing with the next set of instructions using the traffic register set the pulse register as the high speed clock source write to the pulse register to remove any old readings from the data bus Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Programming 397 sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x02 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit_pat retain register settings set pulse register as the high speed clock source bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg OxF3 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x02 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command Send a clock pulse to the internal high speed bus sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x08 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command using the traffic register set the digitizer A D as the clock source and as the data source for memory sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x02 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD 8bit_pat retain register settings set the A D as the high speed
95. differential inputs only 6 dB and 14 dB internal attenuators Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 109 The attenuators used are based on the expected value or range specified Table 3 1 shows the attenuators used as a function of the expected value and range Table 3 1 HP E1429 Digitizer Measurement Ranges Input Port lt expected Range Measurement 20 dB 20 dB Internal Attenuators value gt setting Range Input Post 6 dB 14dB MEAS CONF lt range gt Attenuator Attenuator 1 2 3 4 0 1 0 10235 0 10230 to 0 10235 off off off off 1 2 3 4 0 2 0 2047 0 2046 to 0 2047 off off on off 1 2 3 4 0 5 0 51175 0 5115 to 0 51175 off off off on 1 2 3 4 1 0 1 0235 1 0230 to 1 0235 off on off off 3 4 2 0 2 047 2 0460 to 2 0470 off on on off 3 4 5 0 5 1175 5 115 to 5 1175 off on off on 3 4 10 0 10 235 10 230 to 10 235 on on off off 3 4 20 0 20 470 20 460 to 20 470 on on on off 3 4 50 0 51 175 51 150 to 51 175 on on off on 3 4 100 0 102 35 102 30 to 102 35 on on on on Using the Single Ended Input 1V Range When taking readings of low level signals on the single ended input selecting the 1V range ensures the most accurate readings This is achieved through a path directly to the A D which bypasses the attenuators and amplifier which can add noise and distortion to the signal Figure 3 3 The single ended input 1V range can be set by s
96. digitizer Function prototypes void query void void main void query function call to query HP E1429 parameters pa void query void char gets char qry_cmd 80 query command array char qry_resp 80 query response array int length 80 Query user for digitizer query command printf nEnter query command gets qry_cma get input string query command Continued on Next Page 44 Getting Started Chapter 1 IOOUTPUTS ADDR qry_cmd strlen qry_cmd IOENTERS ADDR qry_resp amp length printf n os s qry_cmd qry_resp Checki ng for Errors The following HP BASIC program shows the lines and subprogram which HP BASIC 100 110 120 130 can be added to HP BASIC programs to check for errors Line 140 clears the digitizer standard event status register Lines 150 and 160 unmask the appropriate bits in the digitizer s status byte register and standard event status register When an error occurs the subprogram Errmsg reads the digitizer error queue and displays the code and message Note that line 310 is used as an end of statement should a syntax error occur among coupled commands Otherwise line 320 would serve as the end of statement and the ABORT command would be ignored by the digitizer parser Note An alternative HP BASIC error checking program can be found in the C Size VXIbus Systems Installation and Getting Started Guide
97. divisable by 4 which for post arm only measurements is ARM COUN TRIG COUN padded to a multiple of 4 or TRIG COUN padded to a multiple of 4 for pre arm with post arm measurements e RST Condition none Querying the memory segment address es HP BASIC Program DIM Ndig 1 Count 9 ASSIGN X TO 70905 FORMAT OFF Dimension parameters for header Turn format off so we can enter unformatted bytes with this path OUTPUT 70905 DIAG MEM ADDR ENTER EX USING X K K Ndig Count 1 VAL Ndig Obtain the header information preceeding the data ALLOCATE INTEGER Mem_adadrs 1 VAL Count 2 Allocate an array to hold the data Note that HP BASIC s integers are 16 bits and not 32 hence the divide by 2 instead of by 4 Read in the memory addresses Need to strip off left over line feed Query for memory addresses ENTER OX Mem_adars ENTER 70905 USING B Junk DIAGnostic PEEK lt address bits gt shows the specified number of bits from the memory location specified Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units address numeric O thru FFFFFF 16 none bits numeric 8 16 32 none DIAGnostic Subsystem Command Reference 221 DIAGnostic POKE POKE Comments Example e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e The specified address is assumed to be relative to the local processor and is not the A24 offset but is instead the full add
98. enough to hold the specified number of pre arm and post arm readings Since a large number of pre arm readings may occur before the arm event causes post arm readings to be taken each memory partition is treated like a circular buffer where pre arm readings may wrap or 272 Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem overwrite each other multiple times times before the arm event occurs and the current cycle of readings completes with the post arm readings being taken After all post arm readings have been taken in a partition if ARM STARt COUNt is not yet satisfied the instrument directs the next burst of readings into the next memory partition There is a time window of typically 630 us between bursts where no readings will be taken while the HP E1429 arranges for readings to be directed into the next memory partition If an ARM event ARM STARt SOURce occurs during this time window it will be ignored with no error reported The number of partitions allowed is a function of ARM STARt COUNTt and is shown in the table below along with the maximum number of readings TRIGger STARt COUN allowed in each partition ARM STARt COUNt Number of Maximum Readings Memory TRIGger STARt COUNt Segments 1 1 524 288 2 2 262 144 3 4 4 131 072 5 8 8 65 536 9 16 16 32 768 17 32 32 16 384 33 64 64 8 192 65 128 128 4 096 NOTE If the non volatile mode of memory is enabled MEMory BATTery STATe ON then all of the m
99. four readings Pre Arm Data before the arm event can be stored in a circular overwrite mode per partition until the event occurs Amplitude Characteristics and Signal Conditioning A D Converter 50 input 1 0225V to 1 0230V range Each channel contains a high performance 12 bit 20MSa s A D converter For best A D performance highest linearity and lowest noise choose the 50Q input port and select its 1 volt input range Except as noted this port is used for A D performance characteristics listed below Due to amplitude and frequency limitations of available test sources and other practical considerations some parameters are specified only for this port and range Resolution 12 bits including sign Codes from 2048 to 2047 indicate results as follows 2048 amplifier overload single ended or differential inputs 2047 not used 2046 normal mode overload negative 2045 minimum on scale reading 2046 maximum on scale reading 2047 normal mode overload positive Appendix A Specifications 319 Output Formats ASCII 9 significant digits or REAL 64 IEEE 64 bit binary formats represent input voltage in volts scaled appropriately according to voltage range setting used PACKED denotes 2 s complement binary integers with the raw A D code including sign occupying the leftmost 12 bits of a 16 bit word padded with four zero bits on the right Any of the above formats can be returned under th
100. gt e ARM STARt SLOPel controls the slope on ARM STARt SOURcel and ARM STARt SLOPe2 controls the slope on ARM STARt SOURce2 Note that T and refer to the arm source and not a channel number e When ARM STARt SLOPe is EITHer having a value of ARM STARt LEVel POSitive greater than the value of ARM STARt LEVel NEGative will cause arming to occur when the signal exits the defined window If ARM STARt LEVel NEGative is greater than ARM STARt LEVel POSitive then an arm event will occur when the signal enters into the defined window e The edge selected by ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt is ignored when ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt is set to any source other than EXTernal1 INTernall or INTernal2 Other trigger sources have standardized active edges NEGative for TTLTrg lt n gt or POSitive for ECLTrg lt n gt e Related Commands ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative e RST Condition ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt POSitive Example Setting the arm slope ARM SOUR1 EXT1 Set arming sourcel to Ext 1 BNC ARM SLOP1 NEG Arm on the falling edge of sourcel ARM Subsystem Command Reference 195 ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt STARt SOURce lt n gt ARMT STARt SOURce lt n gt lt source gt configures the arm system to respond to the specified source s Unless one of the two sources is set to HOLD both will be active and an occurrence of the selected event on eith
101. is reached 100 arm when a specified input level on channel 2 is reached 1 0 1 ECLTrg0 trigger line 1 10 ECLTrg1 trigger line 1 1 1 arm immediate arm source 2 must be OFF when selecting this source The Arm Control Register base 4B16 The arm control register controls various digitizer arming parameters The register bits are defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 4B16 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Purpose not used enintrO 2 speed reclk pre trig thold triginf delay 10 ref Setting O off O off O off O off O off O off 0 off 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on Bit Descriptions Arm Control Register Power on Reset Settings At power on or following a reset the arm control register is set to 0000 0001 or 0116 enintr0 Enable local interrupt 0 Setting bit 6 to 1 enables local interrupt O to go high if an arm trigger is received while arm source hold is set or if the digitizer is already armed The bit is cleared 0 when the digitizer is initiated 2 speed Setting bit 5 to 1 enables the dual rate sampling mode 356 Register Programming Appendix C reclk 10 Setting bit 4 to 1 causes the reference divider to be reclocked by the reference clock 10 Setting bit 4 to 0 causes the reference divider to be reclocked by the reference clock pre trig Setting bit 3 to 1 enables pre and post arm readings tho
102. low transition of the BUSY bit bit 8 of the STATus OPERation CONDition register Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No e Both measurement channels are affected by this command e If the trigger system is not in the idle state error 123 Init ignored will be generated and the trigger system will be unaffected e The ABORt command may be used to prematurely halt the trigger system and place the HP E1429A in the idle state e Related Commands OPC OPC RST WAI ABORt ARM subsystem STATus OPC INITiate TRIGger subsystem e RST Condition The trigger system is in the idle state Example Placing the HP E1429A in the wait for arm state INIT Initiate signal measurement INITiate Subsystem Command Reference 231 INPut lt port gt The INPut command subsystem controls characteristics of the input signal including state on off low pass filtering and input source impedance There are two types of input ports on the HP E1429 single ended and differential for a total of 4 input ports Since this is atwo channel instrument two input ports share each channel The differential input ports are labeled ports 3 and 4 Input ports 1 and 2 are single ended Ports 1 and 3 share channel 1 and ports 2 and 4 share channel 2 Since IMPedance FIL Ter and STATE are settable for each input port they are remembered so that changes made to FILTer on input port 3 for example will not change the setti
103. low whenever the trigger system is initiated If multiple groups ARM STARt COUNt gt 1 of pre arm and post arm measurements are being taken the level changes back to high while the microprocessor changes which memory segment will receive the next burst of data and then the level goes low again when the HP E1429 is again initiated If only one burst of pre arm and post arm readings are taken or if all data is post arm then the level changes back to high when the measurement is complete Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n numeric O through 7 none source string ARM STARt SE Quence 1 none READy Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No e Related Commands OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe e RST Condition OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt FEED ARM STARt Example Enabling sync pulse for READy on TTLTrg5 OUTP TTLT5 FEED READ Change output level when initiated OUTP TTLT5 ON Enable TTLTRGS line to transmit the signal OUTPut Subsystem Command Reference 247 TTLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTPut TTLTrgen gt STATe OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt enables or disables routing of the synchronization pulse to the specified VXIbus TTL trigger lines TTLTRGO through TTLTRG7 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n numeric O through 7 none mode boolean OFF O ON 1 none
104. must be a multiple greater than 1 0 of the reference oscillator period A record is kept of which setting was changed the most recently and that setting TRIGger STARt TIMerl or TRIGger STARt TIMer2 is assumed to be the desired setting For example consider a reference oscillator period of lus if TRIGger STARt TIMer2 was last changed to a value of 1us while TRIGger STARt SOUR was set to DTIM and the TRIGger STARt TIMerl setting was also lus TRIGger STARt TIMer1 would be changed to 21s the multiple 2 0 was chosen arbitrarily so that both settings are not 1 0 times the reference period Similarly if TRIGger STARt TIMer2 were set to 4us and TRIGger STARt TIMerl was some value greater than 1us like 2us TRIGger STARt TIMer1 would be automatically changed tolus so that one of the two values is 1 0 times the reference period If dual rate sampling is enabled TRIGger STARt SOUR is DTIM then the sample period specified by TIMer1 will be the sample rate for the pre arm readings of the dual rate measurement and TRIGger STARt TIMer2 will be the post arm sample rate If TRIGger STARt SOUR is TIMer then only the sample rate specified by TIMerl is used Note that it is only necessary to set the longest sample rate if TRIGger STARt SOURce is DTIM The other setting will be automatically forced to be one reference oscillator period due to the coupling between the two rates when TRIGger STARt SOURce is DTIM If TRIGger STARt SOUR is neither TI
105. name is received if macro usage is enabled The SCPI command will be executed if macro usage is disabled e The lt data gt in the DMC command is parsed by the digitizer when the DMC command is executed e Executable when initiated Yes 299 Command Reference Chapter 4 Example EMC and EMC Comments ESE and ESE Parameters Comments EMC and EMC e Coupled command No e Related Commands EMC GMC LMC RMC e RST Condition none macro definitions are unaffected e Power On Condition no macros are defined Define macro to start measurement DMC RESTART ABOR INIT Define macro EMC lt enable gt enables and disables macro usage When enable is zero macros usage is disabled Any non zero value enables macro usage The query form returns 1 if macro usage is enabled 0 if disabled e Macro definitions are not affected by this command e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e RST Condition macro usage is disabled e Power On Condition macro usage is enabled ESE lt mask gt enables one or more event bits of the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in bit 5 the Standard Event Status Summary Bit of the Status Byte Register Mask is the sum of the decimal weights of the bits to be enabled The query form returns the current enable mask Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mask numeric O through 255 none A 1 i
106. non volatile memory e Executable when initiated No e Coupled command No e RST Condition none WAI causes the HP E1429 to wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any further commands If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set command execution resumes when all commands received prior to WAI have been executed If ON is set FWAI waits for the digitizer to return to the idle state before resuming command execution e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands OPC OPC e RST Condition none 309 Command Reference Chapter 4 Table 4 1 HP E1429A B Command Quick Reference Subsystem Commands Description ARM ARM STARt COUNt lt count gt Specifies the number of measurement cycles bursts to occur ARM STARt DELay lt period gt Delay from when the digitizer is armed to when it enters the wait for trigger state ARM STAR1 MMediate Places the digitizer in the wait for trigger state independent of the selected ARM STARt SOURce ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt Selects the negative going signal level which arms the digitizer ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive lt voltage gt Selects the positive going signal level which arms the digitizer ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt lt edge gt Selects the edge positive negative or either which will arm the digitizer ARM STAR1 SOURce lt n gt lt source gt Set
107. number of readings to be retrieved by FETCh If pre arm readings are included in the measurement sequence there is no way to determine the number of post arm readings The digitizer will attempt to return up to TRIGger STARt COUNt readings A third method of retrieving readings from memory is using the HP E1406 Command Module command DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress lt address gt lt byte_count gt lt address gt is the address of the digitizer s data register in A24 address space The data register s offset in A24 space is 12 0C16 The A24 base address can be found as described in the section Determining the A24 Base Address later in this chapter lt byte_count gt is the number of reading bytes to upload from the digitizer Because the HP E1405 06 Command Module is only capable of 8 and 16 bit data transfers over the VXI backplane the byte_count parameter will always be 2 bytes times the number of readings In systems using an HP E1405 06 Command Module and an external controller this command is the fastest method of transferring readings from memory Appendix C Register Based Programming contains an example program in which DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress is used to retrieve readings from digitizer memory Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 141 Memory Management The DIAGnostic Subsystem Locating Unsegmented Readings In certain applications it may be necessary to retrieve a selected s
108. or for HP BASIC programs by suppressing the EOL terminator until the last coupled command has been sent To send multiple commands in a single line or in a single statement the commands are linked with a semicolon and a colon This is illustrated in the following lines OUTP EXT1 STAT ON TRIG SOUR EXT1 OUTP EXT1 STAT OFF or OUTP EXT1 STAT ON TRIG SOUR EXT1 OUTP EXT1 STAT OFF Notice that the semicolon and colon link commands within different subsystems Only a semicolon is required to link commands at the same level within the same subsystem Sending the commands as shown prevents Settings conflict errors The command settings are not evaluated until the EOL terminator is received after the last command If these commands were sent individually an EOL terminator after each command a Settings conflict error would occur because of the coupling between OUTP EXT1 STAT ON and TRIG SOUR EXT1 Terminating A SCPI command string is terminated with a line feed LF and or with an Commands End Or Identify EOI message The carriage return CR is ignored Suppressing the Suppressing the end of line EOL terminator on a command line allows End Of Line coupled commands to be sent on separate lines yet as a single program Terminator statement In HP BASIC programs the EOL terminator is suppressed by Chapter 1 Getting Started 29 placing a semicolon following the quotation mark which closes th
109. period numeric reference period to seconds reference period 4E8 MINimum MAXimum 280 Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem Comments TRIGger STARt TiMer2 e Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command This command is coupled to the TRIGger STARt TIMerl command and TRIGger STARt SOURce command as noted below Unless TRIGger STARt SOURce is DTIMer the settings of TRIGger STARt TIMerl and TRIGger STARt TIMer2 are not coupled and changing one will not affect the setting of the other If TRIGger STARt SOURce is DTIM then both TRIGger STARt TIMerl and TRIGger STARt TIMer2 are used and there is a coupling between the two settings The relationship between the two settings is such that one of these two values must be exactly one reference oscillator period and the other must be a multiple greater than 1 0 of the reference oscillator period A record is kept of which setting was changed the most recently and that setting TRIGger STARt TIMerl or TRIGger STARt TIMer2 is assumed to be the desired setting For example consider a reference oscillator period of lus if TRIGger STARt TIMer2 was last changed to a value of 1us while TRIGger STARt SOUR was set to DTIM and the TRIGger STARt TIMerl setting was also lus TRIGger STARt TIMer1 would be changed to 21s the multiple 2 0 was chosen arbitrarily so that both settings are not 1 0 times the reference period Similarly if TRIGger STARt TIMer2 were set to 4u
110. post arm data count will be completed by overwriting the oldest pre arm data Due to this complexity the ARM COUNt for this type of measurement is restricted to a much lower value than what can be specified if all data is post arm only ARM Subsystem Command Reference 187 ARM STARt COUNt Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units count numeric 1 through 65535 none MINimum MAXimum 9 9E 37 INFinity MINimum selects 1 arm When only post arm readings are specified MAXimum is computed as 524 288 TRIGger COUNt up to a maximum of 65 535 arms When pre arm readings have been specified MAXimum selects 128 arms 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity Executable when initiated No Coupled Command Yes This command is coupled to the total reading count TRIGger STARt COUNt An error will result if TRIGger STARt COUNT is too large for the specified ARM STARt COUNt See the following table for the relationship between ARM STARt COUNt and TRIG STARt COUNt If the count is set to INFinity or 9 9E 37 the ABORt command must be used to return the trigger system to the idle state If pre arm readings are specified SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts lt 0 then the maximum number of arms is 128 When pre arm readings are specified SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts lt 0 an ARM STARt COUNt gt 1 causes memory to be partitioned and limits to be placed on TRIGger STARt
111. produce the intended sample rates the exact frequency value must be specified e Related Commands SENSe ROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt TIMer ARM STARt DELay e RST Condition SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 20 MHZ Example Specifying the external reference oscillator frequency SENS ROSC EXT FREQ 5 MHZ External oscillator is 5 MHz SOURce SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator SOURce lt source gt selects the reference oscillator source The available sources are e CLK10 The VXIbus CLK10 10 MHz line e ECLTrg0 The VXIbus ECLTRGO line e ECLTrgl The VXIbus ECLTRG1 line e EXTernal2 The HP E1429 s front panel Ext 2 BNC e INTernal The internal 20 MHz oscillator Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 112 none source discrete CLK10 EXTernal2 none ECLTrgO ECLTrg1 INTernal Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command Yes This command is coupled to the TRIGger subsystem the OUTPut subsystem and ARM STARt DELay e The reference oscillator is used to generate the sample rate and trigger delay SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator Subsystem Command Reference 255 SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator SOURce e Use SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency to indicate the frequency of an external reference oscillator e Related Commands SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency ARM STARt DELay TRIGger STARt TIMer 112 e RST Conditio
112. reading n APPender digitizer reading 1 APPender digitizer reading n The memory card was set up to store the readings in the digitizer s packed data format The packed readings are signed 16 bit numbers preceded by the ANSI TEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block header Packed readings are always numbers between 1 0230 2046 and 1 0235 2047 To convert the readings to voltages each reading is divided by 16 to remove the data label bits 0 3 and is multipled by 0 0025 the reading resolution for the 5V range 6 Additional Information Additional information on Local bus operation and on the Local bus commands can be found in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer and in Chapter 4 Command Reference LBUSAUTO C This program transfers readings over the Local bus from two digitizer A Ds to the HP E1488 memory card The program shows how the digitizers are used in the Local bus GENerate and INSert modes The program is similar to the previous program however rather than INITiate each digitizer individually the INSerter digitizer INITiates the GENerator digitizer once the INSerter digitizer readings are complete LBUSAUTO C This program demonstrates how to transfer readings over the Local bus from two digitizer A Ds to the HP E1488 memory card The leftmost digitizer is set to the GENerate mode and the inner digitizer is set to the INSert mode The generator digitizer is armed from
113. readings 100 i 0 float rdgs char rd_mem 80 command string variable dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 100 sizeof float Create the HP E1406 Command Module command string which reads the data register sprintf rd_mem DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x0C 16 Send DIAG PEEK command which accesses the data register and triggers measurements and then retrieve measurements for i 0 i lt readings i IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD rd_men strlen rd_mem IOENTER CMD_MOD amp rdgsf i Print a subset of the readings for i Osi lt 20 i rdgs i 16 remove label from reading if rdgs i gt 2047 rdgs i lt 2046 printf nReading overrange else printf nReading d 6E i rdgs i 0 0005 free rdgs BRSSESSSSSESIS SESS SSESSE SESS BESEEEESEEEEERE SESE EES RE SES EE SEL ER ESSER SES SE SS long get_base_addr void digitizer logical address long logical_addr ADDR 70900L 8 Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 65 base address of A24 offset register in A16 address space long base_addr 0x1FCO000 logical_addr 64 6 float a24offst A24 offset from A16 offset register char rd_addr 80 command string variable Create the command string which reads the A24 base address sprintf rd_addr DIAG PEEK ld d base_adar 16 Sen
114. register to divide the reference frequency in order to obtain the desired sample rate The register bits are defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 6116 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Purpose divide by divide by divide by divide by divide by divide by divide by divide by 10E7 10E6 10E5 10E4 1000 100 10 1 Setting 0 off 0 off 0 off 0 off 0 off 0 off 0 off 0 off 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on Only one bit at a time can be set in this register The decade division selected bits 7 0 or bit 0 of base 6316 is combined with the binary division selected bits 3 1 of base 6316 to derive the sample rate from the reference source The Binary Division Register base 6316 The binary division register is used with the decade division register to divide the reference frequency in order to obtain the desired sample rate The register bits are defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 6316 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Purpose _ reserved bits 7 4 must be set to 1000 divide by divide by divide by divide by 4 2 1 10E8 Setting 1 0 0 0 O off O off O off 0 off 1 on 1 on 1 on 1 on Appendix C Register Programming 361 The Pre Arm Reading Count Registers base 7316 and base 7516 The pre arm reading count registers are defined below Address 7 6
115. sources modes MEMory CHANnel1 Channel 1 memory is the data source for the VME bus One 16 bit reading is returned MEMory CHANnel2 Channel 2 memory is the data source for the VME bus One 16 bit reading is returned MEMory BOTH Both channels of memory are the data source for the VME bus In this mode channel 1 will be output the first time the data register is accessed channel 2 is output the second time the data register is accessed One 16 bit reading is returned with each access MEMory BOTH32 Both channels of memory are the data source for the VME bus In this mode accessing the data register returns a 32 bit number where the high order 16 bits are the channel 2 reading and the low order 16 bits are the channel 1 reading see Figure 3 11 CONVerter CHANnel1 The channel 1 A D converter is the data source for the VME bus One 16 bit reading is returned CONVerter CHANnel2 The channel 2 A D converter is the data source for the VME bus One 16 bit reading is returned CONVerter BOTH Accessing the data register triggers both A D converters at the same time and one 16 bit reading channel 1 is returned Accessing the data register a second time returns the second 16 bit reading channel 2 but does not trigger the A Ds CONVerter BOTH32 Accessing the data register triggers both A D converters at the same time and one 32 bit number is returned The high order 16 bits are the channel 2 reading
116. string VOLTage DC 2 VOLTage DC 3 VOLTage DC 4 Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes This command is coupled to SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe ARM STARt LEVel NEGative and ARM STARt LEVel POSitive e Function choices ending in 1 and 3 VOLTage DC1 or VOLTage DC3 are the only choices for channel 1 SENSe1 FUNCtion Function choices ending in 2 and 4 VOLTage DC2 or VOLTage DC4 are the only legal choices for channel 2 SENSe2 FUNCtion Specifying an illegal function choice on a sense channel will result in error 151 Invalid string data e Related Commands SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe ARM STARt LEVel NEGative ARM STARt LEVel POSitive 252 Command Reference SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion e RST Condition SENSe1 FUNCtion VOLT1 SENSe2 FUNCtion VOLT2 Example Selecting the single ended input on channel 2 SENS2 FUNC VOLT4 Connect port 4 to channel 2 SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion Subsystem Command Reference 253 SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator The SENSe ROSCillator subsystem controls the reference oscillator source and frequency used to generate sample rates for taking measurements Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt Syntax ROSGCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt SOURCe lt source gt Since the triggering and timebase circuits of the HP E1429 are shared betwe
117. string variable Create the command string which reads the A24 base address from the offset register sprintf rd_addr DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 16 Send DIAG PEEK command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD rd_adar strlen rd_addr Read value from offset register IOENTER CMD_MOD amp a24offst Continued on Next Page 346 Register Programming Appendix C Multiply offset value by 256 for 24 bit address value a24offst 256 return long a24offst Note Multiplying the value of the offset register a24offst by 256 10016 converts the 16 bit register value to a 24 bit address Register Descriptions The registers used to configure the digitizer are shown on the following pages The registers are listed by functional group Listed with each register are its bit definitions and where applicable the bit settings at power on or following a reset Note that base is the A24 base address Appendix C Register Programming 347 A24 Register Table Category Address Read Registers Write Registers See Page base 0316 A D Status Register C 350 Input Configuration base 0516 A D Serial Read Register A D Serial Write Register C 350 Registers base 0B16 A D Parallel Strobe Register C 351 A D Shift Register C 351 base 4116 Arm Immediate Register Abort Register C 353
118. the A to D converter Both channels are calibrated with this command regardless of which lt chan gt value is specified This calibration only needs to be done once or twice in the lifetime of the instrument Also this calibration determines a nominal value for convert time at room temperature 25 degrees C It is therefore important that this command be executed at an ambient temperature near 25 degrees C Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1or2 none CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 201 CALibration lt chan gt GAIN Comments Executable when initiated No Coupled Command No e Before executing this command both channels must be set to the single ended setting and 1 0235 volt range This can be accomplished by executing either RST or the combination of CONF ARR VOLT 1 1 0 01 with CONF2 ARR VOLT 1 1 0 2 e This setting was calibrated before the HP E1429 left the factory Under normal conditions it is not necessary to execute this command again The symptom of needing this calibration is that the fastest sample rate will appear to be 10 MHz instead of 20 MHz especially at higher ambient operating temperatures such as 50 or 60 degrees C e Both channels are calibrated with a single call to this command so a single call will be sufficient to calibrate e If CALibration STORe AUTO is ON then the new settings will be stor
119. the Digitizer Using Multiple Digitizers This program demonstrates e how to route the internal reference clock from one digitizer to a second digitizer and how to configure the digitizers such that they are armed simultaneously 56 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 MULT_AD C digitizer 1 CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 1 1 SENS ROSC SOUR INT OUTP ECLTO FEED SENS ROSC OUTP ECLTO STAT ON ARM SOUR1 TTLTO TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM1 20E 6 SENS2 FUNC VOLT4 SENS2 VOLT RANG 5 digitizer 2 CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 1 1 SENS ROSC SOUR ECLTO SENS ROSC EXT FREQ 20E6 ARM SOUR1 TTLTO TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM1 20E 6 SENS2 FUNC VOLT4 SENS2 VOLT RANG 5 Continued on Next Page set 10 readings 1V range on channel 1 S E input port 1 reference source is internal 20 MHz oscillator route reference oscillator clock signal to ECLTO enable routing of the signal arm source is TTLTO trigger line trigger source is period derived from the TRIG TIM command set sample period to 20 us set up input port 4 on channel 2 set voltage range on channel 2 the arm and trigger sources are the same as for channel 1 set 10 readings 1V range on channel 1 S E input port 1 reference oscillator source is ECLTO trigger line specify frequency of clock signal arm source is TTLTO trigger line
120. the digitizer see Addressing the Digitizer or Using an Embedded Controller later in this chapter Assigning the Digitizer In a VXIbus system every device must be in the servant area of a toa Commander commander with the exception of the top level comander Note the following when assigning the digitizer to a commander e A commander s servant area is defined as Servant area logical address 1 through logical address servant area switch setting e The HP E1429A B digitizer is a message based device If an embedded controller and an HP E1406 Command Module are part of your VXIbus system put the digitizer in the servant area of the controller This enables you to program the digitizer at higher speeds across the VXIbus backplane rather than over the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB via the Command Module HP IB is Hewlett Packard s implementation of IEEE Std 488 1 1978 16 Getting Started Chapter 1 e If your system uses an external controller and the HP E1406 Command Module put the digitizer in the servant area of the Command Module This enables the module to function as the HP IB interface to the digitizer The HP E1406 Command Module has a factory set logical address of 0 and a servant area switch setting of 255 Using the factory settings it is not necessary to change the logical address of the digitizer 40 to place it in the servant area of the Command Module e If the digitizer is u
121. while the digitizer is taking pre arm readings The bit is set to 0 when the pre arm count is reached This bit is checked before an arm immediate is sent a write to base 4116 Appendix C Register Programming 353 Last TRG Bit 4 is set to 0 when the last programmed arm count is reached base 5516 and base 5716 The bit is set to 1 when the burst of readings associated with the arm are complete Begin samp Bit 3 is set to 0 with the first reading in each arm burst and is set to l after the last reading in each arm burst Delayed Bit 2 is set to 1 after the programmed arm delay base 5116 and base 5316 has elapsed Initiated Bit 1 is set to 1 when the digitizer is initiated and can accept an arm trigger This bit is monitored when taking multiple bursts of pre and post arm readings and transferring the readings over the VME bus Multiple bursts of pre and post arm readings segment memory Figure 3 13 There is a period partition window between each segment that is used by the processor to set up the next segment When bit 1 is set to 1 the next segment is ready for data storage and transfer See VMEbus Data Transfers in Chapter 3 for more information Initialized Bit 0 is set to 1 when the digitizer is initialized and is ready to accept an initiate pulse The Timebase Initiation Register base 4516 The function of the timebase initiation register is defined bel
122. 02 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer Chapter Contents This chapter contains the HP E1429 Digitizer description of operation Where applicable the chapter relates the digitizer s SCPI commands to the digitizer hardware they control The main sections of the chapter include HP E1429A Digitizer Block Diagram 103 The Message and Register Interfaces 105 The Digitizer Input Section 00 0 106 Arming and Triggering 0 0 111 The Analog to Digital Converter 0 129 Data Flow Storage and Conversions 129 Memory Management 0 000 ee ee eee VME Bus Data Transfers 0 0 000 00 eee eee Local Bus Data Transfers 0 0 0002 eee The Digitizer Status RegisterS oooooooomooo o Saving Digitizer Configurations 4 HP E1429 Digitizer Block Diagram The HP E1429 Digitizer block diagram is shown in Figure 3 1 Channels 1 and 2 have their own input section and their own 12 bit 20 MSample second analog to digital A D converter The message interface register interface trigger timebase section and memory are common to both channels Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 103 VXI Data Transfer Bus Message Interface Register Interface To Digitizer Registers
123. 02241848E 000 Arm source2 ARM SOUR2 HOLD Arm slope2 SLOP2 POSitive Arm level2 negative Arm level2 positive Trigger source Sample rate1 Sample rate2 Reading count Pre arm reading count ECLTrgO synchronization pulse source ECLTrg0 synchronization state ECLTrg1 synchronization pulse source ECLTrg0 synchronization state External 1 BNC synchronization source External 1 BNC synchronization state TTLTrg0 synchronization pulse source TTLTrg0 synchronization state TTLTrg1 TTLTrg7 synchronization states ARM LEV2 NEG POS TRIG SOUR TIM1 TIM2 SWE POIN OFFS POIN OUTP ECLTO FEED STAT OUTP ECLT1 FEED STAT OUTP EXT FEED STAT OUTP TTLTO FEED STAT STAT 1 02241848E 000 1 02241848E 000 TlMer 5 00000000E 008 1 00000000E 007 1 000000000E 000 0 TRIG 0 disabled EXT 0 disabled TRIG 0 disabled ARM 0 disabled 0 disabled Appendix B Useful Tables 335 Table B 3 HP E1429A B Error Messages Code Message Description 101 Invalid character Unrecognized character in parameter 102 Syntax error Command is missing a space or comma between parameters 103 Invalid separator Parameter is separated by a character other than a comma 104 Data type error The wrong data type number character string expression was used when specifying the paramet
124. 1 0 path from the PC to the digitizer define ADDR_MEM 70903L I O path from the PC to the memory card Function Prototypes void rst_clr long address void configure void void initiate void void check_error char array long address Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 83 RRS SS aS aR III II I EI void main void run the program rst_clr ADDR reset the digitizer rst_clr ADDR_MEM reset the memory card configure configure the digitizer and the memory card initiate initiate the digitizer and memory card retrieve the readings from the memory card EEBAAEEESES ESS ES ESS SESES SS SRS EASES ES SRE SESE SA ARESA AKERS ARES TRESS SSE SS SSE SS void configure void int length 0 loop 0 use the digitizer array to configure the digitizer for readings on each channel s HI differential input char static digitizer CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 set 10 readings 5V range channel 1 input port 3 CONF2 ARR VOLT 10 5 4 configure channel 2 port 4 VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE GEN set Local bus mode to GENerate VINS LBUS FEED CONV BOTH set Local bus feed direct from A D use the memory array to configure the memory card char static memory FORM DATA PACK set packed data format TRAC DEL ALL
125. 1992 3 V m TEC 801 4 1988 EN50082 1 1992 1kV Power Line Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Tested in a typical configuration in an HP C Size VXI mainframe March 1 1993 pt QA Manager European contact Your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department ZQ Standards Europe Herrenberger Stra e 130 D 7030 B blingen Germany FAX 49 7031 143143 HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer User s Manual 11 Notes 12 HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer User s Manual Chapter 1 Getting Started Chapter Contents This chapter covers the features configuration and programming procedures for the HP E1429A B 2 Channel 20 MSa s Digitizer The main sections of this chapter include e HP E1429A B Features and VXIbus Configuration 13 e Preparation for Use 0 0 eee eee eee 16 e Introductory Programs 0 0 eee eee eee 20 Sending the IDN Command 4 20 Digitizer Self Test conoci ria dada ei weed 21 Resetting and Clearing the Digitizer 23 Querying the Digitizer Configuration 25 e Instrument and Programming Languages 28 e Introduction to Programming 00000 33 e Where to go Next 0 eee eee ee eee 48 HP E1429A B Features and VXIbus Con
126. 2 reading 1 channel 1 reading 1 channel 2 reading 2 channel 1 reading 2 The memory card was set up to store the readings in the digitizer s packed data format The packed readings are signed 16 bit numbers preceded by the ANSI TEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block header Packed readings are always numbers between 1 0230 2046 and 1 0235 2047 To convert the readings to voltages each reading is divided by 16 to remove the data label bits 0 3 and is multipled by 0 0025 which is the reading resolution for the 5V range 5 Additional Information Additional information on Local bus operation and on the Local bus commands can be found in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer and in Chapter 4 Command Reference Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 87 LBUS2PST C This program transfers readings in digitizer memory from two digitizers to the HP E1488 memory card The program shows how the digitizers are used in the Local bus GENerate and APPend modes LBUS2PST C This program demonstrates how to transfer readings in digitizer memory from multiple digitizers to the E1488 memory card The leftmost digitizer is set to GENerate mode and the inner digitizer is set to the APPend mode Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB
127. 235 1 2 3 4 2 036 and 2 037 2 037 3 4 5 090 and 5 0925 5 1175 3 4 10 180 and 10 185 10 235 3 4 20 360 and 20 370 20 37 3 4 50 900 and 50 925 51 175 3 4 101 80 and 101 85 102 35 3 4 lt 48 925 and gt 48 975 102 35 3 4 Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units number numeric 101 80 to 101 85 volts Executable when initiated No Coupled Command No Calibration values on the 102 35 volt range have a special low end allowed so that voltages much less than full scale may be used to calibrate gain on this range Values lt 48 975 and gt 48 975 are accepted as legal values for calibrating the 102 35 volt range CALibration VALues used for GAIN calibration are at least 85 of full scale and lt 10 counts away from absolute full scale The previous table lists the gain calibration values Related commands CALibration GAIN RST Condition CALibration lt chan gt VALue 1 0185 CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 209 CALibration lt chan gt ZERO Example Setting the calibration value ZERO Parameters Comments CAL2 VAL 5 00 Input on channel 2 is 5 00 V CALibration lt chan gt ZERO lt readings gt lt period gt lt mode gt 1 performs a calibration of the zero offset using the specified number of readings and sample rate on the specified range s When this command completes the new calibration constants will be automatically stored to non volat
128. 242 VERSION 000 ee eee 271 ESTAT ecco eat pa 243 EXTernal t 244 TRIGQC scott Sta a 274 PEED dvi 244 STARt SEQuence 1 274 ESTATE David ed 246 COUNT ocio ae 274 TTETTOEOS cn and bar ade 28 246 IMMediate 276 FEED 02 iu a tae aici 246 SOURCE 2 222 2 276 ESTATO n2 24 22a e 248 TIMO ios bee cui oe bb baw ne 278 STIMe 24 x3 che as edd ee eid 280 READ lt chan gt 000000 ee 249 VINStrument 0 020 008 285 SENSe lt chan gt 252 CONFigurel ooooococoocoo 285 FUNCION eto croata 252 BUS at hate at pes 285 ROSCillatOr 254 FEED 24s ap orar hae gad 285 7EXTernal 2 0 0 aa 254 MEMO doc 286 FREQuency 04 254 INITiate 2 ee eee eee 286 SOURCE 222 2 255 EMODE tocata 287 SWEC Pw tani p ds 258 RESOA a senha ad eed 288 OFFSe iii e e 258 SEND ooo a rito 289 POINTS aa a res 258 POINIS is cota ate 289 POINIS tarro tata 260 AUTO as 290 VOLTage 12 cece eee 262 TEST ata Pisa hee Lacks 291 EDO se acest Se eer S 262 DATA rra a aio oma dali 291 RANGe 0 00 005 262 VME eiee te eh aaa 293 RESolution 264 FEED ec cae dicos 293 MEMO doc 294 STATUS crac fet Bik ad dt ie do Be add 266 NiTiate o ooooo ooo 294 ORC et ae ce al A Rain 266 EMODE 24 ce hegre 2k 295 INITIAL 2 2 eee eee eee 266 SEND ois inks
129. 3 Segmented memory 131 Segmented Reading transfers 153 Segmented readings where they are stored 143 Selecting the input port 107 Self test digitizer 21 Sending an immediate trigger 125 Sending commands to the digitizer 105 Sending the IDN command 20 SENSe and TRIGger subsystems overview 121 Separating pre and post arm readings 140 Separator Command 179 Setting the arm count 117 Setting the arm count procedure 374 Setting the arm delay 117 Setting the arm delay procedure 375 Setting the arm level 116 Setting the arm signal slope 115 Setting the arm source 114 Setting the arm source procedure 373 Setting the input impedance 108 Setting the input impedance register based 370 Setting the interleaved transfer mode 406 Setting the Local bus data source 163 Setting the Local bus transfer mode 162 Setting the measurement range register based 370 Setting the pre arm reading count 125 Setting the reference source 124 Setting the signal range 109 Setting the trigger count 125 Setting the trigger source 121 Setting the VME bus data source 152 Setting the VME bus transfer mode 151 Settings querying 43 Shift register reading and writing 369 Shift register using 368 HP E1429A B User s Manual Index 419 Signal phase changing with registers 376 Single digitizer 160 Single ended input 1V range 110 Specifications 317 Specifying the extemal reference frequency 124 Standard Commands f
130. 35 V range 13 linearity bit 8 right 44 offset for differential 2 047 V range 14 linearity bit 9 left 45 gain msb for differential 2 047 V range 15 linearity bit 9 right 46 gain Isb for differential 2 047 V range 16 linearity bit 10 left 47 offset for differential 5 1175 V range 17 linearity bit 10 right 48 gain msb for differential 5 1175 V range 18 gain msb 49 gain Isb for differential 5 1175 V range 19 gain Isb 50 offset for differential 10 235 V range 20 conversion delay adjust 51 gain msb for differential 10 235 V range 21 trigger level negative 52 gain Isb for differential 10 235 V range 22 trigger level positive 53 offset for differential 20 47 V range 23 offset for single ended 10235 V range 54 gain msb for differential 20 47 V range 24 gain msb for single ended 10235 V range 55 gain Isb for differential 20 47 V range 25 gain Isb for single ended 10235 V range 56 offset for differential 51 175 V range 26 offset for single ended 2047V range 57 gain msb for differential 51 175 V range 27 gain msb for single ended 2047 V range 58 gain Isb for differential 51 175 V range 28 gain Isb for single ended 2047 V range 59 offset for differential 102 35 V range 29 offset for single ended 51175 V range 60 gain msb for differential 102 35 V range 30 gain msb for single ended 51175 V range 61 gain Isb for differential 102 35 V range DELay CALibration lt chan gt DELay will calibrate the delay constant for
131. 350 Queue overflow The digitizer error queue is full and additional errors have occurred 338 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 3 HP E1429A B Error Messages Cont d Code Message Description 410 Query INTERRUPTED The digitizer was sent a command before it was finished responding to a query command 420 Query UNTERMINATED The controller computer attempts to read a query response from the digitizer without having first sent a complete query command 430 Query DEADLOCKED The digitizer s input and output buffers are full and the digitizer cannot continue 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response Occurs when the IDN query is not the last query executed in a command string 1002 Cal security enabled Calibration security must be disabled to calibrate the digitizer to read or write calibration data to change the security code or to change the protected user data 1004 Cal write fail Writing calibration or protected user data PUD to nonvolatile memory failed 1005 Error during CAL An error occurred during calibration Refer to the statement appended to this message for a description of the error 1007 Calibration security defeated A jumper was moved to defeat calibration security 1008 Error during zero cal An error occurred during calibration of the zero offset Refer to the stateme
132. 386 Register Programming Appendix C 5 Set the terminal ending address A The terminal address is the ending address of the memory segment This address is computed as terminal address ending address 4095 2048 Again the procedure is for one segment of post arm readings Therefore the terminal address is terminal address 524 287 4095 2048 254 B Divide the starting address see Step 4 by 4 If this value is gt 65 535 FFFF16 add 1 to the terminal address value 254 C Write the terminal address to the terminal address register base 2B16 6 Set the base starting address A The base address is the starting address 4 of the memory segment Write the most significant byte of starting address 4 to the base O address register base 2D16 Write the least significant byte of starting address 4 to the base 1 address register base 2F 16 For example if the segment size is 10 000 readings the terminal and base addresses would be start address 524 287 9 999 514 288 514 288 4 128 572 1F63C16 terminal address 254 1 since 128 572 gt 65 536 base address F63C the 1 is part of the terminal address 254 1 MSB LSB 11110110 00111100 24610 6010 24610 is written to register base 2D16 6010 is written to register base 2F16 Appendix C Register Programming 387 7 Send three clock pulses to the internal high speed bus by reading or writing any v
133. 5 Multiple digitizers and serial transfers 160 Multiple VME bus data transfers 155 164 N Non volatile memory 132 battery charge 133 O Operation status group 168 condition register 169 enable register 170 event register 170 transition filter 169 Optional keywords 180 Output buffer READ 40 Outputting synchronization signals 120 129 Overrange Indications 137 Oversampling 123 P Packed reading conversions 134 Packed readings converting 136 Parameter examples 180 explanations 180 types 180 Parameters querying settings 182 Power on configuration 25 Pre and post arm readings separating 140 Pre arm reading count setting 125 Preparation for use 16 Presetting the enable register and transition filter 173 Program flow 32 Programming C language 28 SCPI instrument language 28 Programming procedure Local bus interleaved transfers 407 Programming sequence digitizer 36 Programming introduction 33 Programs introductory 20 Q Querying command settings 43 Querying parameter settings 182 Questionable signal status group 167 condition register 167 enable register 168 event register 168 transition filter 167 418 Index HP E1429A B User s Manual R Rate arm 118 Re initiating the digitizer 378 READ subsystem retrieving readings 139 Reading and writing to the shift register 369 Reading resolution 136 Reading the data register 153 Readings locati
134. 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 7316 base 7316 pre arm reading count least significant byte base 7516 base 7516 pre arm reading count most significant byte Register 73 Contains the least significant byte of the pre arm reading count Register 75 Contains the most significant byte of the pre arm reading count Pre Arm Reading Count Register power On Reset Settings At power on or following a reset the digitizer is set for 0 pre arm readings When the pre arm reading mode is set base 4B 16 bit 3 set to 1 the digitizer is set for 3 pre arm readings The Post Arm Reading Count Registers base 7716 to base 7B16 The post arm reading count registers are defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 7716 base 7716 post arm reading count least significant byte base 7B16 base 7916 post arm reading count middle significant byte base 7Big post arm reading count most significant byte Register 77 Contains the least significant byte of the pos arm reading count Register 79 Contains the middle significant byte of the post arm reading count Register 7B Contains the most significant byte of the post arm reading count Post Arm Reading Count Register power On Reset Settings At power on or following a reset the digitizer is set for 7 post arm readings The digitizer is also set for 7 post arm readings when the pre arm reading mode is set base 4B16 bit 3 set to l
135. 6 0 Appendix C Register Programming 377 2 Send abort signal A Write any 8 bit value to the Abort and Arm Immediate register base 4116 3 Re enable sample triggers A Set bit 7 base 4D16 to 0 to enable sampling for the next reading measurement sequence Re initiating the Digitizer Initializing Digitizer Memory Initiating the digitizer places the digitizer in the wait for arm state When an arm is received while in this state the digitizer moves to the wait for trigger state where it samples when trigger signals are received This section describes how the digitizer is re initiated A re initiation is done following a SCPI CONFigure INITiate sequence Using register reads and writes digitizer parameters can be changed and the digitizer re initiated at a faster rate than sending another INITiate command There are two parts to the re initiation sequence 1 initializing digitizer memory 2 initializing and initiating the timebase processor The re initiation sequence described in this section is restricted to post arm readings only The other digitizer parameters can be set as required The registers used to initialize digitizer memory are summarized below e memory control register base 2116 e terminal address register base 2B16 e base address registers base 2D 16 and base 2F16 Initializing digitizer memory involves initializing the memory control register setting the ending
136. 6 bit numbers preceded by the ANSI IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block header Packed readings are always a number between 1 0230 2046 and 1 0235 2047 and must be converted to voltages by the user 2 Line Feed Following Packed Readings Packed readings preceded by the arbitrary block header are also followed by a line feed LF character When readings are retrieved from the digitizer the LF remains in the output buffer If the line feed is not removed with an additional OENTERS statement error 410 Query INTERRUPTED occurs the next time data is read from the digitizer 3 Channel Labels A numeric label identifying a set of readings can be specified using the four least significant bits of each reading The label which is any number from 0 to 15 is assigned using the DIAGnostic CHANnel lt chan gt LA Bel command The label is included with the reading bits when data is returned in the PACKed 16 format The assigned label is ignored when the data format is ASCi1 9 or REAL 64 If no label is assigned the four least significant bits of the reading are 0 s See How Readings are Stored in Chapter 3 for more information 62 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 4 Packed Reading Conversion Formula The equation for converting packed readings to voltages is reading voltage readingpacked 16 reading resolution The reading resolutions which are a function of the signal range are listed in Chapte
137. 67 Example Setting the Operation register positive transition mask STAT OPER PTR 64 Set event bit when wait for arm state is entered PRESet STATus PRESet initializes the enable registers and transition masks for the Operation and Questionable Signal status registers and sets STATus OPC INITiate ON For both status registers the enable registers are set to 0 the negative transition masks are set to O and the positive transition masks are set to 32767 Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands STATus subsystem SRE STB e RST Condition none Example Presetting the STATus subsystem STAT PRES Preset STATus subsystem 270 Command Reference STATus Subsystem SYSTem Subsystem Syntax ERRor Comments Example VERSion Example The SYSTem command subsystem returns error messages and the SCPI version number to which the HP E1429A B complies SYSTem ERRor query only VERSion query only SYSTem ERROR returns the error messages in the error queue See Appendix B for a listing of the digitizer error numbers and messages e As errors are detected they are placed in the error queue The queue is first in first out meaning that if several error messages are waiting in the queue SYSTem ERRor returns the oldest unread error message e The error queue can hold 30 error messages If more than 30 messages are generated without being read the last error me
138. 6E rdgs i 0 0025 rdgs i 20 16 if rdgs i 20 gt 2047 rdgs i 20 lt 2046 printf t tReading overrange n else printf t t 6E n rdgs i 20 0 0025 Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 69 free rdgs JOER AAA AAA AENA ERE CARR CARNE CANE NAAA naaa can TERE ARE EAS EE ES long get_base_addr void digitizer logical address long logical_addr ADDR 70900L 8 base address of A24 offset register in A16 address space long base_addr 0x1FCO000 logical_addr 64 6 float a24offst A24 offset from A16 offset register char rd_addr 80 command string variable Create the command string which reads the A24 base address sprintf rd_addr DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 16 Send DIAG PEEK command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD rd_addr strlen rd_addr Read value from offset register IOENTER CMD_MOD amp a24offst Multiply offset value by 256 for 24 bit address value a24offst 256 return long a24offst DESIRES RSS RODS POC COTO OO OPO CE o ISO SISOS OOOO Oe void rst_clr void Reset and clear the digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR RST CLS 9 JERERERRERER AERIS SIRI AREER A RAE SARA EAR AAR RRA RRR RAR AAR AR ARRARAARAR AAR void check_error char func_tion char _ into 161 intlength 160 Continued on Next Page 70 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 IOOUTPUT
139. 9 in idle state ABORt Subsystem Command Reference 185 ARM The ARM command subsystem controls the third state in a four state measurement process The four states which occur during a successful reading are idle initiated wait for arm and wait for trigger The last two states have event detection associated with them which control when they exit the current state These four states are more fully described as follows e Idle In this state the instrument is not sampling This is the state where setting changes are done via commands to the instrument This state is exited when an INITiate command is received This state is returned to after a reset after successful completion of measurement or after a measurement is aborted e Initiated Once the instrument is initiated with the INITiate command it passes through this state and continues down to the wait for arm state if all readings are post arm and ARM COUNt is not yet satisfied If pre arm readings are specified the digitizer passes through to the wait for trigger state e Wait for arm In this state the instrument waits for the specified ARM event to occur before progressing to the wait for trigger state to make a measurement e Wait for trigger In this state the instrument waits for the specified trigger event to occur and when it occurs a reading is taken After a reading is taken the cumulative number of readings taken is compared to the count specified in
140. A D status register case 38 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat_read strlen stat_read IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit set bit 38 to 1 by writing to the A D serial register sprintf stat_write DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x05 8 1 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat write strlen stat_write break turn channel 1 6 dB internal attenuator off read bit 37 by reading the A D status register case 37 IOQOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat_read strlen stat_read IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit set bit 37 to 1 by writing to the A D serial register sprintf stat_write DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x05 8 1 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat write strlen stat_write break Continued on Next Page 392 Register Programming Appendix C turn channel 1 20 dB post attenuator on read bit 35 by reading the A D status register case 35 IOQOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat_read strlen stat_read IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit set bit 35 to 0 by writing to the A D serial register sprintf stat_write DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x05 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat write strlen stat_write break turn channel 1 20 dB input attenuator off read bit 34 by reading the A D status register case 34 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat_read strlen stat_read IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit set bit 34 to 1 by writing to the A D serial register sprintf stat_write DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x05 8 1 IOOUTPUTS CMD_M
141. ARM IMM is also the only way to arm the digitizer when the arm source is HOLD and the digitizer is in the wait for arm state ARM IMM decrements the arm count by 1 and any programmed delay other than the inherent delay is ignored ARM Synchronization As indicated in the block diagram of Figure 3 5 the arm signal can be Signals routed to the following locations Ext 1 BNC port ECLTRG trigger lines TTLTRG trigger lines 118 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 This allows the digitizer to synchronize other digitizers or events The commands used to output the arm signal are OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED lt source gt e lt source gt ARMT STARtISEQuence 1 The Ext 1 BNC port goes low when the arm occurs e lt source gt RFTRigger Ext bv Om A e RM Accepted E1429A FIG2c Outputs the arm signal to the Ext 1 BNC port after the specified arm delay has occurred OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt Ext 1 Port rs a ARM Accepted ARM Delay e lt source gt EXTemal 1 A Outputs the same signal currently specified by the OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED command however with the polarity inverted OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt e lt source gt ARM STARtlISEQuence 1 Outputs the arm signal to the specified TTLTRG trigger line as it is received TTLTrg lt n gt trigger line ARM Accepted J E1429A FIG3b Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digit
142. ARR VOLT 10 5 3 set 10 readings 5V range channel 1 input port 3 VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE APP set Local bus mode to APPend VINS LBUS FEED MEM CHAN1 set Local bus feed use the memory array to configure the memory card char static memory FORM DATA PACK set packed data format TRAC DEL ALL delete all readings on memory card TRAC DEF SET1 40 store readings 40 bytes in SET1 VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE CONS set Local bus mode to consume STAT OPC INIT OFF execute OPC after INIT is parsed Execute each command in digitizer1 using a loop length sizeof digitizer1 sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop USD digitizer1 loop strlen digitizer1 loop Execute each command in digitizer2 using a loop length sizeof digitizer2 sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop IOOUTPUTS ADDR_A digitizer2 loop strlen digitizer2 loop Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 89 Execute each command in memory length sizeof memory sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM memory loop strlen memory loop check for digitizer and memory card configuration errors check_error digitizer1 ADDR_G check_error digit
143. AUTO OFF in which case the new gain values will be stored to calibration memory only when the CALibration STORe command is executed Related commands CALibration VALue CALibration SECure STATe CALibration STORe AUTO CALibration STORe RST Condition none Performing a gain calibration CONF ARR VOLT 100 4 8 DEF 1 Configure for 5 volt range If CONF is used it must be the first step because it performs a soft reset of most other settings CAL SEC STAT OFF E1429 Disable security assuming factory set security code CAL STOR AUTO OFF Disable automatic storage of calibration constants CAL1 VAL 5 05 Set value to gt 85 of positive full scale on 5 volt range CAL1 GAIN DEF DEF Calibrate channel 1 for gain using default sample rate and number of points Note that linearity will not be done because this is not the I volt range CAL1 STOR Force the gain settings just calculated to be stored into calibration RAM 204 Command Reference CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem CALibration lt chan gt SECure CODE SECure CODE CALibration lt chan gt SECure CODE lt code gt sets the code which is required to disable calibration security Calibration security must have been previously disabled Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1or2 none code character 1 to 12 characters none data Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Comman
144. CLTrgl the VXIbus ECLTRGO or ECLTRGI trigger lines e TTLTrg lt n gt the VXIbus TTLTRGO through TTLTRG7 trigger lines e EXTernall the Ext 1 input port e EXTernal2 the Ext 2 input port e HOLD suspend triggering e TIMer sample rate is specified by the TRIGger STARt TIMer1 command The rate is derived from a reference specified by the SENSe ROSCillator subsystem TIMer is the default trigger source e VME sample and or transfer data from memory to the VME VXI data transfer bus when the data register at offset 12 0C16 in A24 address space is accessed Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 121 The Sample Period The sample period is the interval at which the digitizer takes readings The sample period is derived from a reference which can be the digitizer s internal 20 MHz oscillator or a reference from an external source see The Digitizer Reference Clock Setting the Sample When the trigger source is TIMer the sample period is set with the Period command TRIGger STARt TIMer1 lt period gt The TIMer trigger source derives the sample period from the reference source see The Digitizer Reference Clock The period is a 1 2 4 10 20 40 through 1E8 2E8 4E8 multiple of the reference source Programmed sample periods that are not an exact 1 2 4 multiple are rounded to the nearest multiple of the source If the digitizer cannot produce a sample rate that is within 1 of th
145. CONFigure LBUS FEED VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate INITiate VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE OFF Example Setting the Local Bus operation mode VINS LBUS PIP Set pipeline pass through mode this becomes active immediately CONFigure LBUS RESet VINStrument CONFigure LBUS RESet will reset the digitizer s Local bus chip This command should be used when it is necessary to put the Local bus chip into a known state without altering any other digitizer settings TRIGger STARt COUNt TRIGger STARt SOURce etc The RST command also resets the Local bus chip but RST forces all instrument settings to initial values 288 Command Reference VINStrument Subsystem VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command No e The HP E1429B Local bus chip must be reset after each data transfer When resetting the Local bus chip the Local bus chips on all devices to the right of the HP E1429B must also be reset in a left to right sequence Refer to the product documentation for information on how a particular device s Local bus chip is reset e Related Commands RST ABORt e RST Condition none Example Reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS RES Reset the chip CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts lt count gt specifies how many readings will be output over the Local bus per bloc
146. Command SRE Service Request Enable Query STB Read Status Byte Query Trigger TRG Trigger Command Stored Settings RCL Recall Command SAV Save Command Chapter 4 Command Reference 298 CLS CLS DMC Comments Parameters CLS clears the Standard Event Status Register the Operation Status Register the Questionable Signal Register and the error queue This clears the corresponding summary bits 3 5 amp 7 in the Status Byte Register CLS does not affect the enable masks of any of the status registers e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related Commands STATus PRESet e RST Condition none DMC lt name gt lt data gt creates a macro with the specified name and assigns zero one or a sequence of commands to the name The sequence may be composed of SCPI and or Common Commands Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units name string 1 through 12 characters none data data block any valid command none data sequence or string Comments Legal macro names must start with an alphabetic character and contain only alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters Alphabetic character case upper vs lower is ignored The name is allowed to be the same as a SCPI command but may be not be the same as a Common Command When the name is the same as a SCPI command the macro rather than the command will be executed when the
147. Command Library Disk define ADDR_G70905L 1 0 path from the PC to the generator digitizer define ADDR_A 70906L 1 0 path from the PC to the appender digitizer define ADDR_MEM 70903L 1 0 path from the PC to the memory card Function Prototypes void rst_clr long address void configure void void initiate void void check_error char func_tion long address RHR a SII III III III void main void run the program rst_clr ADDR_G reset generator digitizer rst_clr ADDR_A reset appender digitizer rst_clr ADDR_MEM reset memory card configure configure the digitizers and the memory card initiate initiate the digitizers and the memory card retrieve the readings from the memory card ERPRAEEEPISL ELISE SESE LEE EL ELA LLORAS LEAD LALA ELE L ADLER ADLER ASL ORO LER AOL OEE void configure void int length 0 loop 0 use the digitizer1 array to configure the generator digitizer Continued on Next Page 88 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 char static digitizer1 CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 set 10 readings 5V range channel 1 input port 3 VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE GEN set Local bus mode to GENerate VINS LBUS FEED MEM CHAN1 set Local bus feed use the digitizer2 array to configure the appender digitizer char static digitizer2 CONF1
148. Contents HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual WS cds geen he a HE A Ay SAH oh eS Ee BO eK GR doo Kg 9 WERDER EAS SOROS A 10 Saleh SVN 4 ays oe hE EER OO SLAG ES 4A EOS Ee EDR E EES 10 Declaratonm of LOMO ae e ke ee hoe eh dO hee eRe ok Bd 11 Chapter 1 Getting Started o o e 13 COPE CODES 06 oe o EM a ek SEES e o RED 13 HP E1429A B Features and VXIbus Configuration o o 13 Front Panel Description rider hetd botik ibaiari 13 HP E1429A B VXIbus Configuration 2 2 2 2 0000 eee eee 15 Preparan Ore eoret ibed SE DR SE CELRESELED REE REDE EES S 16 The Digitizer Logical Address 0005650040004 RR AAA ad 16 The Digitizer Bus Request Level oocirrosrir er 18 Installing METRES aii ARA E DOO 18 Addressing the DigitizeroverHP IB 2 546 9504 b s ec 19 Addressing the Digitizer using an Embedded Controller 19 Introductory Programs oi ce ERR ARSE HR RRR REESE HEEB EES 20 Sending the IDN Command 6 kien kee he See eas Ee RAE EES SEES 20 Diner sole cobras eee SES wee eee ee eS 21 Resetins and Clearing the Digitizer Lair Zo Querying the Digitizer Configuration o o o e e 25 Instrument and Programming Languages a 28 DCP PION ad Oo Se ees Re eee oe e 28 Coupled Commands 4 240084 4084 nthe HEER ASD RE REE OEE EHS 28 C Language Programs 2 ck eke eR RRA RES DEERE DRS 30 Introduction t Programmi 24 4226 6444 See ae be ek ER Oe eS 33 Using the MEA Sure
149. D bits are not stored in memory with the readings but are appended to each reading as it is read over the VME VXI data transfer bus or Local bus base 0C16 The data register is a read write register used to retrieve readings from digitizer memory or to retrieve them from the digitizer s A D converter Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 0C16 register read write retrieves a reading from digitizer memory Each digitizer reading is stored in memory as a 12 bit two s complement number When a reading is retrieved it is expanded to 16 bits with the reading left justified in the 16 bit field The four least significant bits are normally zeros but can be set as indicated by the channel ID register base 0A 16 The channel from which readings are retrieved is set with the Data register Mode field of the traffic register base 0216 364 Register Programming Appendix C The Memory Control Register base 2116 The memory control register is a read write register that controls the operation of digitizer memory The register bits are defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 0216 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Purpose Backup TTL Mux BNC Mux Address Memory Memory Enable Count Read Write Enable Enable Enable Setting 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 reset 0 reset 1 ON 1 ON 1 enable 1 enable Bit Descriptions Memory Control Register P
150. E HE a Ee ER 355 The Anm Control Register cc ka kk kek AREER RRA EE RE OR kE eki 356 The Trigger Source Register sae ec A ek RRO OE ETRE HA ORR EH GO 357 The Reterence Oscillator RegiSt r gona acca kak ek RR AAA 359 The Ann delay Register sreco 4 ee ORK ER EE ER OR ER 360 The Atm Const Reiter ic ke eA eR Ow A 360 The Ata Count Lateh Register o cossonar rarene dS awed ee be os 360 The Trigger Immediate REpistel ca ce ek ek ee ew a e 361 The Decade Divisi n Register g 2444 86 Ha ee eRe ERE REE BRE RES 361 The Binary Division Register on co kk oe SCR EKER ERR EERE EOE EES 361 The Pre Arm Reading Count Registers o e 0200008 362 The Post Arm Reading Count Register 4 4 4 6 6 kn 6 ke Ra a aa i ao 362 The Memory Control Registers gece eee eK eRe REED KE DR EH 363 The Trine Reeser ond gk eh Ee A RAR A Re a ae bt 363 The Pulse Register 4446 484 4 6494444444 A 4 444 364 The Channel WD Register ced ea a ak ek a ha A eok 364 The Data Register cece eee ee ee KE RRO HES DEE EARE aR ORS 364 The Memory Control Register 4 2 44 4 4 46 2 kW aed ROR OR kE ERA 365 The Memory Address Registers 0 404 644 Gee ee ee ee 4 366 The Terminal Address Register 4 4 2 gon ak oe a a kd 367 The Base Address Registers so 2 ccs see ee ER ras 367 Compan the Digitizer Input soe hn Seek ra CREE EL R 368 Using the AMD Silt Reser ad oe ke ek cee hese eS eRe Oe ESSE A 368 EDABIMS the MUG ee s ke a ode A A eh wt om eG 369 Setting the Input I
151. E LESTE SEALE ESE ELLER E ELAS EELS AAAS EEA ER ERE ER EES AREELARAES ARES void rst_clr long address Reset and clear the instruments IOOUTPUTS address RST CLS 9 RERSASESSES SES ES SES ES EES ES ERS SE SASES SASS ESAS void check_error char array long address char _ into 161 intlength 160 IOOUTPUTS address SYST ERR 9 Query error register IOENTERS address into amp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit while atoi into 0 printf Error s in s n n into array length 160 IOOUTPUTS address SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS address into amp length 412 Local Bus Interleaved Transfers Appendix D Comments 1 GENerator Digitizer Configuration Both channels of the GENerator digitizer are CONFigured for 10 readings on the 5V range Thus each block of data generated is four bytes two bytes reading followed by the end of block EOB and end of frame EOF flags The GENerator digitizer s trigger source is set to ECLTO This VXI backplane trigger line is controlled by the INSerter digitizer which feeds its internal trigger signal to the GENerator digitizer This causes both digitizers to sample and transfer readings at approximately the same rate which is required for interleaved transfers Before setting the digitizer s Local bus configuration the Local
152. E bus using this command see the VINStrument VME commands Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source discrete BUS HOLD none DECLtrg DEXTernal DTIMer ECLTrgO ECLTrg1 IMMediate EXTernal1 EXTernal2 TIMer TTLTrg0 to TTLTrg 7 VME Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command This command is coupled to the TRIGger OUTPut and SENSe subsystems TRIGger Subsystem Command Reference 277 TRIGger STARt TlMer 1 e The active edges for the various sources are as follows ECLtrg0 ECLtrg1 and DECLtrg active edge is the rising edge TTLTrg lt n gt and DTTLtrg active edge is the falling edge EXTernall EXTernal2 and DEXTernal active edge is the falling edge e When using DECLtrg DEXTernal or DTIMer at least one pre arm pulse must occur after the arming signal has been received This means that after the pre arm count is reached and the arm is accepted there must be another pre arm pulse which arrives reference period 3 60 ns after the arming signal This would typically be 210 ns if SENSe ROSCillator SOURce is INTernal The digitizer does not sample on the additional pulse e When TIMer is the source the desired period must be specified by the TRIGger STARt TIMerl and or the TRIGger STARt TIMer2 commands See these commands for a table of allowable values e Related Commands SENSe ROSCillator SOURce ARM STARt SOURCce OUTPut subsyste
153. EAD2 will take two sets of measurements since an INITiate is done with each read If it is desired to look at each channel separately for readings taken during the same time period use the INITiate and FETCh sequence of commands instead of READ e There are a few settings which if allowed would cause READ to deadlock and never complete TRIGger COUNt INFinite and ARM COUNt INFinite are not allowed because the measurement is continuous and therefore would never finish Also ARM SOURce BUS or HOLD and TRIG SOURce BUS or HOLD are not allowed because the parser would be unable to accept any commands to arm or trigger the instrument during measurement because the READ command would not have completed Any of the above settings active during a READ command will cause an error to occur and no measurements to be taken e The number of readings that READ is going to return for each channel can be calculated as number of start triggers pre arm readings post arm readings The above equation may be built from the following queries ARM COUNt TRIG COUNt READ lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 249 The number of pre arm readings may be determined by taking the absolute value of the query SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts which returns either 0 no pre arm readings or a negative number which is the pre arm count If the measurements were ABORted use FETCh COUNt to determine the number of readings e Using the above method i
154. EASure is equivalent to executing the command sequence ABORt CONFigure INITiate IMMediate FETCh The following programs execute the MEASure command as shown below MEAS1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 MEA Sure configures the digitizer as follows channel 1 number of readings 10 expected value 5V input port 3 The remainder of the digitizer parameters are set as indicated in Table 1 3 Because the readings are taken immediately variations to the digitizer configuration are limited to the parameters within the MEA Sure command number of readings expected value resolution input port DIM Readings 1 10 OUTPUT 70905 RST CLS OPC ENTER 70905 Ready OUTPUT 70905 MEAS1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 ENTER 70905 Readings PRINT Readings END Chapter 1 Getting Started 37 MEAS C MEAS C This program demonstrates how to take readings using the digitizer s MEASure command In this program MEASure configures the digitizer to take 10 readings on the 5V range using the differential input port Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L 1 0 path from PC to the digitizer via the E1406 Function Prototypes void rst_clr void void ad_meas void void check_error char
155. EER Se de es 157 Digitizer Local Bus Commands 5 64 sos evi Seo bP OE we KE RE EES 159 Lacal Bus Transfer Configurations se eo ee ae ee ek ee A 159 Digitizer Configuration Restrictions s gt s ei be ee Ghee Ree ERE waid 161 Setting the Local Bus Transfer Mode o o e 162 Setting the Local Bus Data Source 44 25 creerse a 163 Multiple Local Bus Data Transfers o s ccc kk e RA ee ee a 164 The Digitizer Status Regis e ose aa OER Ee teade ik RO eH OES 165 The Status Subsystem Commands ee ee 4 165 Stale Systeam RESISTE y us PESOS RAR EE SLEDS OO OPES EER 165 The Questionable Signal Status Group so eraketa aa 025 eee eee 167 The Operation Status Groups seet eee PED de EE HRs Be RE REO SE EES 168 The Standard Event Status Group gt s scs asse o 170 The Status Byte Status GOD s s poe GRR EES REE AA 172 Saving Digitizer ContigUra nS s e rra 174 How to Save and Recall a Configuration o o 175 Chapter 4 Command Reference o o e 177 Chaplera ient ia e ad A amp bebewe a 177 Command UNDER os a LARA A E a AES SESS 178 Common Command Font 2 44445 846 rr RE REA 178 SEP Command PORE a ota E ee pe ak e ok Be a 179 Keyword Separalor ridad es bORE PED ASREE ELE EH 179 Abbreviated Commands Y LA ARA RARA A KE 179 Imphed Optional Keywords 444484446 corras erre 180 Wash lS Command SV ye gos a ee dk ok e bo a ey de ee A 180 SCPI Command Pardee 244604 8S ede
156. EF ALL Calibrate channel 1 using default sample rate and number of points calibrate all gain ranges on both ports CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 211 CONFigure lt chan gt The CONFigure subsystem provides a fast way to place the HP E1429 into a known state ready to take measurements An INITiate FETCh is then all that is necessary to take a measurement after the CONFigure command has been executed If desired CONFigure may be used to quickly get to a known state from which other states such as TRIGger STARt SOURce or TRIGger STARt TIMer can be fine tuned to desired values before the INITiate FETCh sequence is executed Subsystem CONFigure lt chan gt Syntax ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input port gt ARRay VOLTage DC CONFigure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input port gt will configure for taking lt size gt number of readings on the specified channel and lt input port gt The lt expected value gt and lt resolution gt parameters are used to set SENSe VOLTage RANGe to an appropriate setting for making the measurement on the specified input port and channel If no expected value is given the 1V range 1 0235 V peak is used If a resolution is specified it is checked for correctness against what is possible with the expected value range and if
157. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HP shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material This docu ment contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photo copied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Company HP assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by HP Restricted Rights Legend The Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 Oct 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 Jun 1995 as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 Jun 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved LA HEWLETT PA PACKARD HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer User s Manual Edition 2 Copyright 1993 Hewlett Packard Company All Rights Reserved HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer User s Manual 9 Documen
158. GENerate mode and the inner digitizer s is set to the INSert mode A device such as the HP E1488 memory card is usually the consumer Readings are taken directly from the digitizer A Ds As an example the transfer sequence from digitizers D1 D3 where D1 is in generator mode leftmost slot and D2 and D3 rightmost slot are in insert mode would appear as EOF EOB D1 EOB D2 EOB D3 gt consumer where EOF is the end of frame flag EOB is the end of block flag and Dn is either a two byte one channel or four byte two channel reading If you are using the interleaved transfer mode of the HP E1429B with the HP E1485 Digital Signal Processor module note that the E1485 can accept no more than 256 blocks The maximum data transfer rate over the Local bus is 80 MBytes second which is equivalent to 40 MSamples second The HP E1429B digitizer transfers data at 40 MSamples second when readings are taken on two digitizer channels at the maximum sample rate of 20 MHz When doing interleaved transfers the transfer rate cannot exceed 40 MSamples second regardless of the number of digitizers used The maximum sample transfer rate allowed is determined by 40 MSamples number of channels Appendix D Local Bus Interleaved Transfers 405 For example if a configuration consists of two digitizers and both channels on each digitizer are used the maximum sample rate for each digitizer is 40 MSamples 4 channels 10 MHz As ano
159. Ge ae eA Be Roe ek Be a 325 Trigger Sample Clock Subsystem ra sacrer o 325 Bus Access and Connectors 24404 kek keke AE REM nepi SS 327 General Characionislles y bes deb add 328 Appendix B Useful Tables o o o e 331 Ape E COMES use ra RRS OK AAA REED EE AAA 331 Appendix C Register Programming e 341 Appendix Contents eera gat II 341 Suen CONMSIIBOR lt A a 341 Reading and Writing to the Registers sce ke ea a eee di pudia 342 Addressing the Registers 24 4 e koe KK pin Ee E MEK ERS aidha 343 Determining the A24 Base Address co osos eee Re ee 344 Resister DISSCODLD S ac boi dd de he da he ok Be ee 347 A24 Register Table The Input Configuration Registers 2 2 2 2 eee ee ee 350 The fu Staus REgisier igo c4 eb aS EEE LAE HE ELGS RES REDS OE 350 The AGU Serra REGIME a ac ee ek O a E RA E E E a 350 The A D Parallel Strobe Register 454444 bbe de Go os DEER RRS ssa 331 The AUTE SHM Reni 3 00 A A er h eRe RR ERR dd A Re 351 The Arm and Trigger Configuration Registers sa wes 6 6 4s see eee ee dau 353 The Abort and Arm Immediate Register he RS SRE AE RE 353 The Arm Status Register 5 gi45e4 3 8 amp PK DERE EERE SD DERE REDE YES 333 The Timebase Initiation Register oa saab k eed RAR EERE EEE REE 354 6 HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual Contents The Am Internal Bus Register 060 05 ee eR RR A 353 The Arm Source Register 1 42548 448 KE dR R
160. IM Ndig 1 Count 9 dimension parameters for header Count set count to zeros ASSIGN EX TO 70905 FORMAT OFF return unformatted data OUTPUT 70905 FETC1 retrieve readings from channel 1 ENTER EX USING X K K Ndig Count 1 VAL Ndig lremove header preceding the data ALLOCATE INTEGER Meas_data 1 VAL Count 2 lallocate an array to hold the data ENTER X Meas_data read in the measurement data ENTER 70905 USING B Junk remove the line feed character The parameters of the ENTER USING statement function as follows terminate ENTER on last ENTER item EOD X skip the character of the header K enter the lt non zero digit gt part of the header into the Ndig variable K enter the lt digits gt part of the header into the Count locations specified B retrieve one byte the line feed from the digitizer Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 135 C Language Example 16 bit readings dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 20 sizeof int set number of bytes placed in memory and number of bytes read swap sizeof int place 2 bytes reading in memory bytes 20 swap read 40 bytes IOOUTPUTS ADDR READ 5 retrieve the readings IOENTERAB ADDR rdgs amp bytes swap enter the readings and remove the block header Remove line feed which trails the last data byte length 1 IOENTERS ADDR If_remove amp length
161. INts AUTO and VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED settings determine the allowable values of this command e For a more complete discussion and example of when this command should be used see Local Bus Data Transfers in Chapter 3 e Ifa measurement was halted using the ABORt command and MEM xxx is one of the VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED choices the query form of this command will return the number of points that will actually be transferred assuming VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO ON when the VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate command is invoked e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure LB US FEED e RST Condition 2 Example Query number of readings output per block VINS LBUS SEND POIN Query points CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO lt mode gt determines how the digitizer will send its data over the Local bus In most cases AUTO ON would be used which sends all of a measurement s data over the Local bus followed by an end of block flag and an end of frame flag The AUTO OFF setting is a special setting which is only used when it is desirable for multiple digitizers to output A D data from each common trigger event onto the Local bus at approximately the same time i e in parallel In this mode the end of block and end of frame flags are sent with each reading trigger event This mode requires that all digitizers are set to the same trigger count
162. LSAMP Cb ce eS Gk SAS SSKKEKASRE ENS EES EE HRS EEK 55 COMDES ogres eee eee Deed bee eG adn RARA A ee a 33 Usine Multiple AA ESE Se CREE SS 56 MULT AD 6c cae eee E ae KA Ce SOS 57 COMMENS acordar A A A A a E SEWED 58 Using the Packed Data Format ooo aa ee RRR REESE SERS 39 CODIMEM S a Sh hh eh ok A A A a ee a 62 VME Bus Data Transfers orina dae e a HK ROR EES 63 VME RES ue RI A BATEA A E AAA da 63 o IA 66 E OITISNOS pap so oo e hse Seve O e a Ry ae dE deo 71 VME Bus Data Transfers Using an Embedded Controller T2 DEINE coa ARA ERE e E a 72 SES D2 CIP ibe ea SSA ERROR EAE OSLER SE CORRE EES 74 SEGTST16 CPP and SEGTST32 CPP include Files 77 Local Bus Data Transifets i bebe a PRK Eee E COPED te kiio irid 83 DEAL ANGE cet OA ER Bk a AAA EE tee ee eee A 83 A J SEs FS EOE SEE EEO YE SES EDS ESE DE SEBS ES GS 87 LEUS PO dE ee dak o ee a ok ee ide ok he ee oe 88 COMENS ae a od de hE deed A Saeed 92 LOS rueta hha Be eS AA Eee Re eee A 93 COMENS arar ea oe a RAR ee eo 99 Using the Digitizer Status Registets ge ee RR RO a 101 SIRIUS y coc OKRAGS MAK SBHE EDA GOS ER EGGERS 101 COMUNE pinks ke AAA AAA 102 Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer o o 103 o AA E CRE REE ERE KE 103 HP E1429 Digitizer Block Diagrami o 44 cs RE EAE OED EER RS RE d 103 The Message and Register Interfaces oo ok ke kh ee eR E i o 105 Digitizer Command Pate 246 hsb edo de Pb eed eki ESSE e 105 The Digttizer Input
163. MA Ximum are not allowed with this command e Optional parameters that are left blank are filled from left to right Therefore it may be necessary to use the syntax DEFault to note that a particular parameter has been defaulted For example to default the number of readings and specify a CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 203 CALibration lt chan gt GAIN Example sample rate the command would appear as CAL GAIN DEF 05 one CALibration GAIN forces the internal reference 20 MHz oscillator to be used Sample rates are attained using that reference The default number of readings is 1000 and the default period is 1 0E 4 seconds These numbers were chosen such that the product of the two is a period that is an integral multiple of both 50 Hz and 60 Hz line cycles 1 seconds in this case When calibrating gain on the differential ports an error could occur which contains the text All readings have same value in cal_mean routine The most likely cause of this error is that the two differential inputs on the port are not grounded properly and a common mode overload is occurring The product of the period and number of readings will be checked to see if it exceeds 10 seconds and if so error 221 Settings conflict Calibration time too long occurs Normally upon completion the new gain values would be stored to the non volatile calibration memory This can be overridden by setting CALibration STORe
164. MSamples second The transfer rate cannot exceed 40 MSamples second regardless of the number of digitizers 4 Arming the Digitizers In order for all digitizers to sample when a trigger is received the digitizers to the left of the rightmost digitizer are armed initiated before the rightmost digitizer is triggered Appendix D Local Bus Interleaved Transfers 413 5 Aborting the Digitizers Following interleaved transfers the Local bus chip of each digitizer is left in an active running state Starting with the leftmost GENerator digitizer it is necessary to ABORt each digitizer before the next use of the Local bus 6 Reading Sequence and Format When this program executes the readings are transferred to the memory card and later displayed in the following sequence INSerter digitizer channel 2 reading 1 INSerter digitizer channel 1 reading 1 GENerator digitizer channel 2 reading 1 GENerator digitizer channel 1 reading 1 INSerter digitizer channel 2 reading n INSerter digitizer channel 1 reading n GENerator digitizer channel 2 reading n GENerator digitizer channel 1 reading n The memory card was set up to store the readings in the digitizer s packed data format The packed readings are signed 16 bit numbers preceded by the ANSI TEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block header Packed readings are always numbers between 1 0230 2046 and 1 0235 2047 To convert the readings to voltages each read
165. Mediate ARM Slope TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt TRIGGER CONTROL o OUTPut EXTernoal 1 FEED RFTR SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt Reference ROSC Clock ROSC N A D Convert oe OUTPut ECLTrg lt OUTPut EXTerna Pulse n gt FEED TRIG i FEED TRIG TRIGger STAR SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator SOURce lt source gt SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt Bw OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED Do not accept ARM until Pre arm count is reached Clear ARM when Post arm count is reached Figure 3 5 HP E1429 Digitizer Arming and Triggering COUNt lt count gt ROSC ROSC E1429A FIG3 5 Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 113 The digitizer hardware associated with arming the digitizer is controlled by the SCPI ARM subsystem The commands in this subsystem include ARM STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt count gt DELay lt period gt IMMediate LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt POSitive lt voltage gt SLOPef lt n gt lt edge gt SOURce lt n gt lt source gt Note Each command in this subsystem is covered in detail in Chapter 4 Command Reference ARM Subsystem The following information summarizes each command in the ARM Overview subsystem Setting the Arm Source The
166. Mer or DTIM then the sample rates specified by TRIGger STARt TIMer1 and TRIGger STARt TIMer 2 are retained but are not used nor coupled to each other If the HP E1429 can not sample within 1 percent of the period specified by TRIGger STARt TIMer1 then the TIME bit bit 2 in the QUEStionable Status register is set TRIGger Subsystem Command Reference 279 e Related Commands TRIGger STARt TIMer2 TRIGger STARt SOURce e RST Condition 5 0E 8 seconds PERIOD VALUE TABLE The following sample periods are available with the digitizer s internal 20 MHz reference oscillator Multiple Period Multiple Period Multiple Period Seconds Seconds Seconds 1 5 0E 8 2 1 0E 7 4 2 0E 7 10 5 0E 7 20 1 0E 6 40 2 0E 6 100 5 0E 6 200 1 0E 5 400 2 0E 5 1000 5 0E 5 2000 1 0E 4 4000 2 0E 4 10 000 5 0E 4 20 000 1 0E 3 40 000 2 0E 3 100 000 5 0E 3 200 000 1 0E 2 400 000 2 0E 2 1 000 000 0 050 2 000 000 0 10 4 000 000 0 20 10 000 000 0 50 20 000 000 1 0 40 000 000 2 0 100 000 000 5 0 200 000 000 10 0 400 000 000 20 STARt TIMer2 TRIGger STARt TIMer2 lt period gt specifies the time period between each sampling event of the post arm portion of a dual rate measurement The time period must be a multiple of the reference oscillator period with allowable multiples being 1 2 4 10 20 40 1E8 2E8 4E8 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units
167. NTEGER Cal_data 1 VAL Count 2 Allocate an array to hold the data ENTER From Cal_data Read in the calibration constants ENTER To USING B Junk Need to remove left over line feed 200 Command Reference CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem CALibration lt chan gt DELay Each channel contains 62 calibration constants The following list describes what the constant is at each array index location The array is assumed to start with index number 0 Index Contents Index Contents 0 offset for 1 0235V range 31 gain Isb for single ended 51175 V range 1 Ato D chip internal setting 32 offset for differential 10235 V range 2 Ato D chip internal setting 33 gain msb for differential 10235 V range 3 Ato D chip internal setting 34 gain Isb for differential 10235 V range 4 Ato D chip internal setting 35 offset for differential 2047 V range 5 Ato D chip internal setting 36 gain msb for differential 2047 V range 6 linearity bit 5 left 37 gain Isb for differential 2047 V range 7 linearity bit 5 right 38 offset for differential 51175 V range 8 linearity bit 6 left 39 gain msb for differential 51175 V range 9 linearity bit 6 right 40 gain Isb for differential 51175 V range 10 linearity bit 7 left 41 offset for differential 1 0235 V range 11 linearity bit 7 right 42 gain msb for differential 1 0235 V range 12 linearity bit 8 left 43 gain Isb for differential 1 02
168. OD stat write strlen stat_write break route input signal to channel 1 attenuators read bit 10 by reading the A D status register case 10 IOQOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat_read strlen stat_read IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit set bit 10 to 1 by writing to the A D serial register sprintf stat_write DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x05 8 1 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat write strlen stat_write break read and shift all other shift register bits to restore each bit to its original position default OOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat_read strlen stat_read IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit bit_set int bit bit gt 0 5 5 sprintf stat_write DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x05 8 bit_set IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD stat write strlen stat_write break Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Programming 393 copy the shift register bits to the shift register latch by writing a value of 4 to the strobe register sprintf strobe_write DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x0B 8 4 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD strobe_write strlen strobe_write ESSSEESISSISSISS ESSE SELES SESS S BESS ERIRE BESESERSSESESSE void set_trig_source long base_addr This function sets the digitizer trigger source to the reference period n The reference source is the digitizer s internal 20 MHz oscillator which was set by the CONFigure command char command 80 int bit_reg 0
169. ODE VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate TRIGger STARt SOURe e RST Condition VINStrument VME FEED MEMory BOTH32 Example Reading both channels out to the VME VXI data transfer bus TRIG SOUR VME Set up trigger system for VME transfer VINS VME GEN Set GENerate mode VINS VME FEED MEM BOTH32 Set data source to be both channels INIT Begin the transfer CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate configures the HP E1429 for data transfer over the VME bus when the data register in A24 address space is read The configuration is done automatically if the INITiate MMediate command is executed while VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE is GENerate and any of the MEMory xxx settings is the selection for 294 Command Reference VINStrument Subsystem VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED However if these settings were not in effect when the measurement was taken then VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate must be sent before data is retrie ved from memory via the data register This command results in an error if VINStrument CONF gure V ME MODE is OFF This command has no query form Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command Yes this command will error if VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE is OFF or if the HP E1429 is already initiated or transferring data e Ifthe data in memory is in multiple segments then there will be a smal
170. ONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts lt count gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS POINts AUTO lt mode gt Only the INSert and GENerate mode is supported for interleaved transfers 3 Reset the consumer s 1 e memory card s Local bus chip and configure the consumer to receive data 4 Activate initiate the consumer 5 Use INITiate MMediate to activate the leftmost GENerator digitizer 6 Use INITiate MMediate to activate the inner INSerter digitizer Appendix D Local Bus Interleaved Transfers 407 7 Use INITiate MMediate to activate the rightmost INSerter digitizer 8 Beginning with the leftmost GENerator digitizer abort each digitizer before using the Local bus again Example Prog ram This program demonstrates how to use multiple digitizers to transfer readings interleaved to an HP E1488 memory card consumer The program takes 10 readings on both channels of two digitizers Therefore 10 frames of data 40 readings are sent to the memory card The example follows the programming procedure listed above LBUSINTR C LBUSINTR C This program demonstrates how to transfer interleaved readings from multiple digitizers to the HP E1488 memory card In an interleaved transfer each digitizer transfers one set of readings or one reading if using a single channel per block The readings are taken directly from the A Ds The leftmost digiti
171. OTH Send both channels directly from A D converter VINS LBUS SEND POIN 2 POIN AUTO OFF Set up to send end of block and end of frame every two readings CONFigure TEST DATA VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA lt voltage_list gt configures the HP E1429B for Local bus testing and transmits the data given in voltage_list This data will be temporarily stored in internal memory before being output at the fastest possible speed over the Local bus The data will be stored into alternate channels beginning with channel 2 The data is output over the Local bus the same way interleaved with channel 2 data point 1 first Regardless of their current settings VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED is set to MEM BOTH VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE is set to GENerate and VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE is set to OFF These changes will remain in effect after the command has completed Parameters The voltage_list must be an IEEE 488 2 definite length block containing values in 16 bit integer format with the most significant byte being the first byte in a pair i e Motorola format VINStrument Subsystem Command Reference 291 VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA The legal range of values is 32768 to 32767 Only the upper 12 bits are stored into memory The lower 4 bits are ignored and the actual values sent over the Local bus for these lower 4 bits are determined by the current setting of the DIAGnostic CHANnel LABel command Comme
172. POSitive The allowable levels depend on the measurement range as set by the SENSe VOLTage RANGe command Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 2 none level numeric 102 2418 to 102 2418 Volts MINimum MAXimum Comments Executable while initiated No e Coupled Command Yes The command is coupled to the ARM STARt SLOPe ARM STARt SOURce and SENSe VOLTage RANGe commands The level value is limited to the range limits e When POSitive and NEGative voltage levels are specified the levels must be separated by an amount defined by 50 mV 1 0235V measurement range This accounts for offset errors in the levels specified and enables the levels to be detected e Related Commands ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt e RST Condition ARM STARt LEVel lt n gt NEG 1 022418 192 Command Reference ARM Subsystem ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive lt voltage gt Example Setup to arm only when the signal on channel 2 falls through 0 48 volts ARM SOUR1 INT2 Set arming source 1 to arm when the specified level is met on channel 2 ARM SLOP1 NEG The signal must fall through the level set by ARM LEVel2 NEG for arming to occur Arm when the signal passes through the 48V level ARM LEV2 NEG 0 48 STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive lt voltage gt ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive lt voltage gt selects th
173. Put314 IMPedance 1 MOHM Setting 75 Q input impedance INP IMP 75 OHM Set 732 impedance defaults to input 1 INPut lt port gt STA Te lt mode gt connects disconnects the input ports to from the measurement signal path All ports have a special relay which is used to isolate the input from the signal path regardless of whether the sensor channel is currently connected to that port or not Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units port numeric 1 2 3 4 none mode boolean OFF O ON 1 none 234 Command Reference INPut lt port gt Subsystem INPut lt port gt STATe Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e Enabling or disabling the input port while the digitizer is taking readings initiated may cause unexpected reading values due to relay settling during the transition e Related commands SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC lt port gt e RST Condition INPut lt port gt STATe ON Example Disabling input port 2 INP2 OFF Disconnect input port 2 from the measurement signal path INPut lt port gt Subsystem Command Reference 235 MEASure lt chan gt The MEASure query subsystem provides a complete measurement sequence including configuration and reading of the data MEA Sure is used when the generic measurement is acceptable and default triggering and timebase values may be used The MEA Sure query is the same as doing the command sequence of
174. Refer to Figure 3 6 Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 115 Note For arm source TTLTRG lt n gt the digitizer arms on the negative going edge of the signal For arm source ECLTrg lt n gt the digitizer arms on the positive going edge These sources are not affected by the ARM STARt SLOPe command Arm Window The boundaries of the window are set by the voltage levels of Boundaries ARM STARt LEVel POSitive and ARM STARt LEVel NEGative When ARM STARt LEVel POSitive specifies a level that is greater than ARM STARt LEVel NEGative the digitizer is armed when the input signal exits the defined window When ARM STARt LEVel POSitive specifies a level that is less than ARM STARt LEVel NEGative the digitizer is armed when the input signal enters the defined window POS level A NEG level NS Input Input NEC wn POS i ARM SLOPe ElTHer E1429A FIG3 6 Figure 3 6 Arm Window Boundaries Setting the Arm Level When the arm source is INTernall or INTernal2 the level of the input signal at which the digitizer becomes armed is set with the commands ARM STARt LEVEL lt n gt NEGative lt voltage gt This command sets the voltage level on the specified channel that when reached by a negative going input signal arms the digitizer ARM STARt LEVEL lt n gt POSitive lt voltage gt This command sets the voltage level on the specified channel that when reached by a positive goi
175. S A OD OEE KER OEE SE 208 VOLE 6h ek Sah ODER OEE EKER OER MER eR 4 208 MERO ii A OEE EVIE A SHORE ES a 210 CONFIG SEARS oie ae a oe a ok a e Oe Re BO Re be 212 ARES VOL Tage DC 62 464 ara bi dee e AR 212 DAGIS e cir ARA RSE AED A ORES ORES KE 216 CALibration lt chan gt CON Verge o ee es 216 CALibration lt chan gt GAIN SENSitivity 0 2 202000 217 CALibration lt chan gt ZERO SENSitivity o o e 217 CHANA an gt LABE 2 424445 cee hee eG RAKE READE TOS 217 FECI EEES SL SHEE SEER E EA OE RSE OER 218 MEM pecan PMs sae doe alk atk ee bo A Be eS Ge he 220 MEMory lt chan gt ADDResses o ee ee 220 PEBE 265 52 60 45 662 a aaa ee eed 221 POE eee ee Se ee et ee 222 SOBI ad e e ow 223 PUT ok BERS e he OOS EE E SR 223 MESA br AA a 223 FETCH da A A be ar Ss Bao Ss SH SS 224 FERCH 3k 6 3 Beil oh dd dd a BEDS bh ree A 224 RO 22 dl le e Ske A a Bek ie hg Se Od a e de SE A 226 RECOS ed LAY SEEDERS ee De Ee ee Eee SSE 227 POMO hc a see ee 228 FDATA Ss 6 fo ce hb deed ee hk Aa de 228 TAS 4 ES OR AA eo Ra BREE NE A S 230 CUASI 46k oe SEE EH REE SLED EDEL ERPS ES ARENA 230 INP O a pe do o te th o Re as pea dotnet fo oh oa ote te ala ae cae eth ape ea G 232 PIL Ten LPASs IPSTATE s reodere iiie rep ee ee ER EOS 203 dl AA E 2 RR ee ae ee 233 ESTATE corria SG SHG EE AE ESE SESH AREA 234 TARA Siege jee hae Wom ka RO ORS oe We ae Go ha Re ee Ec 236 ARE ST
176. S ADDR SYST ERR 9 Query error register IOENTERS ADDR into amp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit while atoi into 0 printf Error s in function s n n into func_tion IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS ADDR into amp length Comments 1 Segmented Readings Multiple bursts of pre arm and post arm readings segment memory see Figure 3 13 When transferring segmented readings over the VME bus real time or post measurement a partition window must be accounted for A partition window is the period during which the digitizer configures each segment for data transfer The partition window is monitored by bit 1 of digitizer offset register 4316 and by bit 9 of the condition register in the Operation Status Group Figure 3 13 A low to high transition of the bit indicates the next segment can be transferred 2 Monitoring the Partition Window It is only necessary to monitor the partition window bits when the digitizer readings are segmented and the data register is accessed at speeds available through an embedded controller Monitoring bit 1 of offset register 4316 is faster than using SCPI commands to monitor bit 9 of the condition register 3 Locating the Registers Access to the data register and offset register 4316 is through their addresses which are mapped by the HP E1406 Command Module or the system
177. SOOO TOSS e PETS PEED TO ey void configure void int length 0 loop 0 use the digitizer1 array to configure the generator digitizer char static digitizer1 CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 set 10 readings 5V range channel 1 input port 3 ARM STAR SOUR TTLTO set arm source ARM STAR DEL 50E 6 set arm delay VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE GEN set Local bus mode to GENerate VINS LBUS FEED CONV CHAN1 set Local bus feed Continued on Next Page 94 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 use the digitizer2 array to configure the inserter digitizer char static digitizer2 CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 set 10 readings 5V range channel 1 input port 3 OUTP TTLTO FEED READY feed ready signal to next digitizer OUTP TTLTO STAT ON enable ready signal feed VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE INS set Local bus mode to INSert VINS LBUS FEED CONV CHAN1 set Local bus feed use the memory array to configure the memory card char static memory FORM DATA PACK set packed data format TRAC DEL ALL delete all readings on memory card TRAC DEF SET1 40 store readings 40 bytes in SET1 VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE CONS set Local bus mode to consume STAT OPC INIT OFF exe
178. ST CLS OPC ENTER 70905 Ready OUTPUT 70905 CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 1 1 OUTPUT 70905 SENS1 SWE OFFS POIN 10 OUTPUT 70905 READ ENTER 70905 Readings PRINT Readings END 40 Getting Started Chapter 1 CONF C CONF C This program demonstrates how to use the CONFigure command and low level digitizer commands to configure the digitizer INITialize and FETCh are used to trigger the digitizer and retrieve the readings from digitizer memory Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L 1 0 path from the PC to the digitizer Function Prototypes void rst_clr void void ad_conf void void ad_fetch void void check_error char func_tion RRPRARERRESRERES ERSEARRRER EB RSAARRSARRRSA ERRE REBRERRERERERRERERRERERERRERERE void main void run the program rst_clr reset the digitizer ad_conf send commands which configure the digitizer ad_fetch send command which retrieves the digitizer readings JERERTRRR ERRE R ARRE R OCRE RECREAR CRE REC RE RECI SLE LELAE LEAS LEAS LOLA ELSES LSE ES void ad_conf void int length 0 loop 0 use the set_commands array to configure digitizer channel 1 char static set_comman
179. ST Condition none Querying virtual instrument capability VINS IDEN Query capability VINStrument Subsystem Command Reference 297 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands This section describes the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands implemented in the HP E1429 The table below shows the commands listed by functional group however commands are listed alphabetically in the reference Examples are shown in the reference when the command has parameters or returns a non trivial response otherwise the command string is as shown in the table For additional information refer to IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Category Command Title System Data IDN Identification Query PUD lt data gt Protected User Data Command PUD Protected User Data Query Internal Operations LRN Learn Device Setup Query RST Reset Command TST Self Test Query Synchronization OPC Operation Complete Command OPC Operation Complete Command WAI Wait to Continue Command Macro DMC lt name gt lt data gt Define Macro Command EMC lt enable gt Enable Macro Command EMC Enable Macro Query GMC lt name gt Get Macro Contents Query LMC Learn Macro Query PMC Purge Macros Command RMC lt name gt Remove Individual Macro Command Status amp Event CLS Clear Status Command ESE lt mask gt Standard Event Status Enable Command ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query ESR Standard Event Status Register Query SRE Service Request Enable
180. STARt LEVel POSitive commands e The active edge for the EXTernal1 source is specified by the ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt command e The active edge s for level detection ARM STARt SOUR LEVel lt chan gt is specified by the ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt command e Related Commands ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt e RST Condition ARM STARt SOURce1 IMMediate ARM STARt SOURce2 HOLD Example Setting two arm start sources ARM SOUR1 EXT1 Set one arming source to be the front panel Ext 1 BNC Set the second arming source to be the ECLTRG line ARM SOUR2 ECLTO ARM Subsystem Command Reference 197 CALibration lt chan gt The CALibration command subsystem is used in the calibration of the HP E1429 The HP E1429 has commands to prevent and detect accidental or unauthorized calibration of the instrument The CALibration subsystem includes both these security related commands and the actual calibration commands Subsystem CALibration lt chan gt Syntax COUNt query only DATA lt block data gt DELay no query GAIN lt readings gt lt period gt no query SECure CODE lt code gt no query STATe lt mode gt lt code gt STORe AUTO lt mode gt VALue lt number gt ZERO lt readings gt lt period gt lt mode gt no query COUNt CALibration lt chan gt COUNt returns a number that shows how often the HP El429 has been calibrated S
181. STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt NTRansition sets the negative transition For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Condition register sets the associated bit in the Event register PTRansition sets the positive transition For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Condition register sets the associated bit in the Event register Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 169 lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Condition register bit to be unmasked Bits 0 6 8 and 9 have corresponding decimal values of 1 64 256 and 512 The Event Register The Event register latches transition events from the Condition register as specified by the Transition Filter Bits in the Event register are latched and remain set until the register is cleared by one of the following commands STATus OPERation EVENt CLS The Enable Register The Enable register specifies which bits in the Event register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The digitizer logically ANDs the bits in the Event register with bits in the Enable register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable register that are to be ANDed with bits in the Event register are specified unmasked with the command STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H o
182. SWEep POINts is set to INFinity attempts to do so will result in error 214 Trigger deadlock e The count is the total of both pre arm readings The number of pre arm readings is specified by the SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts command as a negative count If SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts is 0 then all readings will be post arm e Related Commands ABORt INITiate MMediate ARM subsystem SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts TRIGger STARt COUNt e RST Condition SENSe1 SWEep POINts 1 Example Setting 500 readings SENS1 SWE POIN 500 set reading count SENSe lt chan gt SWEep Subsystem Command Reference 261 SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC The SENSe VOLTage DC commands select the voltage range and report back the resolution associated with the selected range Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt Syntax VOL Tage DC RANGe lt range gt RESolution query only RANGe SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC RANGe lt range gt selects the range for voltage measurement on the specified channel Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 2 none range numeric 102 30 to 102 35 volts MINimum MAXimum The various range settings are given in the following table along with the input ports supported on each range and the measurement range spanned by the given range 262 Command Reference SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC Subsystem Comments SENSe
183. Section gc end chee hasan e dh ee Scheu ees 106 SP o ag ee ed ee a EE ee SES OS ad 106 a s sede ee kee gk Ro a ek eR A E we A ko ed 109 Arming and Triggering ss 64k ab ee HER EERE EE EEE ERE ERG 111 The ARM TRIG State Diagram o o ee 112 Arming THE ENGNG e ARO AAA 113 o A eR ok Be hk ee hod dh ed 121 The Sample Pernod 6 cde oe bees Khe ed onde A e 122 The Digitizer Reference Ci ia ee KO ee PR REE ER Se eS 124 The Analoe i0 Disital CONVENE sous oR oR RA ER ER Re 129 Data Flow Storage and Conversions as aa c aas saraaa aaa ee ee 129 Dita Daa FW scsi rs RA EH REDE DR DEAS ERAEBE 129 2 HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual Contents IDI er Daa POBRE poia ee oe a ee eo a ek Ok hk Rd a et 133 Packed Reading Conversions 2 644 s8 ch Hie od de H EEE DEP ED eo HES 134 Retieyine Realings p e ge aha PEARS KOREA AREAS amp ORE ERE 137 Retrieving Readings Using READ 54 64 244 44 ee KEES 139 Retnevine Readings Using FETCH o s s pecto A RO o 139 Using DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress oaoa 141 Memory Management 6 6a Ge vd ed ee II 142 The DIAGHOSHE SUDSVSEN oe eke kk eR RE A OE 142 VME Bus Data TSE oa A SW Soe oe ERE ORES 146 Locating the Data RESISTIR 146 The VINSHUMENLSUBSYSIG cisco ee RRR ERE SEER RES HESS 151 Local Bus Data TMG lt base ha Be ORE Go Sew Oe eRe DAS ERS SS RS 156 Local Bus DesenptO 2 ra eee oe RE OS EES EP eS ES OG 156 How Datais Transferred o bee AR OK Ow RO A ER ew 157 Local Bus Medes 24 ia SAREE ARA AR
184. Stop data register base 6716 e Interpolator calibration register base 6916 e Self test register base 6B 16 e Time base registers base 7D16 and base 7F16 Trigger count e Pre arm reading count registers base 7316 to base 7516 e Post arm reading count registers base 7716 to base 7B16 Sample rate e Arm control register base 4B 16 e Decade division register base 6116 e Binary division register base 6316 Data source e Traffic register base 0216 e Pulse register base 0816 Timebase initiate e Timebase initiation register base 4516 e Arm count latch register base 5916 For the complete digitizer re initiation to occur the registers must be read and written to in the sequence given in the procedure Appendix C Register Programming 381 Procedure 1 Reset and initialize the timebase processor A Write the following data to the registers indicated Except for the abort and arm immediate register base 4116 these registers must not be set to any other values therefore they are not listed in the Register Descriptions section write any 8 bit value to base 4116 write any 8 bit value to base 5F16 write a value of to base 6516 write a value of 5 to base 6716 write a value of 0 to base 6916 write a value of 0 to base 6B16 write a value of 0 to base 7D16 write a value of 0 to base 7F16 2 Set the Trigger count The number of readings the digitizer tak
185. TARt COUNt SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts e RST Condition none Example Determining how many readings are in memory FETC1 COUN Query how many readings are available for channel I this is also how many are available on channel 2 226 Command Reference FETCh lt chan gt Subsystem FETCh lt chan gt RECover RECover FETCh lt chan gt RECover returns readings from the specified channel in the format set by the FORMat DATA command This command is used to fetch data that was saved during a power failure and which cannot be fetched by the FETCh lt chan gt command due to the Data corrupt or stale error Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 12 none Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No e As mentioned above this command is intended to retrieve battery backed data after a power failure Attempting to use FETCh lt chan gt in this case may cause an error if any measurement parameters were changed after power is returned With FETCh RECover it is also possible to retrieve readings that were taken previously but which are not accessable to FETCh because of a setting change or reset e Iferror 1018 Battery backed data corrupt occurs FETCh RECover will not return the readings since a problem with the data was detected If the data must be recovered use the DIA Gnostic FETCh command e Related Commands INITiate MMedia
186. TATe lt mode gt IMPedance lt impedance gt STATe lt mode gt MEASure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt expected value gt lt resolution gt E lt input port gt OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt READ lt chan gt SENSe chan FUNCtion lt function gt ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt SOURce lt source gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt POINts lt count gt RANGe lt range gt RESolution STATus OPERation QUEStionable CONDition ENABle lt unmask gt EVENt NTRansition lt unmask gt PTRansition lt unmask gt PRESet SYSTem ERRor VERSion TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate SOURCe lt source gt TIMer1 lt period gt TlMer2 lt period gt 314 SCPI Conformance Information Chapter 4 Table 4 3 Non SCPI Commands CALibration lt chan gt DELay COUNt SECure CODE lt code gt STATe lt mode gt lt code gt STORe AUTO lt mode gt DIAGnostic CALibration lt chan gt CONVerge GAIN SENSitivity ZERO SENSitivity CHANnel lt chan gt LABel lt abel gt FETCh lt chan gt lt start_adar gt lt count gt MEMory lt chan gt FILL lt num_segments gt lt count gt ADDResses PEEK lt address gt lt bits gt
187. TIMer1 lt period gt To aid in learning the digitizer command set all headers are included in the example programs however the headers are abbreviated In an example program the previous statement with a period parameter of 10 us would appear as TRIG STAR TIM1 10E 6 Chapter 4 contains more information on the structure and execution of SCPI commands Some of the digitizer SCPI commands are functional or value coupled Functionally coupled commands are those that for one command to have affect another command must be set to a particular value Value coupled commands are those where changing the value of one command changes the value of the others 28 Getting Started Chapter 1 Coupled commands can cause Settings conflict errors when the program executes When a coupled command is executed the command setting is evaluated by the digitizer processor If the setting causes an illegal digitizer configuration a Settings conflict error occurs The error message lists the conflicting settings and then reports the values set by the digitizer processor The Comments section of each command reference entry Chapter 4 indicates if a command is coupled and if it is what the coupling constraints are How to Execute To prevent possible Settings conflict errors coupled commands must be Cou pled Commands _ contiguous and executed in the same program statement This is done by placing the commands in the same program line
188. TLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt Some of the lt source gt parameters include EXTernal 1 SENSe 1 2 ROSCillator SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts As an example the syntax for sending this type of command in an HP BASIC program is OUTPUT 70905 OUTP ECLT0 FEED EXT or OUTPUT 70905 OUTP ECLTO FEED EXT In a C language program the syntax is OUTP ECLTO FEED EXT or OUTP ECLTO FEED EXT e Arbitrary Block Program Data This parameter type is used to transfer a block of data in the form of bytes The block of data bytes is preceded by a header which indicates the number of data bytes which follow The syntax of the block header is as follows Chapter 4 Command Reference 181 Optional Parameters Querying Parameter Settings Definite length block lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non zero digit gt equals the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Command parameters shown within square brackets are optional The brackets are not part of the syntax and are not sent to the digitizer If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the instrument chooses a default value For example consider the command CONFigure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input po
189. This is done with the commands OUTPut EXTernal 1 STATe lt mode gt OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt For each command the lt mode gt settings are ON enables the port or trigger line to route the signal OFF disables the port or trigger line from routing the signal The ECLTRG trigger lines are independent with regard to the synchronization signal supplied by FEED This means that trigger lines ECLTO and ECLT1 when enabled can carry different synchronization pulses The Analog to Digital Converter Each channel on the HP E1429 digitizer has a 12 bit 20 MSample second analog to digital A D converter A paper describing the A D converter which was developed by Hewlett Packard Laboratories is available from the following Jewett R et al A 12b 20MS s Ripple through ADC ISSCC DIGEST OF TECHNICAL PAPERS pp 34 35 Feb 1992 Data Flow Storage and Conversions Digitizer Data Flow This section of the chapter covers the data flow from the A D to digitizer memory and to the VME VXI data transfer bus A block diagram of the data flow is shown in Figure 3 7 The HP E1429 digitizer takes readings samples on both channels simultaneously even if an input signal is applied to only one channel Each 12 bit reading is combined into a single 24 bit number which is sent to the data processor The processor converts the readings from ECL levels to TTL level
190. UNt TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe S WEep POINts DELay e RST Condition none Example 1 Examining readings in a portion of memory DIAG FETC 5200 300 Get 300 readings from channel 1 beginning at address 5200 Example 2 Reading back PACKed data HP BASIC program DIM Ndig 1 Count 9 Dimension parameters for header ASSIGN EX TO 70905 FORMAT OFF Turn format off for array data OUTPUT 70905 DIAG FETC1 5200 300 Query for channel 1 measurement data ENTER EX USING X K K Ndig Count 1 VAL Ndig Strip the header preceeding the data ALLOCATE INTEGER Meas_data 1 VAL Count 2 Allocate an array to hold the data ENTER OX Meas_data Read in the measurement data ENTER 70905 USING B Junk Need to strip off left over line feed DIAGnostic Subsystem Command Reference 219 DIAGnostic MEMory lt chan gt FILL MEMory lt chan gt FILL DIAGnostic MEMory lt chan gt FILL lt num_segments count gt sets up num_segments in memory and fills each with count readings Each data point is calculated from the formula data lt n gt current_segment 1 10 n modulo 2000 16 Where n is the data point of interest between 1 and count Only the specified channel is filled with these data points the other channel is filled with reading values of 0 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel numeric 1 2 none num_segments numeric O thru 128 none count numeric 1 thru
191. UT A_d LRN ENTER A_d Lrn Lrn Lrn amp REPEAT I POS Lrn PRINT Lrn 1 1 1 Lrn Lrn l 1 UNTIL Lrn 190 SUBEND Chapter 1 Getting Started 25 LRN C This program uses a 2 000 element character array To prevent stack overflow errors when compiling and running this program using Microsoft QuickCO change the stack size using the F option of the qcl command An example of how this program might be compiled is qcl AL F 8192 balrn c c qca2 lib clhpib lib LRN C This program queries the digitizer s reset conditions Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt string h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L 1 0 path from PC to the digitizer via the E1406 ERA REA SRE ES SEATS ARES LASS SS ERE TARAS RASS SRE ASSESS SSAA SSAA RESALES ES void main void Run the program char static codes RST LRN 0PC char Irndata 2000 prt ch int loop length 2000 Execute each command group using a loop for loop 0 loop lt sizeof codes sizeof char loop IOOUTPUTS ADDR codesfloop strlen codes loop Enter data returned by LRN into string IOENTERS ADDR Irndata amp length Start line counter loop 1 Separate LRN data into tokens delimited by Read and print the first LRN data point
192. VOL Tage RD 2244448246 Kee been ee OOS KE DSHS 236 MENGI E de She he Ee EER eee 240 BAT Terry STATE si eee 4 eae eee eee EO REE eS ee EERE ESS 240 TT er E a gh ee a et Ge ae Oe Re RO ERE 241 OUTRO crono ddr we DR ERE ROH EELS DEERE RES EES 242 PLLIRERSFEB 2 4 ce tanee CRRA A ERE ERS 242 BCL Amores AIS cisco SEER DOS SHEE A RE ERS 243 EX Tamal l FERD 00009 o wd ee as be bk we a OR e cd o 244 EXTemal I STATS cee ceo deed e ee bee A SH aS 246 4 HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual Contents oa Bed oe A PRED o ra E e ee a ee ee are 246 STL res SUA 2k ocae bees BRee Lee Ge ee ee EOD EOS 248 READ 664k eho RADAR A AAA BEES REGRESS 249 READ 64 Ke OSE KR ELEP ES SEEDERS SE PERSE e ESS 249 I sso os kh Ne Beek th oe Wie A dea Boeke ee od E E Re cde ks ee od 251 DENSelciare PPUNCHON 64 4444 26464465 aa EDS 252 SENSerechan gt FUNCION seie dS Rae RARER KR ERR ERE DE KES 252 SENS cen ROSCA sata oe She bee RES Se SS eS 254 SEX ema FREQUCNCY oo 204 oh SAREE OS Re a ES OR eS 254 SOURCE sisi REE ERE ED RRR SE ARA OR REEDS 253 BENS chan ESMESE occur 257 OPP SeCrOINISeCONR pee k a e CRS a a ARA 258 PONS CCH a a a e RR eed a he eo ee oe eS SS 260 SENSel echan VOLTS DET 24 444 64 64 a4 2d ARA CHRO ROO 262 RADE sgean GRE AA CASHES A 262 RE GNUS oa ee te ee he a bk Be Oe Sy a Se RES OSES 264 PM EE a EE E EE EEE T E EE E E T E T 265 OPOTINTIAE 2 Ba wh heck a AAA be G 266 OPERationl QUEStionable CONDition 2 0 ee ee 267 OPERat
193. Value V Volts tai 0 10235 00005 2 0 2047 00010 5 0 51175 00025 teat 1 0235 0005 2 2 047 0010 5 5 1175 0025 10 10 235 005 20 20 47 010 50 51 175 025 100 102 35 05 Executable when initiated No Coupled Command No If no input port is given MEASurel defaults to 1 and MEASure2 defaults to 02 Resolution varies by range and is constant for each range For any given range specifying MINimum MA Ximum or DEFault for resolution yields the same result It is important to note that the expected value determines the resolution and not vice versa The digitizer always uses 12 bit resolution and a coarser resolution value has no effect If for some reason a coarser resolution is desired specify a larger expected value See the previous table for expected values and resolutions The MEA Sure command is equivalent to the command sequence ABORt CONFigure INITiate IMMediate FETCh Because of the ABORt VME VXI data transfer bus or Local bus transfers in progress will be aborted This includes the pipelining of data 238 Command Reference MEASure lt chan gt Subsystem MEASure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC e The MEASure command configures the HP E1429 to do the measurement specified by the parameters given with MEASure All instrument settings will be forced to their RST values with the following exceptions In particular note that all OUTPut signals are turned off and their FEED
194. aReg ULONG Reading NReadings Reading NReadings Continued on Next Page 76 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 SEGTST16 CPP printf Channel 1 Channel 2 n printf Segi Seg2 Seg 1 Seg 2 n printf Reading Readings Reading2 Readings NReadings for ReadCnt 1 ReadCnt lt NReadings ReadCnt printf 2d 10 4f 10 4f 10 4f 10 4fin ReadCnt Scale LOWORD Reading Scale LOWORD Reading2 Scale HIWORD Reading Scale HIWORD Reading2 Reading Reading2 printf n free Readings return 0 and SEGTST32 CPP SEGTST32 CPP e INSTH include Files INST H e INST CPP e El429 H e El429 CPP ifndef INST_DEFD define INST_DEFD include lt sicl h gt define BYTE char define WORD short int define LONG long define UBYTE unsigned char define UWORD unsigned short int define ULONG unsigned long Continued on Next Page The following files are used with programs SEGTST16 CPP and Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 77 define LOWORD IWord WORD IWord define HIWORD IWord WORD LONG IWord gt gt 16 class Reglnst static RegInst Mappedinst int Valid int Mapped int MapSpace unsigned int PageStart PageCount UBYTE SuggestedAdar protected INST Inst UBYTE BaseAdar void Unmap void public Reginst UWORD lAddr 0 Reglnst void int IsValid void return this NULL amp amp Vali
195. addr 0x21 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command write the terminal ending address to the terminal address register sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x2B 8 255 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set the base starting address most significant byte sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x2D 8 255 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set the base starting address least significant byte sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x2F 8 251 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command enable memory to be written to and enable the address counter by setting bits 2 0 to 1 0 1 sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x21 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD 8bit_pat retain register settings set memory control register bits 2 and 0 tto t bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg amp OxF8 0x05 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x21 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Programming 395 RE RN EE REN TE a void initiate long base_addr This function initializes and initiates the timebase processor This includes initializing the processor setting the trigger post arm count setting the sample
196. aired either through physical damage excessive moisture or any other reason REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until safe operation can be verified by service trained personnel If necessary return the product to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Of fice for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained DO NOT service or adjust alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product Return the product to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained 10 HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer User s Manual Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Loveland Manufacturing Center Manufacturer s Address 815 14th Street S W Loveland Colorado 80537 declares that the product Product Name 20MS a s Digitizer Model Number HP El429A Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 Incl Amend 1 1992 EN61010 1 1993 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN55011 1991 Group Class A TEC 801 2 1991 EN50082 1 1992 4k VCD 8kVAD TEC 801 3 1984 EN50082 1
197. al memory after the measurements have occurred This transfer will automatically proceed after the measurements are completed if the user has previously set the VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE to APPend GENerate or INSert and if VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED is one of the MEM xxx choices If the measurement is aborted with the ABORt command or if VINStrument LBUS MODE is OFF or PIPline during the measurement then no automatic transfer is attempted Instead the VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate command must be used to start the transfer after the MODE and FEED have been set to the desired values When using this method the ARM source is automatically set to IMMediate and the trigger source is set to LBUS This allows the receiving module s on the right to control the data transfer and assures that transfers occur only when the receiving module is ready to receive data thus no data will ever be lost The trigger and arm sources are returned to their previous values with the next INITiate command VINStrument Subsystem Command Reference 283 VME VXI data transfer Bus transfers Subsystem Syntax When data is transferred over the VME bus directly from the A D converter a read of VME A24 address space offset 12 0C16 causes a measurement to be taken and transferred all in the same read cycle During the read cycle the HP E1429 takes a reading and puts the data into the register before the read cycle completes The ARM
198. al reference signal and goes high with the rising edge of reference sources ECLTrg lt n gt and CLK10 Input External Reference Ext 2 Port Input Internal Reference A ee 1 E E ECLTO ECLT1 CLK10 E1429A FIG2a e lt source gt EXTernal 1 Outputs the same signal currently specified by the OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED command however the polarity is inverted 126 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED lt source gt e lt source gt TRIGger STARtISEQuence 1 Outputs a trigger signal to the Ext 1 BNC port each time a convert pulse is sent to the A D converter Sample Trigger Input Ext 1 Port 25ns E1429A FIG3d e lt source gt SENSe 112 ROSCillator The significant edge of a TTL signal is the falling edge Therefore the output goes low with the falling edge of an external reference signal and goes low with the rising edge of reference sources ECLTrg lt n gt and CLK10 Input External Reference PAETA Ext 2 Port Input Internal Reference ET A aa es ECLTO ECLT1 CLK10 E1429A FIG2b lt source gt SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts The normally high output port goes low after the pre arm reading count has been reached Ext 1 Port 8 _ Pre arm Count Reached 4 E1429A FlG4a Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 127 OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt e lt source gt READy The l
199. all INTernal2 or EXTernal1 the digitizer arms on a specified level of a positive going or negative going input signal For these sources the digitizer must be informed of the slope on which to arm positive going negative going or either for INTernal lt n gt This is done with the command ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt lt edge gt The lt edge gt settings are POSitive arm on a positive going edge of the input signal NEGative arm on a negative going edge of the input signal ElTHer arm on either edge of the input signal INTernal lt n gt sources only The command is used with the arm source and arm level commands as shown Iset arm source to INT1 or INT2 ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt lt source gt set positive or negative transition ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt lt edge gt set arm input voltage level ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt POSitive lt voltage gt or ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt The arm slope command allows you to specify a positive transition a negative transition or either transition When a positive transition is specified the digitizer is armed when the increasing signal on the channel reaches the specified level When a negative transition is specified the digitizer is armed when the decreasing signal on the channel reaches the specified level When ElTHer is specified the digitizer is armed when the input signal enters or exits the defined window
200. alue to the pulse register base 0816 three times This initializes the transfer stages 8 Set the clock source to the digitizer data register Example Program A In the traffic register base 0216 set the digitizer s data register as the high speed clock source by setting bits 3 2 as indicated bits 3 2 1 0 Setting the data register base 0Cj6 as the clock source transfers a reading from memory to the VME bus each time the data register is read The following program demonstrates the procedures used to register program the digitizer The program was developed using the configuration listed on page C 1 To adapt the program for use with an embedded controller you will need to change the A24 base address accordingly as well as make the modifications noted in the program listing This program accomplishes the following e SCPI programming configures the digitizer to take 20 readings on the 5V range using the CONFigure command and then retrieves the readings using the READ command e Register programming changes the measurement range to 1V changes the trigger source to the reference oscillator period N sets the post arm reading count to 20 readings changes the sample rate to 10 kHz 100 us re initiates the digitizer to take the next 20 readings on the 1V range retrieves the readings from memory by reading the data register This places the readings on the VME VXI data transfer bus
201. ame flag is detected When the flag is detected the device appends its block of data and sets new end of block and end of frame flags Insert In this mode the device places a block of data and an end of block flag on the Local bus and then pipelines data from the device on the left to the device on the right Strip In this mode a device alternates between the pipeline and consume modes It removes a block of data from the beginning of each frame Eavesdrop In this mode a device is simultaneously consuming and pipelining data It copies each byte of data as it is passed along Transform In this mode a device generates and consumes data 158 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Digitizer Local Bus The commands used to configure the HP E1429B digitizer for Local bus Commands data transters are part of the VINStrument subsystem VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt MEMory INITiate MODE lt mode gt RESet SEND POINts lt count gt AUTO lt mode gt TEST DATA lt voltage_list gt Local Bus Transfer The programming sequence used for Local bus transfers depends on the Configu rations transfer configuration The transfer configurations covered in this manual include e Single digitizer post measurement transfers from digitizer memory real time measurement transfers from the digitizer A D e Multiple digitizers and serial transfers post measurement transfers from digit
202. ameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n numeric 011 none mode boolean OFF O ON 1 none Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes this command will cause a settings conflict error if the same ECLTRG trigger line is used in any of the following SENSe ROSCillator SOURce ARM STARtISEQuencel SOURcel ARM STARtISEQuence1 SOURce2 or TRIGger STARtISEQuencel SOURce e Routing synchronization pulses to the ECLTRG trigger lines is independently enabled disabled for each line e Related Commands OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED e RST Condition OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe OFF Example Enabling sync pulse output to ECLTRGO and ECLTRG1 OUTP ECLTO ON OUTP ECLT1 ON Enable ECLTRGO Enable ECLTRG1 EXTernal 1 FEED OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED lt source gt specifies the source for the synchronization pulse which will be output on the Ext 1 BNC The available sources are ARM STARTI SEQuence 1 Changes the normally high output level to low as soon as an ARM event ARM SOURce is processed and before any programmed ARM DELay occurs The level remains low until the ARM cycle is completed by TRIGger STARt COUNt readings being taken This signal begins at the detection of the arm event and does not include any programmed delay ARM STARt DELay The expected use of this signal is to allow a master module to detect an arm event and then arm other modules by using this signal
203. amming the digitizer is shown in Sequence Figure 1 5 Note that CONFigure sets many digitizer parameter values that MEASure command usually do not have to be changed with lower level subsystem commands The lower level commands are used when you want to set a value different from the value set by CONFigure CONFigure command INPut subsystem commands SENSe subsystem commands ARM and TRIGger subsystem commands OUTPut subsystem commands VINStrument subsystem commands FORMat subsystem commands INITiate and FETCh or READ subsystems Figure 1 5 HP E1429A Programming Sequence 36 Getting Started Chapter 1 Configuring the Channels How to Make Measurements Using MEASure HP BASIC Digitizer channels 1 and 2 share the digitizer s arming and triggering circuitry and memory Thus the arming and triggering configuration and the number of readings set for one channel applies to the other channel as well When the digitizer is armed and triggered both channels sample and store their readings in memory simultaneously This section explains when to use MEA Sure or CONFigure to configure the digitizer It also shows you how to make measurements when the configuration has been modified with lower level commands MEA Sure is used in applications where the digitizer parameters set by the command are acceptable and the data is to be retrieved immediately after the readings are taken M
204. and have their trigger sources synchronized such that each digitizer s data is available to the Local bus before the next trigger event can occur on any digitizer in the data stream Otherwise data loss will occur and an error will be indicated by one or more of the digitizers Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode Boolean ON OFF 1 0 none Comments Executable when initiated No 290 Command Reference VINStrument Subsystem VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA e Coupled command Yes VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED and VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts are coupled to this command e If VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO is OFF the measurement does not complete normally After the data has been taken and transferred the Local bus is left in a running state Therefore it is necessary to send the ABORt command to each digitizer in the data stream in a left to right sequence after the data is transferred and before proceeding with the next setup or INITiate Additionally any other Local bus devices non digitizers will need to reset their Local bus chips in a left to right sequence See Local Bus Data Transfers in Chapter 3 for more information e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts ABORt e RST Condition ON Example Setup for multiple transfers of direct A D data VINS LBUS FEED CONV B
205. annel ID Register C 364 Memory Control base 0C16 Data Register C 364 Registers base 2116 Memory Control Register C 365 base 2316 Memory address register 0 C 366 base 2516 Memory address register 1 C 366 base 2716 Memory address register 2 C 366 base 2B16 Terminal Address Register C 367 base 2D16 Base Address 0 Register C 367 base 2F16 Base Address 1 Register C 367 Appendix C Register Programming 349 The Input Configuration Registers The input configuration registers are used to set the following digitizer input parameters e Input enable e Input impedance e Input filter e Measurement range The A D Status Register base 0316 The A D status register is a read only register that returns the status of the digitizer s input section The register bits are defined below Only the use of bit O is documented Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 0316 Ch 2 Diff Ch 1 Diff Ch2 S E Ch1 S E unused Ovid Error Bit State ovid ovid ovid ovid clr LED O no ovid 0 no ovid 0 no ovidi0 no ovid O OFF out data 1 ovid 1 ovid 1 ovid 1 ovid 1 ON The state 1 or 0 of bit O represents the state of the A D shift register s output bit bit 55 A read of the status register and the output bit does not cause a shift of the A D shift register The A D Serial Register base 0516 The A D serial register is a read write regist
206. ard IOOUTPUTS ADDR INIT 4 initiate the digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR OPC 5 allow readings to complete before retrieving them from the memory card IOENTER ADDR amp rdy enter OPC response from digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM TRAC DATA SET2 15 retrieve readings from memory card IOENTERAB ADDR_MEM rdgs amp bytes swap enter readings and remove block header remove line feed which trails the last data byte IOENTERS ADDR_MEM If_remove amp length Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 85 convert and display the readings readings are in the sequence channel 2 reading 1 channel 1 reading 1 channel 2 reading 2 channel 1 reading 2 and so on for i 0 i lt readings i rdgs i 16 if rdgs i gt 2047 rdgs i lt 2046 printf nReading overrange else printf nReading d 6E i rdgs i 0 0025 free rdgs JERERERAR RAR AERIS AAAS ARERR RARER KARERE RARE R RARE RRA NOR RARE RRA RAR RAN ARRAN RO void rst_clr long address Reset and clear the digitizer and memory card IOOUTPUTS address RST CLS 9 SEPAESERSESERRES ERASE ERRESLERES RARE LRRESLRA LEN ERESERAESS ERE ARRERASR ERS SESS void check_error char array long address char _ into 161 intlength 160 IOOUTPUTS address SYST ERR 9 Query error register IOENTERS address into a
207. arm readings The above equation may be built from the following queries ARM COUNt TRIGger COUNt e To determine how many readings are pre arm take the absolute value of the number returned by the SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts query e Related Commands READ FETCh e RST Condition FORMat DATA ASCii 9 Setting the data format to 64 bit reals FORM REAL Output data in 64 bit real format the 64 is defaulted Reading back PACKed data HP BASIC program DIM Ndig 1 Count 9 Dimension parameters for header ASSIGN EX TO 70905 FORMAT OFF Turn format off for array data OUTPUT 70905 FETC1 Query for channel 1 measurement data ENTER EX USING X K K Ndig Count 1 VAL Ndig Strip the header preceeding the data ALLOCATE INTEGER Meas_data 1 VAL Count 2 Allocate an array to hold the data ENTER X Meas_data Read in the measurement data ENTER 70905 USING B Junk Need to strip off left over line feed FORMat Subsystem Command Reference 229 INITiate The INITiate subsystem controls the initiation of the trigger subsystem and prepares the HP E1429 to take voltage measurements Once initiated triggers are armed on both channels and a trigger received from the programmed source TRIGger STARt SOURce command will cause voltage measurements to begin on both channels Normally all measurement setup setting measurement ranges arm and trigger sources etc should be done before this command is sent Sen
208. arm source specifies the signal s which arms the digitizer The source 1s specified with the command ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt lt source gt Up to two arm sources lt n gt 112 can be specified ARM SOUR1 specifies the first source ARM SOUR2 specifies the second source The first event to occur on either source arms the digitizer The digitizer arm source s can be selected from the following e BUS HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET commmand or the TRG common command e ECLTrg0 ECLTrg1 the VXIbus ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg 1 trigger lines e TTLTrg lt n gt the VXIbus TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 trigger lines e EXTernall the Ext 1 BNC input port e INTernall arms when the signal level on channel 1 meets the conditions specified by ARM LEVell e INTernal2 arms when the signal level on channel 2 meets the conditions specified by ARM LEVel2 114 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Note Setting the Arm Signal Slope e HOLD disables either ARM SOURcel or ARM SOURce2 This is the reset source for ARM SOURce2 e IMMediate arms the digitizer immediately after INITiate IMMediate is received This choice is only valid for ARM SOURCce1 If IMMediate is specified HOLD must be specified for ARM SOURce2 IMMediate is the reset value for ARM SOUrRcel An active reference oscillator is required for the digitizer to recognize and accept an arm signal from any source When the arm source is INTern
209. ase_addr 0x49 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit_pat retain register settings set arm source 1 slope to positive bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg OxF7 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x49 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM INIT 4 initiate the memory card IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM OPC 5 wait for INIT to parse before continuing IOENTER ADDR_MEM amp rdy enter OPC response from memory card IOOUTPUTS ADDR_G INIT 4 initiate the generator digitizer Continued on Next Page 96 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 IOOUTPUTS ADDR_ INIT 4 initiate the inserter digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR_G OPC 5 wait for generator digitizer to finish IOENTER ADDR_G amp rdy IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM TRAC DATA SET1 15 retrieve readings from memory card IOENTERAB ADDR_MEM rdgs amp bytes swap enter readings and remove block header remove line feed which trails the last data byte IOENTERS ADDR_MEM If_remove amp length convert and display readings the inserter digitizer readings occur first followed by the generator digitizer readings for i 0 i lt readings i rdgs i 16 if rdgs i gt 2047 rdgs i lt 2046 printf nReading overrange else printf nReading d 6E
210. ate command is sent INSert Local bus data is inserted onto the bus from this module The module will place its data out onto the Local bus with an end of block flag at the end and no end of frame flag The module will then pass through pipeline any data it receives from the left and will enter the paused state when an end of frame flag is received from the left This mode requires at least one module to the left VINStrument Subsystem Command Reference 287 VINStrument CONFigure LBUS RESet which is in GENerate mode The mode is not active until either an INITiate command or a VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate command is sent OFF The Local bus interface is disabled immediately upon receipt of this command Local bus data is neither used nor passed through PIPeline Local bus data is passed through and not altered This mode becomes effective immediately upon receipt of this command Select this mode when data should be transparently passed through the HP E1429B The module will remain in the PIPeline mode even after an end of frame flag is received therefore it is necessary to change modes to take the module out of PIPeline mode Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode discrete APPend GENerate none INSert OFF PiPeline Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command Yes e Related Commands ARM subsystem TRIGger subsystem VINStrument
211. ate into one of the 10 possible stored state areas Number indicates which of the stored state areas should be used This command stores the states of all commands affected by RST Exceptions include MEMory BATTery STATe the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECurity command state Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units number numeric 0 through 9 none e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related Commands LRN RCL RST e RST Condition unaffected e Power on Condition all saved states set to the same state as the RST state SRE lt mask gt specifies which bits of the Status Byte Register are enabled to generate a service request VXIbus regt signal Event and summary bits are always set and cleared in the Status Byte Register regardless of the enable mask Mask is the sum of the decimal weights of the bits to be enabled The query form returns the current enable mask Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mask numeric O through 255 none A 1 ina bit position enables service request generation when the corresponding Status Byte Register bit is set a 0 disables it e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No 307 Command Reference Chapter 4 STB e RST Condition unaffected e Power On Condition no bits are enabled Example Enable service request on Message Available bit
212. ation lt chan gt CONVerge Returns convergence data from the latest DIAGnostic CALibration lt chan gt GAIN SENSitivity DIAGnostic CALibration lt chan gt ZERO SENSitivity DIAGnostic CHANnel lt chan gt LABel lt abel gt CAL ZERO or CAL GAIN Returns the sensitivity constant used during the last CAL GAIN command Returns the sensitivity constant used during the last CAL ZERO command Sets the bit pattern label specified on the four least significant bits of the reading 310 Command Quick Reference Chapter 4 Table 4 1 HP E1429A B Command Quick Reference Cont d Subsystem Commands Description DIAGnostic DlAGnostic FETCh lt chan gt lt start_adar gt lt count gt Returns count number of readings cont d beginning at start_addr DIAGnostic MEMory lt chan gt FILL lt num_segments gt _ Fill num_segments in memory with count lt count gt readings DIAGnostic MEMory lt chan gt ADDResses Returns the addresses of the next memory locations to be written to in each segment DIAGnostic PEEK lt address gt lt bits gt Read the specified number of bits from the memory location specified DIAGnostic POKE lt address gt lt bits gt lt value gt Write the value to the address specified DIAGnostic SGET lt bit gt Returns the state 0 or 1 of the specified bit in the serial control register DIAGnostic SPUT lt
213. aximum reading counts shown above decrease by four These four memory locations in each segment hold the data necessary to recover all readings after a power failure Subsystem TRiGger Syntax STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate no query SOURCe lt source gt TlMer1 lt period gt TIMer2 lt period gt TRIGger Subsystem Command Reference 273 TRIGger STARt COUNt STARt COUNt TRIGger STARt COUNt lt number gt specifies the total number of readings which will be taken during each ARM STARt COUNt cycle of a measurement This command is identical to and coupled to SENSe SWEep POINts setting either will set both to the same count Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 2 none number numeric 1 7 through 16 777 215 none MINimum MAXimum 9 9E 37 INFinity MINimum selects 1 reading Memory post arm readings only MAXimum 524 288 ARM STARt COUNt Memory battery enabled MAXimum 524 288 ARM STARt COUNT 4 A D converter to VME VXI data transfer bus MAXimum 16 777 215 A D converter to Local bus MAXimum 16 777 215 Digitizer memory pre and post arm readings see below ARM STARt COUNt Number of Maximum Readings Memory TRIGger STARt COUNt Segments 1 1 524 288 2 2 262 144 3 4 4 131 072 5 8 8 65 536 9 16 16 32 768 17 32 32 16 384 33 64 64 8 192 65 128 128 4096
214. bit gt lt value gt Sets the state 0 or 1 of the specified bit in the serial control register DIAGnostic TEST Returns information on a failed self test FETCh FETCh lt chan gt Returns readings from the specified channel FETCh lt chan gt COUNt Returns the number of readings stored in memory from the channel specified FETCh lt chan gt RECover Returns readings from the specified channel following a power failure digitizer configuration change or reset FORMat FORMat DATA lt type gt lt ength gt Specifies the output format for the measurement data INITiate INITiate IMMediate Initiates the digitizer trigger system and places the digitizer in the wait for arm or wait for trigger state INPut INPut lt port gt FlLTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt Enables disables the 10 MHz input filter IINPut lt port gt lMPedance lt impedance gt Sets the single ended port input impedance INPut lt port gt STATe lt mode gt Connects disconnects the input ports from the signal path MEASure MEASure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt Configures the digitizer and takes lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt number of readings on the specified O lt input por t gt channel and input port MEMory MEMory BATTery CHARge Checks the charge on the battery supporting non volatile memory MEMory BATTery STATe lt state gt Enables disables the battery supporting non vola
215. ble CONDition Bit 0 has a corresponding decimal value of 1 bit 2 has a decimal value of 4 and bit 8 has a decimal value of 256 Reading the Condition register does not affect the bit settings The bits are cleared following a reset RST Bit 8 CALibration will remain set however if the error condition persists The Transition Filter The Transition Filter specifies which type of bit transition in the Condition register will set corresponding bits in the Event register Transition filter bits may be set for positive transitions 0 to 1 or negative transitions 1 to 0 The commands used to set the transitions are STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 167 NTRansition sets the negative transition For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Condition register sets the associated bit in the Event register PTRansition sets the positive transition For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Condition register sets the associated bit in the Event register lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Condition register bit to be unmasked The decimal values of bits 0 2 and 8 are 1 4 and 256 The Event Register The Event register latches transition events from the Condition register as specified by the Transition Filter Bits in the Event regis
216. ble for expected values and resolutions 214 Command Reference CONFigure lt chan gt Subsystem CONFigure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC e The CONFigure command configures the HP E1429 to do the measurement specified by the parameters given with CONFigure All instrument settings will be forced to their RST values with the following exceptions In particular note that all OUTPut signals are turned off and their FEED s are changed to reset values and that both the local bus VINStrument LB US and VME bus VINS VME are turned off Be aware that these new states will still be in effect after the CONFigure command is complete See Appendix B Table B 2 for a complete list of the reset settings for the HP E1429 The following states are set up after the reset and thus in most cases will not be the RST value for that command a SENSe lt n gt FUNCtion is set to VOLTage DC lt port gt b SENSe lt n gt VOLTage DC RANGe is set to the value implied by the expected value given c INPut lt port gt FILTer is set to ON d SENSe SWEep POINts and TRIGger STARt COUNt are set to the lt size gt parameter e Related commands SENSe FUNCtion SENSe VOLTage RANGe SENSe SWEep POINts SENSe ROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt subsystem ARM STARt subsystem e RST Condition none Example Measuring 1 5 V on the differential input of channel 1 CONF ARRay VOLT 20 1 5 3 Set up to take 20 readings of 1 5 Volts peak on p
217. ceived Post arm readings are taken after an arm is received When multiple reading sequences consist of pre and post arm readings digitizer memory is partioned into segments Figure 3 9 When the reading sequence consists of pre arm and post arm readings the number of segments is equal to the arm count The maximum number of segments arm count under these conditions is 128 Is the Arm Count gt 17 ARM STARt COUNt Are there Pre Arm readings SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt 0 Memory is Segmented Memory is Contiguous E1429A FIG3 9 Figure 3 9 When the Digitizer Segments Memory Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 131 Figure 3 10 shows the relationship between pre and post arm readings and memory segments Set up ARM SOUR IMM ARM COUN 3 3 arms SENS SWE OFFS POIN 3 3 Pre arm readings TRIG COUN 11 3 pre arm and 8 post arm readings ARM Pre arm Post arm gt Pre arm Post arm gt Pre arm readings readings readings readings readings Ww Ww x Segment 1 Readings le Segment 2 Readings gt la Segment 3 Readings Digitizer Memory Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 gt hates E1429A FIG3 10 Partition Window Digitizer updates memory pointer and sets up A D for the next burst of readings Any arms or triggers that occur during this period have no affect Figure 3 10 Memory Segments with P
218. choices for the reference source are VXI CLK10 the ECL Trigger lines and the Ext2 BNC Each event in this subsystem causes one A D conversion in both channels In Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPD this is the meaning of Trigger The SCPI term for the commencement of a series of one or more triggers is Arm Rate Internal Timer using built in reference oscillator 0 05 Sa s to 20 MSa s in 5 1 2 sequence External VXI Trigger Busses TTL and ECL External BNCs software or VME Read cycle Post Count 1 or 7 to PEL or continuous This specifies the desired number of sample triggers after the Arm event Additional limitations apply when the Pre Count feature is used see below Pre Count 0 or 3 to 65535 When this mode is used pre count0 the Digitizer samples continuously until the pre count is satisfied and then an Arm event occurs Memory is used as a circular buffer with older readings overwritten by newer readings The programmed pre count value specifies the number of pre arm samples to be protected from overwriting by post arm sample data This mode limits the number of Post Count read ings The total of pre count post count must be no larger than the memory partition size Appendix A Specifications 325 Timebase and Trigger additional supplemental characteristics Fixed error in sample time 4 9 1 Arm Subsystem Dual Rate The Pre Count readings can be measured at one sample
219. cillator frequency if external and source the input port used on a particular channel and the pre arm and post arm reading counts Each section of the subsystem is separately documented in the following sections of the Command Reference Subsystem The first level SENSe syntax tree is Syntax SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion lt function gt ROSSCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt SOURCe lt source gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt POINts lt count gt VOLTage DC RANGe lt range gt RESolution query only SENSe Subsystem Command Reference 251 SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion The SENSe FUNCtion commands select which of the input ports gets connected to a particular channel SENSel selects the input for the sensor on channel 1 ports 1 or 3 and SENSe2 selects the input for the sensor on channel 2 ports 2 or 4 Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt Syntax FUNCtion lt function gt SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion lt function gt determines which input port will be connected to the specified sensing channel Each sense channel has two input ports one port is single ended and the other is differential Odd numbered ports 1 and 3 connect to channel 1 and the even numbered ports 2 and 4 connect to channel 2 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 112 none function quoted VOLTage DC 1 none
220. command STARtISEQuence1 is the second level keyword COUNt DELay are third level keywords and so on A colon always separates one command keyword from a lower level command keyword as shown below ARM LEV NEG 2 The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability you may want to send the entire command The digitizer will accept either the abbreviated form or the entire command For example if a command s syntax contains the keyword COUNT then COUN and COUNT are acceptable forms Other forms of COUNt such as COU will generate an error You can use upper or lower case letters Therefore COUNT coun or Coun are all acceptable Chapter 4 Command Reference 179 Implied Optional Keywords Variable Command Syntax Implied or optional keywords are those which appear in square brackets The brackets are not part of the command syntax and must not be sent to the digitizer Consider the syntax ARM STARt COUNt Suppose you send the following command ARM COUN 100 In this case the digitizer responds as if you had executed the command as ARM STAR COUN 100 Some commands will have what appears to be a variable syntax For example OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt In this command lt n gt is re
221. ctal Q or binary B value of the Enable register bit to be unmasked Bits 0 6 8 and 9 have corresponding decimal values of 1 64 256 and 512 The Enable register is cleared at power on by specifying an lt unmask gt value of 0 or by executing the STATus PRESet command The Standard Event The Standard Event status group monitors command execution errors Status Group programming errors and the power on state The Standard Event The conditions monitored by the Standard Event Status register are Status Register identified below 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON unused CME EXE DDE QYE unused OPC Power on PON Bit 7 is set 1 when an off to on transition has occurred Command Error CME Bit 5 is set 1 when an incorrect command header is received or if an un implemented common command is received Execution Error EXE Bit 4 is set 1 when a command parameter is outside its legal range 170 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 The Standard Event Status Enable Register Device Dependent Error DDE Bit 3 is set 1 when an error other than a command error execution error or query error has occurred Query Error QYE Bit 2 is set 1 when the digitizer output queue is read and no data is present or when data in the output queue has been lost Operation Complete OPC Bit 0 is set 1 when the OPC command is received OPC is used to indicate when all pending
222. curs The error message lists the conflicting settings and then reports the values set by the digitizer processor The Comments section of each command entry indicates if a command is coupled and if it is what the coupling constraints are MIN and MAX When MINimum or MAXimum is a command parameter in a group of Parameters in Cou pled coupled commands that command should be the last command executed Commands Unlike other parameters that are set when an end of line indication is received MIN and MAX are evaluated by the digitizer processor when the command is parsed Thus the value of MIN or MAX is based on the values of the other coupled commands at that time For example if the following commands are sent ARM COUN 1 TRIG COUN MAX ARM COUN 128 A Settings conflict error will occur when ARM COUN 128 is executed because the trigger count value set by TRIG COUN MAX 524 288 is based upon the ARM COUN 1 setting For an arm count of 128 the maximum trigger count allowed is 4 096 Because of these types of interactions MIN and MAX are not recommended for specifying a parameter value Executable When In the Comments section of each command listing is the item Initiated Commands _ Executable when initiated Yes No This identifies the command as being executable when the digitizer is in the INITiated state as the result of one of the following commands INITiate IMMediate VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate VINStrume
223. cute OPC after INIT is parsed Execute each command in digitizer1 using a loop length sizeof digitizer1 sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop T digitizer1 loop strlen digitizer1 loop Execute each command in digitizer2 using a loop length sizeof digitizer2 sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop USE digitizer2 loop strlen digitizer2 loop Execute each command in memory length sizeof memory sizeof char Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 95 for loop 0 loop lt length loop IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM memory loop strlen memory loop check for digitizer configuration errors check_error digitizer1 ADDR_G check_error digitizer2 ADDR_1 check_error memory ADDR_MEM A ELE REE ELLE ELLER ELLER E LEE EL EEE LEE ELE EE LEE LEE LLL Ei void initiate long base_addr int i 0 readings 20 swap 0 bytes 0 length 1 rdgs int bit_reg 0 float rdy bit_pat 0 char If_remove 1 command 80 dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 20 sizeof float allocate computer memory for reading storage swap sizeof int each reading in memory is two bytes bytes 20 swap read 40 bytes create DIAG PEEK command which reads the generator digitizer s arm source register sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d b
224. d 15 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 615 4 3 2 1 0 unused READY BUSY ARM unused CAL The Transition Filter CALibrating Bit 0 is set 1 during calibration The bit is cleared 0 otherwise Waiting for ARM Bit 6 is set 1 when the digitizer enters the wait for arm state The bit is cleared 0 when a start arm is received or when the measurements are aborted BUSY Bit 8 is set 1 when the INITiate MMediate command is executed The bit is cleared 0 when the measurements are complete or aborted and the digitizer returns to the idle state READY Bit 9 is set 1 when a digitizer memory segment is ready for data storage The bit is cleared 0 while the digitizer is partitioning the next memory segment Reading the Condition Register Bit settings in the Condition register can be determined with the command STATus OPERation CONDition Bits 0 6 8 and 9 have corresponding decimal values of 1 64 256 and 512 Reading the Condition register does not affect the bit settings The bits are cleared following a reset RST The Transition Filter specifies which type of bit transition in the Condition register will set corresponding bits in the Event register Transition filter bits may be set for positive transitions 0 to 1 or negative transitions 1 to 0 The commands used to set the transitions are STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt
225. d INST GetlnstID void return Inst void SetMapping int mapSpace unsigned int pageStart unsigned int pageCount UBYTE suggestedAddr void Map void UBYTE bGet UWORD offset if Mapped Map return ibpeek UBYTE BaseAddr offset void bSet UWORD offset UBYTE value 0 if IMapped Map ibpoke UBYTE Base Addr offset value UWORD wGet UWORD offset if Mapped Map return iwpeek UWORD BaseAddr offset void wSet UWORD offset UWORD value 0 if Mapped Map iwpoke UWORD BaseAddr offset value void wMGet UWORD offset UWORD dest ULONG count if Mapped Map iwpopfifo Inst UWORD BaseAddr offset dest count 1 void wMSet UWORD offset UWORD src ULONG count if Mapped Map iwpushfifo Inst UWORD BaseAddr offset src count 1 void IMGet UWORD offset ULONG dest ULONG count if Mapped Map ilpopfifo Inst ULONG BaseAddr offset dest count 1 void IMSet UWORD offset ULONG src ULONG count if Mapped Map ilpushfifo Inst ULONG BaseAddr offset src count 1 E Continued on Next Page 78 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 INST CPP class MessInst public Reginst public MessInst WORD lAddr RegInst lAddr void Clear void iclear Inst void SendMessage const char message char ReceiveMessage char message int maxLen 80 char GetErrorMessage char message int maxLen 80
226. d No e The calibration security code must begin with a letter and can contain letters digits and underscores Lower case letters are converted to upper case e The calibration code is shared by both channels It does not matter which channel 1s specified 1f any the same code is shared by both and gives access to calibrate either e If calibration security has not been previously disabled by CALibration lt chan gt SECure STATe OFF the HP E1429 generates the error 311 Calibration security on To disable the calibration security requires knowledge of the previous security code e Before shipping the factory sets the calibration security code to E1429 You should change it before you use your HP E1429 to prevent unauthorized calibration Record the new security code and store in a secure place If you forget the new code defeating the security involves instrument disassembly e The HP E1429 stores the security code in its non volatile calibration memory which remains intact even with power off e Related commands CALibration lt chan gt SECure STATe e RST Condition unaffected Example Changing the factory shipped security password CAL SEC STAT OFF E1429 CAL SEC CODE NEWCODE CAL SEC ON Disable security for both channels Set new security code for both channels Re enable security on both channels CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 205 CALibration lt chan gt SECure STATe SECure STATe
227. d they are NOT floating 322 Specifications Appendix A Coupling DC Impedance 1 MQ in parallel with 25 pF nominal Ranges A D responds to the difference of the two input voltages on the and connectors 0 10225V to 0 10230V 0 2045V to 0 2046V 0 51125V to 0 5115V 1 0225V to 1 0230V 2 045V to 2 046V 5 1125V to 5 115V 10 225V to 10 230V 20 45V to 20 46V 51 125V to 51 15V 102 25V to 102 30V Overload On the fly flagging includes amplifier overload Ranges 0 1V to 5V input impedance remains nominally constant up to 10V After removal of 20 Vpk input recovery is typically to within 1 of peak to peak full scale in 250 usec Ranges 10V to 100V input impedance remains nominally constant upto 102 3V After removal of 100Vpk input recovery is typically to within 1 of peak to peak full scale in 30 usec Never exceed 102 3V input CMRR Ranges 0 1023V to 5 115V for lVeml lt 10 volts peak and slew rate lt 150 v us DC gt 68 dB AC gt 60 dB 1 MHz Ranges 10 23V to 102 3V for Vcml lt 102 3 volts peak and slew rate lt 1500 v us DC gt 45 dB AC gt 40 dB CMRR is measured by applying a signal from a 50Q through a Tee connector to both inputs Appendix A Specifications 323 DC Accuracy 0 5 of reading 1 of peak to peak full scale Accuracy is specified for the average of 100 readings with inputs terminated in lt 1 KQ and CAL ZERO performed within 24 hours prior to r
228. d DIAG PEEK command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD rd_addr strlen rd_addr Read value from offset register IOENTER CMD_MOD amp a24offst Multiply offset value by 256 for 24 bit address value a24offst 256 return long a24offst ERPRPARISIA AERIS RERIARRRAARRERARRRAARRR AAR RR AAR RR AAR RR AARARAARARAAR ARRAN AB AS void rst_clr void A void check_error char func_tion Comments 1 VME Data Transfer Modes There are two modes of VME data transfers real time and post measurement In a real time data transfer shown in this program accessing the digitizer s data register triggers a measurement and returns the A D reading directly to the VME bus in the same measurement cycle The reading s is also stored in digitizer memory In a post measurement transfer each data register access transfers a A D reading from digitizer memory to the VME bus 2 Locating the Data Register Access to the data register is through its address which is mapped by the HP E1406 Command Module into A24 address space The data register has an offset of 12 0C16 which is added to the A24 base address to form the complete register address In the program the C function long get_base_addr void determines the A24 base address by reading the digitizer s offset register in A16 address space Detailed information on locating the data register can be found in Chapter 3 under the section VME Bus Data Transfers 3 VME Bus Data For
229. d Reference CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem CALibration lt chan gt STORe STORe CALibration lt chan gt STORe stores the current calibration constants into non volatile calibration memory Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1or2 none Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No e CALibration SECure STATe must be OFF before executing this command e Related commands CALibration lt chan gt DATA CALibration SECure STATe CALibration COUNt CALibration STORe AUTO e RST Condition none Example Sending and storing an array of new cal constants ASSIGN X TO 70905 FORMAT OFF Turn format off for array data OUTPUT 70905 USING K CAL DATA 3124 Specify 124 bytes coming 62 constants OUTPUT EX Array CHR 10 END Send the array of calibration constants OUTPUT 70905 CAL SEC OFF E1429 Disable security OUTPUT 70905 CAL STOR Store the calibration data in non volatile RAM CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 207 STORe AUTO Parameters Comments Example VALue CALibration lt chan gt STORe AUTO CALibration lt chan gt STORe AUTO lt mode gt selects whether or not the calibration constants will be automatically stored when commands like CALibration GAIN and CALibration ZERO complete Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan n
230. d value from offset register IOENTER CMD_MOD amp a24offst Continued on Next Page 402 Register Programming Appendix C Multiply offset value by 256 for 24 bit address value a24offst 256 return long a24offst EESSEESSESESSSSEASS SESE SESS BESESERERE SELES SESRE SESE SELES SE SSE ESSER SES SESS void rst_clr void Reset and clear the digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR RST CLS 9 PPS TO CSP PEC COTO PPE COO COC OE CO OCC OC PCIE PCCP POPPE POET COC T T PEC oer Oey void check_error char func_tion char into 161 int length 160 IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 Query error register IOENTERS ADDR into amp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit while atoi into 0 printf Error s in function s n n into func_tion IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS ADDR into amp length Appendix C Register Programming 403 Notes 404 Register Programming Appendix C Appendix D Local Bus Interleaved Transfers Appendix Contents Interleaved Transfers Note Maximum Data Transfer Rate This appendix contains information on interleaved data transfers using the HP E1429B and the Local bus In an interleaved transfer multiple digitizers transfer one reading or one set of readings both channels per block The leftmost digitizer is set to the
231. dance selected 1 Ch1 75Q input impedance select 11 TERM75 2 0 Ch2 50Q input imedance selected 1 Ch2 75Q input impedance select Procedure Enabling the 10 MHz Filter With the bit position known set the input impedance as required using the procedure for reading and writing to the shift register At power on or following a reset the 10 MHz filter is switched out of the signal path disabled of the single ended and differential inputs The filter can be switched into the path enabled using the following bits of the A D shift register Bit Position Name Setting FILTER1 0 Ch1 10 MHz filter disabled 1 Ch1 10 MHz filter enabled 14 FILTER 2 0 Ch2 10 MHz filter disabled 1 Ch2 10 MHz filter enabled Procedure Setting the Measurement Range Note With the bit position known disable enable the filter as required using the procedure for reading and writing to the shift register The digitizer measurement range is set using a series of attenuators Figure 3 3 Table C 1 shows the attenuator settings used to select the corresponding measurement range There is a 3 ms relay settling time following each range change Samples cannot be taken during the settling time 370 Register Programming Appendix C Table C 4 HP E1429 Digitizer Attenuator Settings Measurement 20 dB 20dB _sInternal Atten
232. delete all readings on memory card TRAC DEF SET2 40 store readings 40 bytes in SET2 VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE CONS set Local bus mode to consume STAT OPC INIT OFF execute OPC after INIT is parsed Execute each command in digitizer length sizeof digitizer sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop Urbe digitizer loop strlen digitizer loop Execute each command in memory Continued on Next Page 84 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 length sizeof memory sizeof char for loop 0 loop lt length loop IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM memory loop strlen memory loop check for configuration errors check_error digitizer ADDR check_error memory ADDR_MEM BSR SR IIR III III III IIIA III IIIA 7 void initiate void int i 0 readings 20 swap 0 bytes 0 length 1 rdgs float rdy char If_remove 1 dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 20 sizeof float allocate computer memory for reading storage swap sizeof int each reading in memory is two bytes bytes 20 swap read 40 bytes 2 channels 10 readings per channel IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM INIT 4 initiate the memory card IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM OPC 5 wait for INIT to parse before continuing IOENTER ADDR_MEM amp rdy enter OPC response from memory c
233. derstanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 149 float a24offst A24 offset from A16 offset register char rd_addr 80 command string variable Create the command string which reads the A24 base address from the offset register sprintf rd_addr DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 16 Send DIAG PEEK command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD rd_adar strlen rd_addr Read value from offset register IOENTER CMD_MOD amp a24offst Multiply offset value by 256 for 24 bit address value a24offst 256 return long a24offst Multiplying the value of the offset register a24offst by 256 10016 converts the 16 bit register value to a 24 bit address The Data Register The offset of the digitizer s data register is 12 0C 16 The offset is added to Offset the A24 base address to form the complete register address 0022000016 0C16 0022000C16 2 228 224 12 2 228 236 The offset of the data register can also be read with the SCPI command VINStrument CONFigure VME SEND ADDRess DATA This command returns two values A24 12 A24 indicates that the data register is in A24 address space and 12 is the offset of the data register 150 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 The VINStrument Subsystem VME Bus Transfer Programming Sequence Setting the VME Bus Transfer Mode Note The commands within the VINStrument subsystem used for VME data transfers are shown below VINStrument CONFigu
234. ding this command will cause the HP E1429 to begin the measurement process using the currently active sources and settings Subsystem NiTiate Syntax IMMediate no query IMMediate INITiate IMMediate initiates the trigger system and places all trigger sequences in the wait for arm or wait for trigger state as appropriate When the number of readings specified by ARM COUNt and TRIGger COUNt have been taken the trigger system returns to the idle state and measurements are no longer taken This command is an overlapped command as described in IEEE 488 2 Section 12 The exit from idle state caused by INITiate MMediate shall cause the Pending Operation Flag to be set true OPC will return 0 The Pending Operation Flag will be set false when the idle state is re entered either when the trigger cycle completes or when an ABORt or RST command is executed The STATus OPC INITiate command controls whether OPC OPC and WAI will test the Pending Operation Flag and wait until it is false trigger system in the idle state 230 Command Reference INITiate Subsystem INITiate IMMediate Readings may not be obtained from memory until the trigger system has returned to the idle state The FETCh and READ commands may be invoked before the trigger system is in the idle state These commands will wait until the trigger system is idle before returning readings The trigger idle state may be determined externally from the high to
235. dings are to be taken when the digitizer is re initiated the memory address registers point to the location where the 100th reading is to be stored Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 2316 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Purpose Wrapped Memory Address Local Reserved current address Size Valid Interrupt Setting O no 0 128K 0 no A18 A16 1 yes 1 512K 1 yes Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 2516 Memory address register 1 current address A15 A08 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 2716 Memory address register 2 current address A07 A00 Bit Descriptions Wrapped Bit 7 indicates if the data memory address counter has wrapped around Memory Size Bit 6 indicates the number of 2 channel readings digitizer memory can hold For all digitizers this is 512K 366 Register Programming Appendix C The Terminal Address Register base 2B16 The terminal address register is a read write register that sets the last address of a memory segment It is used with the base address registers to define the memory segment Address base 2B16 Terminal address Base address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Terminal Address The terminal address field specifies the last address in a memory segment before returning to the base address Base Address The Base Address bit 0 is the most significant
236. dle state when configuring the input section Usi ng the A D Shift Each input parameter listed above is set by the digitizer s A D shift register Reg ister This register is accessed through the A D status register base 0316 the A D serial register base 0516 and by the A D parallel strobe register base 0B16 as shown in Figure C 2 The procedure for setting the configuration using the register is described in the following section bits 7 1 Pests oe Shift Register Latch A D Shift Register bits 7 3 bits 1 0 Latch E1429A FIGc 2 Figure C 2 Accessing the A D Shift Register 368 Register Programming Appendix C Reading and Writing to 1 Define a programming loop which counts from 55 to 0 and which the Shift Register contains the following A Read and save the current shift register bit at the output bit 55 position using the A D status register base 0316 B If the loop count does not equal the bit position to be changed write back the bit using the A D serial register base 0516 This restores the bit and shifts it to the bit 0 position which shifts a new shift register bit to the output bit 55 position C If the loop count does equal the bit position to be changed write the new bit setting using the A D serial register base 0516 This sets the bit and shifts it to the bit O position which shifts a new shift register bit to the output bit 55 positi
237. ds CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 1 1 set 20 readings 1V range S E input port 1 SENS1 SWE OFFS POIN 10 set 10 pre arm readings INIT place digitizer in wait for arm state Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 41 length sizeof set_commands sizeof char Execute each command using a loop for loop 0 loop lt length loop IOOUTPUTS ADDR set_commands loop strlen set_commands loop function call to check for digitizer configuration errors check_error ad_conf JERERRERERRE RECAER OCRE RECREAR CRE LER S AERIS SL ELISA ELAS LERAE LEAS SOLAS LER SLSR ES void ad_fetch void char go int i 0 readings 20 float rdgs dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 20 sizeof float fetch retrieve and print readings IOOUTPUTS ADDR FETC1 6 IOENTERA ADDR rdgs amp readings for i 0 i lt readings i printf nReading d f i rdgs free rdgs readings BEBSISESSSS SESSLER SSE SRS SS SRSES EASES EASES void rst_clr void Reset and clear the digitizer Continued on Next Page 42 Getting Started Chapter 1 IOOUTPUTS ADDR RST CLS 9 JEREFRERE ERE RE RSE PERE RE RAR AER RE ARE RE RE RARA RR ARA RR AR ARS ER AEREA READ void check_error char func_tion char into 161 intlength 160 IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR
238. ds 184 Local bus how data is transferred 157 Local bus commands 159 Local bus data format 163 Local bus data transfer rate 405 Local bus data transfers 156 example programs 83 handshake protocol 157 Local bus description 156 Local bus device modes 157 Local bus installation 18 HP E1429A B User s Manual Index 417 Local bus interleaved transfers programming procedure 407 Local bus programming sequence multiple digitizers and interleaved transfers 405 multiple digitizers and serial transfers 160 single digitizer 160 Local bus transfer configurations 159 Local bus transfers digitizer configuration restrictions 161 Local bus transfers setting the mode 162 Local bus setting the interleaved transfer mode 406 Locating readings in memory 142 Locating segmented readings 143 Locating the data register 146 Locating unsegmented readings 142 Logical address purpose 16 Mainframe installation 18 Managing memory 142 MEASure Using 37 when to use 37 MEASure command using 34 MEASure and CONFigure equivalent commands 34 Measurement range register based 370 Measurements how to make 37 Memory configuration 130 Memory management 142 MEMory subsystem 132 Memory non volatile 132 Message interface 105 Methods of retrieving readings 137 MIN and MAX parameters in coupling groups 183 Modes Local bus 157 Multimeter Configurations Recalling 175 Multiple digitizers and interleaved transfers 40
239. e channel s other port Related commands SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage lt port gt RST Condition INPut lt port gt FILTer LPASs STATe OFF Enabling the 10 MHz low pass filter INP1 FILT LPAS ON Enable input filtering on input port 1 INPut lt port gt IMPedance lt impedance gt selects the input impedance for the HP E1429 Either 50 or 75Q may be selected on input ports 1 and 2 while 1 MQ is the only setting allowed for input ports 3 and 4 Values other than 50 or 75Q on input ports 1 and 2 will generate error 222 Data out of range Similarly attempts to set input ports 3 or 4 to an impedance value other than 1 MQ will generate error 222 Data out of range INPut lt port gt Subsystem Command Reference 233 Parameters Comments Example STATe Parameters INPut lt port STATe Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units port numeric 112 3 4 none impedance numeric 50 75 1 0E6 1MOHM Ohms MINimum MAXimum Input ports 1 and 2 MINimum selects 50Q MAXimum selects 75Q Input ports 3 and 4 MINimum selects 1 MQ MAXimum selects 1 MQ Executable when initiated Yes Coupled Command No Changing the input impedance while the digitizer is taking readings initiated may cause unexpected reading values due to relay settling during the transition Related commands SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage lt port gt RST Condition INPut1 2 IMPedance 50 OHM IN
240. e command string OUTPUT 70905 OUTP EXT1 STAT ON OUTPUT 70905 TRIG SOUR EXT1 OUTPUT 70905 OUTP EXT1 STAT OFF Since the last command is the end of the command string the EOL terminator is not suppressed Note In the C language programs contained in this manual there is no end of line terminator to suppress as the commands are executed as elements of an array C Language The C language versions of the example programs disk P N E1429 10301 Prog rams were written for the HP 82335 HP IB Interface Card using the HP IB Command Library for C Unless otherwise noted the library functions used in the programs are compatible with the ANSI C standard The following section identifies the system on which the programs were written shows how to compile and link the programs and describes the structure of an example program System Configuration The C programs were developed on the following system Controller HP Vectra 386 25 personal computer 386 processor operated at 25 MHz HP IB Interface Card HP 82335 HP IB Interface with Command Library Mainframe HP 75000 Series C Slot0 Resource Manager HP E1406 Command Module HP E1429A B Logical Address 40 Instrument Language SCPI 30 Getting Started Chapter 1 C Compilers Used The C Language programs were compiled and tested using the following compilers e Microsoft QuickC Version 2 0 e Borland Turbo C Version 1 0 Compiling and Linking To run a C prog
241. e the next higher range is automatically chosen The table under the Settings heading gives the crossover points for range changes 236 Command Reference MEASure lt chan gt Subsystem MEASure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 12 none size numeric 1 7to 524288 none expected numeric 102 30 to 102 35 volts value DEFault MINimum MAXimum resolution numeric 00005 to 05 volts DEFault MINimum MAXimum input port numeric 113 with MEASure1 none 2 4 with MEASure2 1 and 2 are single ended 3 and 4 are differential The maximum size parameter will be 524284 if the battery is enabled instead of 524288 For expected value MINimum selects the 0 100 V range and MAXimum selects either the 1 0 volt range single ended ports or the 100 V range differential ports DEFault selects 1V For resolution MINimum MAXimum and DEFault select the same value Settings Maximum expected value settings per range are shown in the following table along with the resolution associated with each range The highlighted area shows the setting used when the expected value is not specified or DEFault is used MEASure lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 237 MEASure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC Comments Maximum Voltage Resolution Expected Range Volts
242. e Word Serial protocol The Packed format is also the format returned by direct VME register read operations and transmitted onto the Local Bus Gain and Offset 4 3 1 note 1057 1 nominal gain 2000 codes per volt nominal offset zero Filtering 2 pole Bessel 10 MHz nominal or none For no filter the analog bandwidth depends on the input port used see below Effective Bits 4 5 2 4 1 3 sampling at 20 MSa s Input signal 500 kHz 10 0 10 3 typical 10 MHz 9 5 9 8 typical Harmonic Distortion 4 4 2 1 Sample rate 20 MSa s 64 dB THD at 500 kHz input 61 dB THD at 10 MHz input THD includes 2nd through 6th harmonics Signal to Noise Ratio 4 5 1 62 dB 500 kHz 59 dB 10 MHz Noise includes noise distortion and all other undesired effects as defined in IEEE 1057 320 Specifications Appendix A A D Converter Supplemental Characteristics Single ended inputs Differential Nonlinearity 4 4 1 2 3680 Hz sine wave codes 2045 to 2046 1 LSB no missing codes Integral Nonlinearity 4 4 3 Note 1057 1 2 LSB Maximum Static Error 4 4 4 1 Note 1057 1 2 Word Error Rate 4 15 qualified error level word error rate gt 16 LSB lt 2 5E 7 gt 32 LSB lt 6E 8 gt 64 LSB lt 5E 9 Connector BNC Coupling DC Impedance 509 or 75Q 0 5 nominal selection is programmable Disconnect via internal relay impedance gt high Ranges 0 10225V to 0 10230V 0 2045V to
243. e address of the first reading to retrieve is calculated as starting address address counter value TRIGger COUNt buffer size 262112 35 36 starting address 262113 Therefore the DIAGnostic FETCh command would be executed as DIAG FETC1 262113 35 Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 145 VME Bus Data Transfers Locating the Data Register Another method of transferring readings to the VME VXI data transfer bus is with the digitizer s VINStrument Virtual INStrument subsystem and accessing the digitizer s data register This method which combines message based SCPI programming and reading the data register directly is faster than the previous methods READ FETCh DIAGNostic UPLoad ADDRess in that readings can be retrieved from the A D converter or from memory in the A D s packed data format There are two modes of VME data transfers real time and post measurement In a real time data transfer reading the digitizer s data register triggers a measurement and returns the A D reading to the VME bus in the same measurement cycle In a post measurement data transfer reading the register transfers a A D reading from digitizer memory to the VME bus How to select the transfer mode is covered in the section Setting the VME bus Transfer Mode Examples of VME bus data transfers are listed in Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer Access to the digitizer s data register is through its address
244. e data register triggers both A D converters at the same time and one 16 bit reading channel 1 is returned Accessing the data register a second time returns the second 16 bit reading channel 2 but does not trigger the A Ds CONVerter BOTH32 Accessing the data register triggers both A D converters at the same time and one 32 bit number is returned The high order 16 bits are the channel 2 reading and the low order 16 bits are the channel 1 reading VINStrument Subsystem Command Reference 293 VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source string CONVerter BOTH none CONVerter BOTH32 CONVerter CHANnel1 CONVerter CHANnel2 MEMory BOTH MEMory BOTH32 MEMory CHANnel1 MEMory CHANnel2 Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command Yes This command is coupled to the TRIGger subsystem e If the data in memory is in multiple segments then there will be a small delay 630 us between segments while the CPU switches the memory address to point to the next segment It is possible to determine when data is available again by monitoring bit 1 of the A24 arm status register base 4316 This bit goes high when the data is again ready for transfer See VME Bus Data Transfers in Chapter 3 for additional information e Related Commands TRIGger STARt COUNt VINStrument CONFigure VME M
245. e found in Chapter 1 Getting Started Using the Packed Data Format PACKED C This program demonstrates e how to specify the digitizer s packed data format e how to remove the ANSI IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block header which preceeds the data e how to assign a label to identify a set of readings e how to convert the readings to voltages The program takes 20 post arm samples which are returned in the digitizer s packed data format For completeness the entire C language version of the program is listed The program is also contained on the example programs disk HP E1429 10302 PACKED C This program takes 20 post arm samples and returns the readings in the digitizer s packed data format A label identifying the readings is assigned to the four least significant bits The arbitrary block header preceding the readings is removed and the packed data is coverted to the measured voltages The program features the FORMat and READ commands Include the following header files include include include include include lt stdio h gt lt stdlib h gt lt string h gt lt malloc h gt lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L 1 0 path from PC to the digitizer via the HP E1406 Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 59 Function Prototypes void rst_clr vo
246. e if error is present If errors present print and exit while atoi into 0 printf Error s in s n n into array length 160 IOOUTPUTS address SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS address into amp length 98 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Comments 1 GENerator Digitizer Configuration Channel 1 of the GENerator digitizer is CONFigured for 10 readings on the 5V range The arm source is set to TTLTO This VXI backplane trigger line is controlled by the INSerter digitizer which feeds its READy signal to arm the GENerator digitizer after its readings are complete An arm delay of 50 us is specified to allow for the INSerter digitizer to switch to the pipeline mode after its readings are complete see the Insert mode description under Local Bus Modes in Chapter 3 The INSerter digitizer s READy signal goes high when the readings are complete and the digitizer enters the idle state In order for the GENerator digitizer to arm on the low to high transition the GENerator digitizer must be set to accept a positive slope This is done by writing to the digitizer s Arm Source register and setting the slope bit from negative 1 to positive 0 The digitizer s Local bus configuration begins by resetting the Local bus chip The Local bus mode is set to GENerate and the feed data source is set to CONVerter CHANnel1 2 INSerter Digitizer Configuration Like the GENerator digitizer the INSerter digitizer is CONF
247. e input voltage level which will arm a measurement cycle The ARM LEVel POSitive setting 1s used only when either of the ARM STARt SOURce s is set to INTernall or INTernal2 and the corresponding ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt setting is POSitive or ElTHer The value programmed is retained but not used when other sources are selected or when the corresponding ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt setting is NEGative The allowable levels depend on the measurement range as set by the SENSe VOLTage RANGe command Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 2 none level numeric 102 2418 to 102 2418 Volts MINimum MAXimum Comments Executable while initiated No e Coupled Command Yes The command is coupled to the ARM STARt SLOPe ARM STARt SOURce and SENSe VOLTage RANGe commands The level value is limited to the range limits ARM Subsystem Command Reference 193 ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt e When POSitive and NEGative voltage levels are specified the levels must be separated by an amount defined by 50 mV 1 0235V measurement range This accounts for offset errors in the levels specified and enables arms at those levels to be accepted e Related Commands ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt e RST Condition ARM STARt LEVel lt n gt POS 1 022418 Example Setup to arm when the signal on channel 1 goes outside of a the window bounded by 0 5V
248. e missed 1020 Indefinite block not allowed When executing the VINStrument TEST DATA command the data must be in the IEEE 488 2 definite length block format 1021 LBUS still running ABOR or The HP E1429B digitizer is in the interleaved transfer VINS LBUS RES needed mode and the LBUS chip is still active The chip must be reset before the next INITiate command 1022 Local bus test data size not When executing the VINStrument TEST DATA multiple of 4 bytes command the amount of data sent must be a multiple of 4 bytes 1213 Illegal when initiated The command can not be executed while the digitizer is INITiated 2003 Memory address incorrect Address specified by DIAGnostic POKE or DIAGnostic PEEK is not valid 2004 Invalid address for 32 bit access Attemping a 32 bit read from an odd numbered address 2007 Bus error Error during DIAGnostic PEEK or DIAGnostic POKE 340 Useful Tables Appendix B Appendix C Register Programming Appendix Contents System Configuration The HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer is a message based device As such it supports the VXI word serial protocol used to transfer ASCII command strings and is capable of converting the SCPI commands it receives to reads and writes of its hardware registers Register based programming allows direct access to the hardware registers This increases the speed at which events in the digitizer occur since the parsing converting to register reads and w
249. e of the number is 2 147 483 647 after which it wraps around to 0 e Related commands CALibration SECure STATe CALibration GAIN CALibration ZERO CALibration STORe AUTO CALibration STORe e RST Condition unaffected Example Querying the calibration count CAL COUN Query calibration count the count is shared by both channels DATA CALibration lt chan gt DATA lt block data gt manually sets or queries the calibration constants The query form of this command returns the calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 definite length arbitrary block format The command non query form is used to send calibration constants to the digitizer in indefinite or definite length arbitrary block format The new calibration constants take effect immediately but are not saved to non volatile calibration memory unless the CALibration STORe command is executed Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1or2 none block data IEEE 488 2 2046 to 2047 none block data CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 199 CALibration lt chan gt DATA Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No e Sending calibration constants with this command will cause the HP E1429 to calibrate to these constants A check is done on the values before usage and an error 222 Data out of range results if they are not within a valid range e Itis possible
250. e specified sample rate bit 2 of the Questionable Signal Status Group condition register is set The sample period required can be determined two ways First to take a given number of samples of a signal with frequency f the sample period is computed as lt period gt signal period number of samples The reference is then divided by a value N which gives the sample period For example assuming the digitizer s 20 MHz oscillator is used and given the following input signal frequency 1 kHz number of samples 100 then the lt period gt specified by TRIG STAR TIM1 is 1 ms 100 10 us 122 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 To get the 10 us sample period 100 kHz rate the digitizer processor divides the reference by 200 N 20 MHz N 20 MHz 200 100 kHz 1 100 kHz 10 us Oversampling The Nyquist criteria states that the sample rate must be at least 2 times the maximum frequency component of the input signal To limit aliasing it is recommended that a sample rate 4 times or greater the maximum frequency component be used For example to oversample at a frequency four times or 10 times the maximum frequency component the sample period is computed as lt period gt 1 4 fc lt period gt 1 10 fc The minimum number of samples i e lt size gt or TRIGger STARt COUNt to take is determined by sample count signal period fundamental 1 4 fc or 1 10 fc Dua
251. eading in a stable ambient For temperatures outside18 28 degrees C add the following temperature coefficients for eachdegree below 18 C or above 28 C Range of peak to peak full scale per degree 0 1024 0 055 0 2048 0 035 others 0 025 Differential Inputs supplemental characteristics Analog Bandwidth 4 6 1 filter off 15 MHz on 0 1023V through 1 023V ranges plus 10 23V range 10 MHz on 2 046V and 20 46V ranges 4 MHz on 5 115V and 51 15V ranges 2 MHz on 102 3V range Effective bits relative to 1V single ended range For 1 volt single ended performance see the previous A D section Typical effective bits relative to 1V single ended Range 500 kHz 10 MHz 0 1 1 4 0 9 0 2 0 7 0 3 0 5 0 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 3 324 Specifications Appendix A Frequency and Sample Rate Characteristics Internal Timer Trigger Sample Clock Subsystem Crosstalk 4 11 On 1V range relative to full scale input DC 1 MHz 75 dB 1 10 MHz 70 dB Both channels always sample simultaneously at the indicated rates and times Tolerances All internally generated frequencies and rates are 0 0075 initial tolerance The Internal Timer generates time intervals useful in controlling the sample rate It divides a reference frequency by 1x10 2x10 or 4x10 n 0 to 8 When the reference frequency is the internal 20 MHz oscillator the resulting rates are from 0 05 Sa s to 20 MSa s in a 1 2 5 sequence Other programmable
252. eadlock Readings cannot be retrieved using FETCh or READ because TRIGer STARt COUNt INFinite is set Also occurs with READ and TRIGger STARt SOURce HOLD or TRIGger STARt SOURce BUS set 215 Arm deadlock Readings cannot be retrieved using FETCh or READ because ARM STARt COUNt INFinite is set Also occurs with READ and ARM STARt SOURce HOLD ARM STARt SOURce BUS or ARM STARt SOURce OFF set 221 Settings conflict Refer to the statement appended to the Settings conflict message for a description of the conflict and how it was resolved 222 Data out of range Parameter value is out of range for any digitizer configuration 224 Illegal parameter value An exact value from a list of possible choices was expected Appendix B Useful Tables 337 Table B 3 HP E1429A B Error Messages Cont d Code Message Description 230 Data corrupt or stale Attempting to FETCh data from the digitizer following a reset or other digitizer configuration change 231 Data questionable Reading accuracy is questionable An example is when the expected value and resolution parameters of the CONFigure or MEASure command are specified If the resolution is too fine for the expected value this error occurs 240 Hardware error The command could not be executed because of a hardware failure 270 Macro error RMC name gt was exec
253. eate a window bounded by two levels ARM LEVel POSitive and ARM LEVel NEGative such that arming occurs when the signal level either exits or enters the defined window e The additional delay between the arm event and entry into the wait for trigger state ARM DELay ARM STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt count gt DELay lt period gt IMMediate no query LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt POSitive lt voltage gt SLOPe lt n gt lt edge gt SOURCe lt n gt lt source gt ARM STARt COUNt lt count gt specifies how many measurement cycles will occur after an INITiate before the trigger system returns to the idle state Each post arm measurement cycle begins when the event specified by the active arm source s occurs Multiple readings may be taken during each cycle as defined by the TRIGger STARt COUNt or SENSe S WEep POINts commands ARM STARt COUNt values greater than 1 in conjunction with pre arm readings is a special case which causes memory to be partitioned Partitioning is done because a large number of pre arm readings may be taken before the arming event while a smaller number of pre arm readings will actually be kept for read back Therefore for each ARM STARt COUNt specified a separate circular buffer partition is set up to hold the specified number of desired total readings TRIGger STARt COUNt With this scheme pre arm data may overwrite itself until the arming event occurs at which time the
254. ecified by TRIGger STARt COUNt lt count gt is reached Once the trigger count is reached the digitizer determines if the arm count has been reached If it has not the digitzer remains initiated and repeats the path until the arm count is reached The Post Arm Path When only post arm samples are specified the digitizer moves to the wait for arm state when INITiate MMediate is executed The digitizer moves to the wait for trigger state when an arm signal is received The digitizer remains in the wait for trigger state until the number of samples specified by TRIGger STARt COUNt lt count gt is reached Once the trigger count is reached the digitizer determines if the arm count has been reached If it has not the digitizer remains initiated and repeats the path until the arm count is reached 112 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Arming the Dig itizer Before the digitizer takes a sample it must be armed which means it must be in the wait for trigger state Figure 3 5 shows the digitizer arming and triggering sources INITiate IMMediate Return to idle when ARM count reached INITIATE ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt lt source gt Bus ECLIrg lt n gt o p p et OUTPut TTLTrg FEED READy OUTPut TTLTrg FEED ARM OUTPut EXTernal FEED ARM ARM Delay pute ARM STARt IMMediate nter ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt lt slope gt TRIGger STARt IM
255. econd way is to calculate how many readings should have been taken This number is calculated as number of start triggers pre arm readings post arm readings The above equation may be built from the following queries ARM STARt COUNt TRIG STARt COUNt The number of pre arm readings may be determined by taking the absolute value of the query SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts which returns either 0 no pre arm readings or a negative number which is the pre arm count If the measurement was ABORted then FETCh COUNt is the only reliable way to determine how many readings will be returned by the FETCh lt chan gt e As noted immediately above it is possible to calculate the end of pre arm data and the beginning of post arm data when both are present in a measurement The data will always be returned with the specified number of pre arm readings followed by post arm readings e If the measurement was aborted and pre arm readings were specified there is no way to determine how many readings if any are post arm The HP E1429 will attempt to bring back TRIGger STARt COUNt number of readings and if there are not that many it will bring back as many readings as were taken e Related Commands ABORt FORMat DATA INITiate MMediate READ ARM STARt COUNt TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts STATus subsystem e RST Condition none Example 1 Obtaining readings from the HP E1429 CONF1 ARR VOLT 30 6 1 Configure fo
256. ected when bits 4 2 are set to 011 The sources set by bits 1 O are 0 0 VME VXI data transfer bus Trigger when data register base 1216 is read 0 1 HP IB Group Execute Trigger or IEEE 488 2 TRG command 1 0 TTLTrg trigger line 1 1 user during local bus data transfer does not take data 358 Register Programming Appendix C The Reference Oscillator Register base 4F16 The reference oscillator register sets the reference source from which the sample rate is derived The register is also used to output synchronization signals Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 4F16 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Purpose Arm source ECLTrg1 source ECLTrg0 source Reference oscillator source 1 enable Setting 0 enabled 00 11 00 11 000 100 1 disabled Bit Descriptions Reference Oscillator Register Power on Reset Settings At power on or following a reset the reference oscillator register is set to 0111 1000 or 7816 Arm source 1 enable Setting bit 7 to 0 enables the arm source trigger source arm source register base 4916 to arm the digitizer Setting bit 7 to 1 disables arm source 1 ECLTrgl source Bits 6 5 set the signal source that is output on the ECLTrg1 trigger line The sources include 0 0 a 25 ns wide negative going pulse each time a convert pulse is sent tothe A D converter 0 1 reference oscillator as selected by bits 2 0 The falling
257. ed can be transferred immediately once all of the readings are available 154 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Multiple VME Bus Data Transfers During real time data transfers readings are taken directly from the A D converter and sent to the VME bus These readings are also stored in digitizer memory Transferring real time or post measurement readings from memory does not remove the readings from memory As a result a set of readings can be transferred to the VME bus multiple times The digitizer is configured for an additional data transfer with the command VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate Reading the data register after executing this command transfers the data to the VME bus If a subset of the total number of readings is transferred execute the ABORt command following the transfer to allow for additional transfers The digitizer should be configured with VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate for each subsequent data transfer Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 155 Local Bus Data Transfers Local Bus Description This section describes the use of the VXI backplane Local bus The HP E1429B digitizer uses the Local bus for high speed 80 MBytes second data transfers between two or more devices installed in adjacent mainframe slots The Local bus is a set of 12 signal lines on the backplane P2 connector The Local bus is segmented such that each device with Local b
258. ed input impedance to 75Q At power on or following a reset the impedance is set to 500 The impedance of the differential input ports is 1 MQ and is not programmable The Inverting and Non inverting Differential Input Ports The non inverting HD and inverting LO differential input ports can be used singly the non used port should be grounded or together such that the difference algebraic sum of two signals is supplied to the digitizer If a single input is applied to the inverting LO port the reading is inverted Enabling the 10 MHz Each digitizer channel has a 10 MHz 2 pole bessel filter that can be Input Filter switched into the signal path of the single ended or differential input The filter is enabled disabled with the command INPut lt port gt FlLTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt 108 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Setting the Signal Range Changing Ranges The lt mode gt settings are ON 10 MHz filter is switched to the signal path OFF 10 MHz filter is removed from the signal path Enabling the filter reduces the noise on the input signal Disabling the filter allows sub sampling applications over the digitizer s 50 MHz bandwidth The filter mode of one input port is independent of the filter mode of the channel s other port At power on or following a reset the filter is disabled on all input ports CONFigure and MEASure enable the filter on the specified port The digitiz
259. ed to non volatile calibration ram Calibration security must also be turned off for the new constants to be permanently stored in non volatile calibration ram e CALibration COUNt will be incremented with this command when the values are stored to non volatile calibration RAM e Related commands CALibration SECure STATe CALibration STORe AUTO CALibration STORe e RST Condition unaffected Example Querying the calibration delay CAL DEL Query calibration delay the delay is shared by both channels GAIN CALibration lt chan gt GAIN lt readings gt lt period gt lt flag gt performs a calibration for gain using the specified number of readings and sample rate The CALibration V ALue voltage specified is used as the full scale value to calibrate to and must be between 85 0 and 99 5 percent of the full scale reading for the current configuration The 99 5 percent upper limit is to insure that noise will not cause erroneous full scale overload readings A linearity calibration is also done on the 1V measurement range with the single ended port 0 or 2 This linearity calibration may be disabled by setting the flag parameter to OFF Omitting the optional flag parameter will cause linearity to be performed 202 Command Reference CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem CALibration lt chan gt GAIN Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1or2 none read
260. edge is synchronous with the rising edge of the internal 20 MHz oscillator the ECLTrg lines CLK10 and is synchronous with the falling edge of an external reference oscillator 1 0 reserved 1 1 off Outputs an ECL high level which then allows ECLTrg1 to be used as an input ECLTrg0 source Bits 4 3 set the signal source that is output on the ECLTrg0 trigger line The sources include 0 0 a 25 ns wide negative going pulse each time a convert pulse is sent tothe A D converter 0 1 reference oscillator as selected by bits 2 0 The falling edge is synchronous with the rising edge of the internal 20 MHz oscillator the ECLTrg lines CLK10 and is synchronous with the falling edge of an external reference oscillator 1 0 reserved 1 1 off Outputs an ECL high level which then allows ECLTrg1 to be used as an input Appendix C Register Programming 359 Reference oscillator source Bits 2 0 set the reference oscillator source from which the sample rate is derived The sources include 0 0 0 the digitizer s internal 20 MHz oscillator 0 0 1 backplane trigger line ECLTrgo 0 1 0 backplane trigger line ECLTrg1 0 1 1 the EXT2 front panel BNC connector 1 00 backplane 10 MHz CLK10 signal The Arm delay Register base 5116 and base 5316 The arm delay is set using the arm delay registers defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 5116 base 5116 arm delay most s
261. efault Name Type Values Units chan numeric 112 none count numeric 65535 to 3 0 none MINimum MAXimum MINimum and MAXimum vary depending on ARM STARt COUNt and SENSe SWEep POINts 258 Command Reference SENSe lt chan gt SWEep Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes This command is coupled to TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe SWEep POINts ARM STARt COUNt ARM STARt DELay and MEMory BATTery STATe e Readings which are taken before the arm event occurs are called pre arm readings Readings taken after the arm event are called post arm readings e The INITiate command triggers pre arm readings If any arming events occur before the pre arm count is satisfied the arms are ignored and an error occurs When the pre arm count is satisfied and a legal arm event occurs post arm sampling begins The remaining number of TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe SWEep POINts readings are then taken e If pre arm readings are not 0 then there must be at least 7 post arm readings Therefore SENSe SWEep POINts SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts must be 2 7 Note that in the previous equation OFFSet POINts will be a negative number e Pre arm reading count values between 3 and 0 will be rounded to 3 or 0 whichever is closer to the specified count e Ifan ABORt or power failure occurs during a sequence of measurements the digiti
262. egister reading 153 Data source Local bus 163 Data source VME bus 152 Data storage and flow 129 Data transfer rate Local bus 405 Data transfer rates 137 Data transfers Local bus 156 VME bus 146 Declaration of conformity 11 Definite length arbitrary block header 134 removing 135 Determining the A24 base address 147 Determining the Battery Charge 133 Determining the number of readings FETCh ed 140 DIAGnostic subsystem 142 DIAGnostic UPLoad S ADDress 141 Differential input ports inverting and non inverting 108 Digitizer arming 113 Triggering 121 Digitizer attenuators 109 Digitizer block diagram 103 Digitizer command paths 105 Digitizer configuration restrictions 161 Digitizer configurations saving 174 Digitizer data flow 129 Digitizer data formats 133 Digitizer features 13 Digitizer front panel description 13 Digitizer HP IB address 19 Digitizer input section block diagram description 106 SCPI command control 106 Digitizer Local bus commands 159 Digitizer logical address 16 Digitizer memory initializing to retrieve data 385 initializing to store data 378 Digitizer memory configuration 130 Digitizer programming sequence 36 Digitizer reference clock 124 Digitizer sample period 122 Digitizer specifications 317 Digitizer status registers 165 Digitizer VXIbus configuration 13 Digitizer re initiating 378 Digitizer VXIbus configuration 15 Documentation history 10 Dual rate sampl
263. embedded controller SEGTST32 CPP VME bus data 32 bit transfers using embedded controller INST H Used with SEGTST 16 and SEGTST 32 INST CPP a Used with SEGTST 16 and SEGTST 32 E1429 H H Used with SEGTST 16 and SEGTST 32 E1429 CPP Used with SEGTST 16 and SEGTST 32 332 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 1 HP E1429A B Example Program Listing Cont d Location Program Name Language Description Chapter 2 LOCAL_AD C C Local bus data transfer using a single Cont d digitizer LBUS2PST C 7 Local bus data transfer from digitizer memory using multiple digitizers LBUSAUTO C j Local bus data transfer from the digitizer A D using multiple digitizers STATUS C Demonstrates the use of the digitizer status registers Appendix C REG_PROG C C Sets the measurement range trigger source sample rate reading count and re initiates the digitizer using register reads and writes Appendix D LBUSINTR C C Transfers data using the Local bus interleaved transfer mode Appendix B Useful Tables 333 Table B 2 HP E1429A B Power On Reset Configuration returned by LRN Parameter Command Power on Reset Setting Macro useage EMC 0 Automatic cal constant storage CAL STOR AUTO 1 enabled Channel 1 calibration value CAL1 VAL 1 01850000E 000 Channel 2 calibration value CAL2 VAL 1 01850000E 000 Reading format FORM ASC 9 Channel 1 S E input filter INP 1 FILT O d
264. en both sensing channels the settings for SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator are the same for both values of chan 1 and 2 Setting SENSe1 ROSCillator values will also set SENSe2 ROSCillator values and vice versa EXTernal FREQuency SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt indicates to the HP E1429 the frequency of an external reference oscillator signal The SENSe FREQuency subsystem uses this value to generate the sample rate when SENSe ROSCillator SOURce is set to EXTernal ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 2 none frequency numeric 10 KHz through 20 MHz Hz MINimum MAXimum MINimum selects 10 KHz MAXimum selects 20 MHz Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command Yes This command is coupled to the commands in the TRIGger subsystem e Indicating an incorrect frequency for an external reference oscillator will cause the sample rate and trigger delay to be incorrect e The amplitude of the external reference signal should be a TTL level low 0 0V to 0 8V high 2 5V to 5 0V 254 Command Reference SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator SOURce e Using MINimum or MA Ximum to specify this frequency is not recommended unless the external reference frequency is 20 kHz MINimum or 20 MHz MA Ximum In order for the digitizer processor to
265. en setting it to 1 1 Read Data Bit 4 is set to 1 when data can be read from digitizer memory See Segmented Reading Transfers in Chapter 3 for information on how the bit is used High Speed Clock Source Bits 3 2 set the source which clocks data transfers over the internal high speed bus High Speed Bus Source Bits 1 O select the data source which drives the internal high speed bus Appendix C Register Programming 363 The Pulse Register The high speed internal data bus routes data between the A D digitizer memory the local bus and the VME VXI data transfer bus Figure 3 7 There is no user access to the high speed internal bus base 0816 The pulse register is a read write register that generates high speed clock signals when the traffic register s high speed clock source is set to pulse register Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 0816 register read write generates high speed bus clock pulse Reading or writing to this register generates a clock pulse for the internal high speed bus The Channel ID Register base 0A16 The channel ID register is a read write register that allows user defined identifiers to be appended to each channel s readings Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 base 0A16 channel 1 ID channel 2 ID The Data Register The ID assigned is represented by the 4 least significant bits of each reading The I
266. er 105 GET not allowed An HP IB Group Execute Trigger was included in a command string sent to the digitizer 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the command header 109 Missing parameter Command requires a parameter or parameters 112 Program mnemonic too long Command keyword 12 characters 113 Undefined header Command header keyword was incorrectly specified 121 Invalid character in number A character other than a comma or number is in the middle of a number 123 Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 124 Too many digits More than 255 digits were used to specify a number 128 Numeric data not allowed A number was specified when a letter was required 131 Invalid suffix Parameter suffix incorrectly specified e g 10 MZ rather than 10 MHZ 138 Suffix not allowed Parameter suffix is specifed when one is not allowed 141 Invalid character data Discrete parameter specified is not a valid choice 144 Character data too long A character data type parameter is 42 characters 148 Character data not allowed Discrete parameter was specified when another type e g numeric boolean is required 151 Invalid string data The string data specified such as for the OUTPut ECLTrg FEED source gt command is not a valid choice 158 String data not allowed A string was specified when another parameter type i e discrete numeric boolean is required
267. er s input signal range is specified in terms of an expected reading value or as an explicit range value The commands used for each method are as follows MEASure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input port gt CONFigure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input port gt SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC RANGe lt range gt With MEASure or CONFigure if the lt expected value gt specified is within 98 of the maximum signal that can be measured on the nearest measurement range Table 3 1 that range is selected If the lt expected value gt is greater than 98 the next higher range is selected For example if the lt expected value gt is 5 1V the 10V range is selected since 5 1V is greater than 98 of 5 1175V Specifying a signal range with the SENSe VOLTage command that is within a given measurement range Table 3 1 sets that range If a signal range is specified that is outside a given measurement range the next higher range is selected For example if a lt range gt of 52 is specified the 1V range is selected since 52 is outside the 0 5115 to 0 51175 measurement range The Digitizer Attenuators The input section of the HP E1429 digitizer has three sets of attenuators Figure 3 3 20 dB input attenuator differential inputs only 20 dB post attenuator
268. er based device Embedded Controller i e V 382 Embedded Controller External Controller VXIbus Binary Register Data HP IB Binary Register Data VXlbus SCPI Commands HP E1406 Command Module VXlbus Binary 1 Register Data I l l l Binary l Register Data I l l l l l SS rea 20 0 o 7 Y o 5 gt o 5 int a o o E1429A FIG3 2 Figure 3 2 HP E1429 Digitizer Command Paths Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 105 The Digitizer Input Section INPut lt port gt STATe lt mode gt Ports 3 amp 4 Diff HI Diff LO Poris 1 amp 2 S E o The HP E1429 2 channel digitizer has single ended and differential input ports on each channel Each input port has a BNC connector and is DC coupled A detailed block diagram of the input section is shown in Figure 3 3 Only one channel is shown since both are identical IV range 2 20dB Input Attenuator 20dB Input Attenuator Amplifie Differentia SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion lt function gt 6dB and 14dB Internal Attenuators 10MHz filter To 4 0 a Attenuator Control INPut lt port gt FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC RANGe lt range gt 20dB Post Attenuator E1429A FIG3 3 Figure 3 3 HP E1429 Digi
269. er source will arm the system for measurement The sources available are e BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET HP IB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command e ECLTrg0 and ECLTrgl The VXIbus ECL trigger lines e TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e EXTernall The HP E1429 s front panel Ext 1 BNC connector e INTernal 1 Arms the start trigger when the signal on channel 1 meets the conditions specified by ARM STARt LEVell e INTernal2 Arms the start trigger when the signal on channel 2 meets the conditions specified by ARM STARt LEVel2 e HOLD Disable this arming source If both sources are set to HOLD then the ARM STARt IMMediate command must be sent before measurements will proceed e IMMediate Arm the start trigger as soon as the INITiate MMediate command is received This choice is only valid for ARM STARt SOURcel and requires that ARM STARt SOURce2 be set to HOLD 196 Command Reference ARM Subsystem ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n decimal 112 none source discrete BUS ECLTrg0 none ECLTrg1 IMMediate EXTernal1 INTernal 1 INTernal2 HOLD TTLTrgO to TTLTrg7 Choice IMMediate is only available for ARM STARt SOURce1 Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes The command is coupled to the ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt ARM STARt LEVel NEGative and ARM
270. er that receives and sends configuration data from to the A D shift register The shift register is used to enable the inputs and to set the input impedance filter and measurement range Address 7 16 5 4 3 2 41 0 base 0516 unused register write shifts one bit into the shift register register read reads one bit out of the shift register Each time a 1 or 0 is written to the serial register one bit is loaded into the A D shift register at bit position 0 Each time the serial register is read one bit is shifted out of the A D shift register 350 Register Programming Appendix C The A D Parallel Strobe Register base 0B16 The A D parallel strobe register is a write only register that latches the A D configuration held by the A D shift register to the analog to digital converter Address 5 2 1 0 base OBi6 not used 0 idle not used 1 strobe Setting bit 2 to 1 latches the configuration represented by the bits in the A D shift register to the A D Only one strobe is required The A D Shift Register The A D shift register is a 56 bit serial register used to configure various parameters of the digitizer The register does not have an A24 address since it is accessed using the A D serial register and the A D strobe register as shown in Figure C 2 Each time the configuration is changed all 56 bits must be written t
271. ermining if the digitizer is set to the intended address and is communicating with the computer The programs send the IDN command which returns HEWLETT PACKARD E1429A 0 A 02 00 Send the IDN command enter and display the result DIM Message 80 OUTPUT 70905 IDN ENTER 70905 Message PRINT Message END IDN C This program sends the IDN command to the digitizer as a way to determine if the computer is communicating with the digitizer Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905 I O path from the PC to the digitizer Continued on Next Page 20 Getting Started Chapter 1 ERSSESSISSSSSS ESSE SESS SESS S BESS EE SEES SEES ESEES SSIS SELES SESIE ESSE RESIS RS void main void Run the program char message 80 intlength 80 IOOUTPUTS ADDR IDN 5 send IDN command IOENTERS ADDR message amp length enter IDN response printf s n message print IDN response Dig itizer Self Test The digitizer self test is executed with the command TST The digitizer parameters tested include internal interrupt lines measurement range integrity measurement RAM integrity battery charge timebase integrity The self test takes approximately 30 seconds to complete Upon completion one of the self test codes listed in Table 1 2 i
272. error char func_tion JERERRRERERR RECAER ACERA ERARIO ERRE REN ERRE REC REP RENE FR R FERRERO AAA void main void run the program long base_adar variable for digitizer A24 base address cirscr rst_clr reset the digitizer base_addr get_base_addr function call to get digitizer A24 base address ad_conf function call which configures the digitizer ad_read base_addr function call which reads the digitizer data register Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 67 ERSSSESIS EASES SELES ESSE SELES SELES SELES void ad_conf void int length 0 loop 0 use the set_commands array to configure digitizer channel 1 char static set_commands CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 5 3 set 20 readings per burst 5V range ARM STAR SOUR IMM set arm source immediate ARM STAR COUN 2 set 2 bursts arms TRIG STAR SOUR VME Data register access triggers readings SENS SWE OFFS POIN 10 set 10 pre arm readings VINS CONF VME MODE GEN enable VME bus data transfers VINS CONF VME FEED CONV CHAN1 real time data transfer INIT put digitizer in wait for arm state length sizeof set_commands sizeof char Execute each command using a loop for loop 0 loop lt length loop A set_commands loop strlen set_commands loop function call to check for digitizer configuration errors
273. es each time it is armed is set with the pre arm and post arm reading count registers listed below e Pre arm reading count registers base 7316 and base 7516 e Post arm reading count registers base 7716 and base 7B16 When taking x pre arm and y post arm readings and x and y are the intended number of each set of readings the count loaded into the pre arm reading count registers is x 2 The count loaded into the post arm reading count registers is y 6 When taking post arm readings only the pre arm count is 1 and the post arm count is y 3 382 Register Programming Appendix C A Load the pre arm reading count registers With the digitizer in the idle state write the decimal equivalent of the least significant byte to register 73 Write the decimal equivalent of the most significant byte to register 75 You can set the pre arm reading count from 3 to 65 535 readings For example to program 500 pre arm readings a pre arm reading count of 498 500 2 is loaded into the registers MSB LSB 0000 0001 11110010 110 24210 24210 is written to register 73 1 is written to register 75 B Load the post arm reading count registers Write the decimal equivalent of the least significant byte to register 77 Write the decimal equivalent of the middle significant byte to register 79 Write the decimal equivalent of the most significant byte to register 7B You can set the post arm reading count from 7 to 16 777 215 readings
274. ess DATA query only IDENtity 284 Command Reference VINStrument Subsystem VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED CONFigure LBUS FEED VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt indicates the source of the data which will be output to the Local bus The data source may be channel 1 channel 2 or both channels The data may come from memory or directly from the A D converter s Sources beginning with MEMory are the post measurement modes sources beginning with CONVerter are the real time modes The possible sources are MEMory CHANnell Channel 1 memory is the data source for the Local bus Two bytes per reading will be output to the bus MEMory CHANnel2 Channel 2 memory is the data source for the Local bus Two bytes per reading will be output to the bus MEMory BOTH Both channels of memory are the data source for the Local bus In this mode the channel 2 reading is output first followed by the channel reading Four bytes for each set of readings will be output to the bus CONVerter CHANnel1 The channel 1 A D converter is the data source for the Local bus Two bytes per reading will be output to the bus CONVerter CHANnel2 The channel 2 A D converter is the data source for the Local bus Two bytes per reading will be output to the bus CONVerter BOTH Both A D converters are the data source for the Local bus In this mode the channel 2 reading is output first followed by t
275. ess of the digitizer s configuration registers in Al6is 1FC00016 40 64 16 1FC00016 A0016 1FCA0016 or decimal 2 080 768 40 64 2 080 768 2560 2 083 328 Given the A16 base address and the offset of the Offset register 06 from Figure C 1 the digitizer s A24 base address can be determined as shown in the program A24_REAL C Appendix C Register Programming 345 A24 READ C A24_READ C This program reads the digitizer s A24 base address Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library define CMD_MOD 70900L I O path between the digitizer and the Command Module Function prototypes long get_base_addr void BEESEESESES SESSA ESS EE SESES ESSER ESSER ESSER ESSE SSRSESSRASS TRESS SAREE SAE SSS SE SS void main void long base_addr variable for digitizer A24 base address base_addr get_base_addr function call to calculate and return digitizer A24 base address printf nA24 base address ld base_adadr BRSSESSSSSESIS SESSS SELES SESS SESSESESIS SESS SESS SSSI SE SESS SES EE SES IE ESSERE long get_base_addr void base address of A24 offset register in A16 address space long base_addr 0x1FC000 40 64 6 digitizer logical address is 40 float a24offst A24 offset from A16 offset register char rd_addr 80 command
276. est The Status Byte register contains the summary bits of the Questionable Register Signal Status Group QUES the Operation Status Group OPER and the Standard Event Status Group ESB The register also contains the message available bit MAV and the service request bit RQS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OPER RQS ESB MAV QUES unused Questionable Signal Summary Bit QUES Bit 3 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Questionable Signal Status Group is present when the appropriate bit is latched into the group s Event register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable register Message Available Bit MAV Bit 4 is set 1 when data such as a query response is in the digitizer s output queue Standard Event Summary Bit ESB Bit 5 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Standard Event Status Group is present and the appropriate bit is set in the group s Event register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable register Service Request Bit RQS Bit 6 is set 1 when any other bit in the Status Byte register is set Operation Status Summary Bit OPER Bit 7 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Operation Status Group is present when the appropriate bit is latched into the group s Event register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable register 172 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Reading the Status Byte Register
277. et logical address of 40 the secondary address is 05 Add ressing the As amessage based device the HP E1429A B digitizer can easily be Digitizer using an programmed across the VXIbus backplane from a HP E1499A V 382 Embedded embedded controller The select code of the VXI interface board in embedded controllers is typically 16 Since no secondary HP IB address is Controller required when programming over the backplane the logical address of the HP E1429A B digitizer is combined with the VXI interface select code 1640 for device logical address 40 range 01 to 99 If the digitizer s logical address is changed to a value greater than 99 the address becomes 160xxx Chapter 1 Getting Started 19 Introductory Programs Sending the IDN HP BASIC IDN C Command The introductory programs in this section include e Sending the IDN Command e Digitizer Self Test e Resetting the digitizer and clearing the status registers e Querying the digitizer configuration HP BASIC and C language versions of the introductory programs follow C language versions of these and all programs in the manual are contained on the following disk which ships with the manual e HP E1429A B Example Programs C Language 3 5 720 KByte disk HP E1429 10302 Other than the introductory programs and selected programs throughout the manual the program listings show only the digitizer commands The following programs are a fast method for det
278. et of readings from digitizer memory This section explains where readings are stored in memory and how to determine the memory addresses of any set of readings This section introduces two commands used to locate and retrieve readings from memory These commands which are part of the DIA Gnostic subsystem are DIAGnostic FETCh lt chan gt lt start_addr gt lt count gt MEMory lt chan gt ADDResses DIA Gnostic FETCHh returns count number of readings starting at address start_addr from channel chan DIAGnostic MEMory ADDResses returns a list of 32 bit values containing memory address information for each segment The use of these commands is shown in the following paragraphs Unsegmented readings SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts 0 are always contiguous and are stored at address location 524287 num_readings 1 where num_readings ARM COUN TRIG COUN pad and pad are extra counts to make the total reading count divisible by 4 Therefore the first reading is stored at address location 524287 num_readings 1 As an example assume ARM COUN 3 and TRIG COUN 53 Then num_readings 3 53 1 160 1 is the pad count added to the total reading count first data point address 524287 160 1 524128 This address together with the count of 159 3 53 are specified in the DIAGnostic FETch command to retrieve the readings from channel 1 DIAG FETC1 524128 159 142 Understanding the HP E1429 Di
279. evel on the selected TTLTRG trigger line goes low while the trigger system is initiated The line goes high after the readings complete and then goes low again for the next burst of readings When taking post arm readings only the signal returns high when the arm count and trigger count are both satisfied TILT rg lt n gt Idle State INITiate IMMediate a4 t Begin next burst Prepare for next burst of pre amp post arm readings ARM COUNt gt 1 E1429A FIG4b Routing the Signal to a Source The trigger signal can be routed to the locations described above provided the port or trigger line is not also used as an input for a reference clock source arm source or trigger source Summarized are the external sources available to the digitizer External reference clock sources Ext 2 BNC port ECLTrg lt n gt trigger line External arm sources Ext 1 BNC port ECLTrg lt n gt trigger line TTLTrg lt n gt trigger line External trigger sources Ext 1 BNC port Ext 2 port ECLTrg lt n gt trigger line TTLTrg lt n gt trigger line If one of these ports or trigger lines is a source then that same port or line cannot be used to route OUTPut the signal 128 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Note Enabling the Synchronization Signal In order for the trigger or clock synchronization signals to be routed to the Ext 1 BNC port or to an ECLTRG or TTLTRG trigger line the routing must be enabled
280. f the HP E1429 is unknown to the firmware The last field indicates the revision level of the firmware The firmware revision field will change whenever the firmware is revised A 01 00 is the initial revision The first two digits indicate the major revision number and increment when functional changes are made The last two digits indicate bug fix level e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e RST Condition none e Power On Condition register is cleared LMC returns a comma separated list of quoted strings each containing the name of a macro If no macros are defined a single null string is returned e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related Commands DMC e RST Condition none e Power On Condition no macros are defined Chapter 4 Command Reference 302 LRN LRN OPC Note Comments Comments LRN returns a sequence of commands that may be re sent to the HP E1429 to return it to its current programming state Only those commands that are affected by RST are included in the sequence Exceptions include MEMory BATTery STATe the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECurity command state LRN should be sent singly in a program message since the number of commands in the returned sequence is large and may vary depending on firmware revision e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands RCL RST SAV e
281. ferential input disabled 11 TERM75 2 0 Ch2 input impedance 500 37 CH1INT 0 Ch1 6dB int attenuator ON 1 Ch2 input impedance 750 1 Ch1 6dB int attenuator OFF 12 SINGEND2 0 Ch2 S E input disabled 38 CH1INT 0 Ch1 14dB int attenuator ON 1 Ch2 S E input enabled 1 Ch1 14d0B int attenuator OFF 13 DUMMY2 Ch2 dummy load select 39 not used 14 FILTER2 0 Ch2 filter disabled 40 CH2HCAL Ch2 see bit 32 1 Ch2 filter enabled 15 PIGGY2 0 Ch2 attenuators disabled 41 CH2LCAL Ch2 see bit 33 1 Ch2 attenuators enabled 16 CAL1A 0 Ch1 cal address line 0 42 ATT20DB 0 Ch2 20dB input attenuator ON 1 Ch2 20dB input attenuator OFF 17 CAL1A 1 Ch1 cal address line 1 43 CH2POST 0 Ch2 200B post attenuator ON 1 Ch2 20dB post attenuator OFF 18 CAL1A 2 Ch1 cal address line 2 44 CH2INPT 0 Ch2 differential input enabled 1 Ch2 differential input disabled 19 CAL1A 3 Ch2 cal address line 3 45 CH2INT 0 Ch2 6dB int attenuator ON 1 Ch2 6dB int attenuator OFF 20 CAL1EN Ch1 cal enable 46 CH2INT 0 Ch2 14dB int attenuator ON 1 Ch2 14dB int attenuator OFF 21 CAL2A 0 Ch2 cal address line 0 47 not used 22 CAL2A 1 Ch2 cal address line 1 48 49 HCALMUX Bits 49 51 48 50 Output 0 0 23 CAL2A 2 Ch2 cal address line 2 0 1 10V REF 50 51 LCALMUX 1 O 1V REF Output 1 1 CALSIG 352 Register Programming Appendix C The Arm and Trigger Configuration Registers The Abort and Arm Immediate Register The Arm Status Register
282. figuration The HP E1429A B is a 2 Channel 20 MSample second digitizer The HP E1429A B digitizers are VXI message based instruments but can also be programmed at the register level register programming is covered in Appendix C The features of the HP E1429A and HP E1429B are the same except that the HP E1429B also has VXI Local bus data transfer capability This manual covers the use of both digitizers Front Panel Figure 1 1 describes the front panels of the HP E1429A B digitizers Description Chapter 1 Getting Started 13 Local Bus Key E1429B only Allows other modules with Local Bus capability o be installed in adjacent slots left or right Failed Annunciator Indicates the E1429 failed its power on self test or that a hardware failure has occurred Access Annunciator ndicates the digitizer is executing a command Error Annunciator Indicates a programming error has occurred Annunciator remains on until all errors have been read from the error queue Sample Annunciator ndicates the digitizer is sampling Channel 1 Overload Annunciator Indicates the input protection relay has opened due to a single ended Channel 1 Port 1 Single Ended Input Dat Input 1M0 input amplifier overrange DC coupled HI Impedance 50Q or 750 o Input Range 1 0230 to 1 0235V 8 Ww Single Ended Input Impedance Svc Indicates the input impedance of wel oe the single ended input Q a
283. figuration and CON Figu re based on parameters set by the digitizer subsystems Figure 1 4 The easiest way to set these parameters is with the MEASure or CONFigure Commands gt nand MEASure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input port gt CONFigure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt lt expected value gt lt resolution gt lt input port gt lt chan gt is the digitizer channel 1 or 2 configured This parameter is optional If a channel is not specified channel 1 is assumed lt size gt is the total number of pre arm and post arm readings samples taken each time an arm signal occurs Note the space between the command header and the lt size gt parameter lt expected value gt is the amplitude range of the signal to be measured This optional parameter is used to set the digitizer measurement range If an expected value is not specified the digitizer defaults to the 1V range lt resolution gt is the reading resolution and is determined from the expected value There is a fixed resolution for each measurement range Table 3 2 If a specified resolution is greater that what is available for that range expected value an error occurs lt input port gt is the channel input port single ended or differential to which the input signal is applied Readings can be taken on only one input port per channel a
284. func_tion RAI void main void run the program rst_clr reset the digitizer ad_meas function which configures the digitizer and makes the measurement JERERRE ARES SESSLER SLL ALIS L EEE LEIS RRE ROA REIR REF LOLOL SADLER AOL AOL ODOR void ad_meas void int i 0 readings 10 float rdgs dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 10 sizeof float Continued on Next Page 38 Getting Started Chapter 1 Use the MEASure command to configure the digitizer and to take the readings IOOUTPUTS ADDR MEAS1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 27 Send 27 characters IOENTERA ADDR rdgs amp readings Read readings from MEASure command for i 0 i lt readings i printf nReading d f i rdgs free rdgs readings PSPC CeO CEO OP COO eC OOO C ETOP TET OPT ETOCS ODES POET SCOPE POOP S POOP SPIO Ey void rst_clr void Reset and clear the A D IOOUTPUTS ADDR RST CLS 9 Send 9 characters Using CONFigure When an application requires a configuration different from that available with MEA Sure CONFigure is used CONFigure does not take readings after setting the configuration Thus any of the low level commands Table 1 3 can be used to change selected parameters before a measurement is made Assume an application requires the following configuration e 10 pre arm and 10 pos
285. ge 370 UNTIL Code 0 380 STOP 390 SUBEND ERRORCHK C ERRORCHK C This program contains the C function used by the example programs to check for digitizer configuration errors When an error occurs the function reads the digitizer s error buffer and prints the error messages until all of the errors have been read Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L 1 O path from PC to the digitizer via the HP E1406 Function Prototype void check_error void Continued on Next Page 46 Getting Started Chapter 1 A A void main void check_error call error check function OE void check_error void char into 161 int length 160 IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 Query error register IOENTERS ADDR into amp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit while atoi into l 0 printf Y sinin into IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS ADDR into amp length exit 1 Dig itizer If the digitizer s access light remains on while programming the digitizer Command Module over HP IB it may be due to a deadlock between the digitizer and the Deadlock HP E1406 Command Module If such a deadlock occurs and you canno
286. gitizer Chapter 2 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Messlnst kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk void MesslInst SendMessage const char message unsigned long ActualLen char Buf BUFLEN 1 strcpy Buf message strcat Buf n iwrite Inst Buf strlen Buf 0 amp ActualLen char MessInst ReceiveMessage char message int maxLen int Reason unsigned long ActualLen char SPtr BUf BUFLEN 1 iread Inst message maxLen amp Reason amp ActualLen message ActualLen 0 SPir message strlen message 1 while SPtr gt message amp amp SPtr 1n SPtr 0 while Reason TERM_MAXCNT iread Inst Buf BUFLEN amp Reason amp ActualLen return message char MessInst GetErrorMessage char message int maxLen char MPtr SendMessage SYST ERR ReceiveMessage message maxLen MPtr atoi message message NULL return MPtr Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 81 E1429 H ifndef E1429_DEFD define E1429 DEFD include inst h class E1429 public MessInst int MemoryMode public E1429 WORD lAddr 40 void SetDataReg UWORD value wSet 0x0c value UWORD GetDataReg void return wGet 0x0c void MGetDataReg UWORD dest ULONG count wMGet 0x0c dest count ULONG GetLongDataReg void Cannot use Get here because of ilpeek problem void MGetLongDataReg ULONG dest ULONG count IMGet 0x0c dest count endif E1429 CPP inc
287. gitizer Chapter 3 Locating Segmented Readings For segmented readings SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts lt 3 the algorithm for locating the readings is similar to that for unsegmented readings but is slightly more complicated The number of memory segments is determined by the specified arm count ARM STARt COUNt as shown in Table 3 5 Table 3 5 Arm Count Vs Memory Segments ARM STARt COUNt Number of Maximum Readings Memory TRIGger STARt COUNTt Segments 1 1 524 288 2 2 262 144 3 4 4 131 072 5 8 8 65 536 9 16 16 32 768 17 32 32 16 384 33 64 64 8 192 65 128 128 4096 NOTE If the non volatile mode of memory is enabled MEMory BATTery STATe ON then all of the maximum reading counts shown above decrease by four These four memory locations in each segment hold the data necessary to recover all readings after a power failure The algorithm for determining where the first reading of each segment begins is first reading in segment ending segment address num_readings 1 where num_readings TRIG COUN pad and pad are extra counts to make the total reading count divisible by 4 The memory partition composed of num_readings is circular and if large amounts of pre arm data readings are taken the data keeps overwriting itself until the arm is received and the post arm count finishes NOTE that the actual desired starting point for retrieving data will be last_data_point_add
288. gitizer are e Questionable Signal Status Group condition register transition filter event register enable register e Operation Status Group condition register transition filter event register enable register e Standard Event Status Group standard event status register standard event status enable register e Status Byte Status Group status byte register service request enable register The relationship between the registers and filters in these groups is shown in Figure 3 16 Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 165 Questionable Signal Status Group Condition Register STATus QUEStionable CONDition y Transition Filter y STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt Event Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Enable Register STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt Status Byte Summary bit Standard Event Status Group o 0 AL o Event Register ESR 1 _ J 1 2 2 M i QUES QUES Enable Register ESE lt unmask gt MAV MAV i n ESB ESB ummar it g Ros x0 Operation Status Group R OPER OPER Condition Register STATus OPERation CONDition STB SRE lt unmask gt SPOLL y Transition Filter y STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unma
289. gs 5V range channel 1 input port 3 CONF2 ARR VOLT 10 5 4 configure channel 2 port 4 TRIG STAR SOUR ECLTO set trigger source VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE GEN set Local bus mode to GENerate VINS LBUS FEED CONV BOTH set Local bus feed A Ds VINS LBUS SEND POIN 2 POIN AUTO OFF set number of readings per block send end of block and end of frame after each reading use the digitizer2 array to configure the inserter digitizer char static digitizer2 CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 set 10 readings 5V range channel 1 input port 3 CONF2 ARR VOLT 10 5 4 configure channel 2 port 4 TRIG STAR SOUR TIM set trigger source TRIG STAR TIM 1E 6 set sample rate 1 MHz OUTP ECLTO FEED TRIG feed trigger to generator from ECLTO OUTP ECLTO STAT ON enable feed VINS LBUS RES reset the Local bus chip VINS LBUS MODE INS set Local bus mode to INSert VINS LBUS FEED CONV BOTH set Local bus feed A Ds VINS LBUS SEND POIN 2 POIN AUTO OFF set number of readings per block send end of block and end of frame after each reading Continued on Next Page Appendix D Local Bus Interleaved Transfers 409 use the memory array to configure the memory card char static memory FORM DATA PACK set packed data format
290. gt include lt stdio h gt include e1429 h define BUFLEN 200 extern int ierrno int Measure E1429 Dig int ReadData E1429 Dig kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Main kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk void main void int Errors E1429 Dig Errors 0 ierrno 0 Continued on Next Page 72 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Dig new E1429 if IDig gt IsValid printf Digitizer could not be opened s n igeterrstr igeterrno if Dig NULL delete Dig Dig NULL exit 1 Errors Measure Dig if Errors Errors ReadData Dig delete Dig exit 0 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Measure kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk int Measure E1429 Dig int Errors char Buf BUFLEN 1 Com static char Commands RST CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 5 3 ARM STAR SOUR IMM ARM STAR COUN 2 TRIG STAR SOUR VME SENS SWE OFFS POIN 10 VINS CONF VME MODE GEN VINS CONF VME FEED CONV CHAN1 INIT NULL E for Com Commands Com NULL Com Dig gt SendMessage Com Errors 0 while Dig gt GetErrorMessage Buf BUFLEN l NULL printf s n Buf Errors return Errors Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 73 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk ReadData kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk int ReadData E1429 Dig int SegCnt ReadCnt WORD Readings Reading Reading2 const static NReadings 20 NSegments 2 const static fl
291. h output path if any will receive the synchronization pulses generated by the HP E1429 Sync pulses can be sent to the Ext 1 BNC the VXI TTL trigger lines the VXI ECL trigger lines or any combination of these three Subsystem OUTPut Syntax ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt STATe lt mode gt EXTernal 1 FEED lt source gt STATe lt mode gt TTLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt STATe lt mode gt ECLTrg lt n gt FEED OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt specifies the source for the synchronization pulse which will be routed to ECLTrg0 and or ECLTrg1 The available sources are EXTernal 1 Outputs the signal currently specified by the OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED command with the polarity inverted OUTPut EXTernall STATe ON must be set for output to occur See the OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED command for descriptions of the possible sources SENSe 112 ROSCillator The signal level will go high with the falling edge of an external reference oscillator SENSe ROSCillator SOURce EXTernal and will go high with the rising edge of all other reference oscillator sources SENSe ROSCillator SOURce INT ECLT lt n gt CLK10 When the output state is enabled the signal is output as soon as this feed is selected and will be output continuously until the feed source is changed to some other selection TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Outputs an approximately 25 nanosecond wide positive going
292. h speed bus sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x08 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set the digitizer data register as the high speed clock source digitizer memory is still the data source sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x02 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit_pat retain register settings set data register as the clock source bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg amp OxF3 Ox0B sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x02 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command SR PERERERRE SAS PESES ASSESS SAESTAPSER ASRS RARRRRARERAAEER RARER RARER RAR SRA AE SSH void data_read long base_addr This function retrieves the new set of readings those taken on the 1V range by reading the data register using the HP E1406 Command Module DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress command Reading the data register places the readings on the VME VXI data transfer bus int rdgs i 0 swap 0 bytes 0 length 1 char rd_mem 80 If_remove 1 rdgs malloc 20 sizeof int swap sizeof int bytes 20 swap Create the HP E1406 Command Module command string which reads the data register 1 sprintf rd_mem DIAG UPL SADD
293. h two or more digitizers transferring data serially the Serial Transfers leftmost digitizer is set to the generate mode and the succeeding digitizer s is set to either the append mode or the insert mode A device such as the HP E1488 memory card is usually the consumer In a serial transfer each digitizer transfers data from its memory or directly from its A D in sequence For example serial transfers from digitizers D1 D3 where Dj is in generator mode and D2 and D3 are in append mode would appear as EOF EOB D3 D3 D3 EOB D2 D2 D2 EOB D1 D1 Dj gt consumer When Dj is in generator mode and D2 and D3 are in insert mode the transfer sequence would appear as EOF EOB D1 D1 D1 EOB D2 D2 Do EOB D3 D3 D3 gt consumer In these sequences EOF is the end of frame flag EOB is the end of block flag and Dn is either a two byte one channel or four byte two channel reading The procedure for a serial transfer is 160 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 1 Use the CONFigure command and the low level digitizer commands to configure the digitizers for the required measurements 2 Use the VINStrument subsystem to reset the leftmost digitizer s Local bus chip to set the Local bus transfer mode to generate and to set the data source post measurement or real time transfer Use the VINStrument subsystem to reset the inner digitizer s Local bus chip to set the Local bus transfer mode to append or insert and
294. he channel 1reading Four bytes for each set of readings will be output to the bus Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source string CONVerter BOTH none CONVerter CHANnel1 CONVerter CHANnel2 MEMory BOTH MEMory CHANnel1 MEMory CHANnel2 Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command Yes this command is set but ignored if VINStrument CONFigure LB US MODE is not GENerate APPend or INSert VINStrument Subsystem Command Reference 285 VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate e When VINStrument CONFigure LB US FEED is one or both A D converters care must be taken that other active instruments in the pipeline can maintain the data generation rate If data is available from the A D converter but the Local bus is busy and can not accept it the data is lost and error 1019 Data loss detected during LBUS transfer is reported e For VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED MEMory BOTH and VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED CONVerter BOTH data is sent interleaved with channel 2 reading 1 as the first point e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE ARM subsystem TRIGger subsystem VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED MEMory BOTH Example Send channel 1 memory data to consumer automatically after measurement VINS CONF LBUS MODE GEN Set this module s mode to GENera
295. he The number of readings that FETCh retrieves can be determined two ways Number of Readings The first way is with the command FETCh ed FETCh lt chan gt COUNt This command returns the total number of readings pre and post arm that the FETCh command will retrieve Since both channels always take the same number of readings either channel can be specified The second way to determine the number of readings is to multiply the arm count by the trigger count These two counts can be obtained from the queries ARM STARt COUNt arm count TRIGger STARt COUNt trigger count Separating Pre and The number of pre arm readings and the number of post arm readings are Post Arm Readings related to the total reading count as follows post arm readings total readings pre arm readings The FETCh lt chan gt COUNt command and the ARM STARt COUNt and TRIGger STARt COUN queries described previously return the total number of readings The pre arm count is determined by taking the absolute value of the query 140 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Note Using DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress Note SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts This command will return 0 if no pre arm readings are specified or a negative number representing the number of pre arm readings If the digitizer measurement sequence is aborted ABORt command the FETCh lt chan gt COUNt command is the only way to determine the
296. he commands used to configure the digitizer s input section The program sets up the digitizer to take 10 readings on the 1V range of the digitizer s single ended input port This includes e enabling disabling the input ports e setting the input impedance e switching the 10 MHz filter into the signal path e setting the signal range INPUT C RST CLS reset and clear the digitizer CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 1 set 10 readings on channel 1 input port 1 INP3 STAT OFF disable differential port 3 INP1 IMP 50 set input impedance to 50 ohms INP1 FILT ON switch 10 MHz filter into signal path SENS1 VOLT RANG 1 set 1V range READ initialize digitizer fetch readings retrieve the readings from the digitizer Comments 1 Digitizer INPut Commands The CONFigure command sets most of the INPut subsystem parameters to the same values as set by the INP commands listed in the program The INPut commands were executed to show the context in which they are used 2 Disabling an Input Port When taking readings it is not necessary to disable the channel s input port that is not being used INP3 STAT OFF It was done in this program to show the versatility of the digitizer 3 Digitizer Measurement Range In this program the measurement range is specified with the SENSe VOLTage RANGe command rather than with the expected value parameter of the CONFigure command For most applications however i
297. iate ARM subsystem SENSe SWEep POINts SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts e RST Condition TRIGger STARt COUNt 1 Example Taking 20 readings 8 pre arm and 12 post arm ARM COUNt 1 ARM the reading trigger once TRIG COUN 20 Take 20 readings each arm cycle SENS SWE OFFS POIN 8 Set 8 readings as pre arm TRIGger Subsystem Command Reference 275 TRIGger STARt IMMediate STARt IMMediate Comments TRIGger STARt IMMediate will cause a reading to be taken immediately when the digitizer is in the wait for trigger state ARM event has occurred regardless of the selected trigger source The number of triggers set by TRIGger STARt COUNt will be decremented by one The selected trigger source remains unchanged There is no query form of this command e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e If the trigger system is in the idle or wait for arm state TRIGger STARt MMediate will cause error 211 Trigger ignored to be generated and no action will be taken e Related Commands INITiate MMediate e RST Condition none Example Forcing a measurement to occur ARM SOUR IMM Arm trigger immediately after INIT command received TRIG SOUR HOLD Set trigger source to hold INIT Initiate trigger system trigger will go to hold TRIG Override the hold and take a reading STARt SOURce TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt configures the trigger system to respond to the specified source for taking readings
298. id void ad_confread void void check_error char func_tion EPPPAESESALEASAS LES ASL ELAR SSAA DORAN nana void main void run the program rst_clr reset the digitizer ad_confread function which configures the digitizer and takes the readings id dad dad void ad_confread void int length 0 loop 0 i 0 swap 0 bytes 0 label 0 int rdgs char If_remove 1 use the set_commands array to configure single ended input port 1 on digitizer channel 1 char static set_commands CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 1 1 set 20 readings 1V range FORM PACK set packed reading format DIAG CHAN LAB 1 add label to each reading length sizeof set_commands sizeof char Execute each command using a loop for loop 0 loop lt length loop IOOUTPUTS ADDR set_commands loop strlen set_commands loop function call to check for digitizer configuration errors check_error ad_confread dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 20 sizeof int Continued on Next Page 60 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 set number of bytes placed in memory and number of bytes read swap sizeof int place 2 bytes reading in memory bytes 20 swap read 40 bytes IOOUTPUTS ADDR READ 5 retrieve the readings IOENTERAB ADDR rdgs amp bytes swap enter the read
299. ignificant byte base 5316 base 5316 arm delay least significant byte Register 51 Contains the most significant byte of the arm delay Register 53 Contains the least significant byte of the arm delay The Arm Count Register base 5516 and base 5716 The arm count is set using the arm count registers defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 5516 base 5516 arm count most significant byte base 5716 base 5716 arm count least significant byte Register 55 Contains the most significant byte of the arm count Register 57 Contains the least significant byte of the arm count The Arm Count Latch Register base 5916 The arm count latch register is used to load the arm count and initialize the trigger counters It is written to three times prior to sending the timebase processor an initiate pulse Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 5916 register write loads the arm count and initializes the trigger counters 360 Register Programming Appendix C The Trigger Immediate Register base 5D16 A trigger immediate occurs when any 8 bit value is written to the trigger immediate register shown below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 5D36 register write sends trigger sample immediate The Decade Division Register base 6116 The decade division register is used with the binary division
300. igured for 10 readings on the 5V range The INSerter digitizer s arm source and trigger source are INTernal The INSerter digitizer transfers feeds its READy signal to the GENerator digitizer over the VXI backplane TTLTO trigger line Again the digitizer s Local bus configuration begins by resetting the Local bus chip The Local bus mode is set to INSert and the feed data source is set to CONVerter CHANnel1 3 Digitizer Sample Rates The maximum Local bus transfer rate is 80 MBytes second which is equivalent to 40 MSamples second The sample rate for both digitizers as set by the CONFigure command is 50 ns 20 MHz Thus data is transferred from the two digitizers at a rate of 40 MSamples 80 MBytes second 4 Initiating the Digitizers After the memory card is configured the card is INITiated first so that it is ready to receive the digitizer readings In a configuration with multiple digitizers in the INSert mode the GENerator digitizer is INITiated next so that it is waiting for an arm signal to begin taking measurements When the INSerter is INITiated it takes its readings and then arms the GENerator digitizer OPC is used to allow the GENerator readings to complete and be transferred before they are retrieved from the memory card Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 99 5 Reading Sequence and Format When this program executes the readings are transferred to the memory card and later displayed in the following sequence
301. ile calibration memory unless the CALibration STORe AUTO command is set to OFF Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1or2 none readings numeric 100 to 32767 DEFault none period numeric reference period to Seconds reference period 4E8 DEFault mode discrete ALL ONE none e Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No e Before executing CALibration lt chan gt ZERO you must do the following steps a If mode is not ALL use the CONFigure command or the SENSe VOLTage RANGe and SENSe FUNCtion commands to place the HP E1429 in the desired range and using the desired port i e CONF lt channel gt ARR VOLT 1000 lt range gt lt port gt Program the input filter and impedance if applicable to the desired settings use the INPut FILTer and INPut IMPedance commands If itis desirable for the new constants to be stored to non volatile calibration memory upon completion of the CALibration ZERO command then set CALibration STORe AUTO to ON and turn calibration security OFF If a complete calibration involving gain and linearity is to be done then it may be more desirable to only store the calibration constants when everything is complete for this case set CALibration STORe AUTO to OFF and use the CALibration STORe command to force storage when all calibrations are complete 210 Command Reference CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem
302. in kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk void main void int Errors E1429 Dig Errors 0 ierrno 0 Dig new E1429 if IDig gt IsValid printf Digitizer could not be opened s n igeterrstr igeterrno if Dig NULL delete Dig Dig NULL exit 1 Errors Measure Dig if Errors Errors ReadData Dig delete Dig exit 0 Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 75 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Measure kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk int Measure E1429 Dig int Errors char Buf BUFLEN 1 Com static char Commands RST CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 5 3 CONF2 ARR VOLT 20 5 4 ARM STAR SOUR IMM ARM STAR COUN 2 TRIG STAR SOUR VME SENS SWE OFFS POIN 10 VINS CONF VME MODE GEN VINS CONF VME FEED CONV BOTH32 INIT NULL y for Com Commands Com NULL Com Dig gt SendMessage Com Errors 0 while Dig gt GetErrorMessage Buf BUFLEN l NULL printf s n Buf Errors return Errors kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk ReadData kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk int ReadData E1429 Dig int SegCnt ReadCnt LONG Readings Reading Reading2 const static NReadings 20 NSegments 2 const static float Scale 0 0025 16 0 Reading Readings LONG malloc NSegments NReadings sizeof LONG for SegCnt 0 SegCnt lt NSegments SegCnt while Dig gt bGet 67 amp 2 0 Dig gt MGetLongDat
303. in memory is two bytes bytes 40 swap read 80 bytes IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM INIT 4 initiate the memory card IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM OPC 5 wait for INIT to parse before continuing IOENTER ADDR_MEM amp rdy enter OPC response from memory card IOOUTPUTS ADDR_G INIT 4 initiate the generator digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR_l INIT 4 initiate the inserter digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR_G OPC 5 wait for generator digitizer readings IOENTER ADDR_G amp rdy to complete IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM TRAC DATA SET1 15 retrieve readings from memory card IOENTERAB ADDR_MEM rdgs amp bytes swap enter readings and remove block header remove line feed which trails the last data byte IOENTERS ADDR_MEM If_remove amp length IOOUTPUTS ADDR_G ABOR 4 abort generator digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR_I ABOR 4 abort inserter digitizer convert and display the readings the reading sequence is inserter digitizer channel 2 reading 1 inserter digitizer channel 1 reading 1 generator digitizer channel 2 reading 1 generator digitizer channel 1 reading 1 inserter digitizer channel 2 reading 2 and so on for i 0 i lt readings i rdgs i 16 Appendix D Local Bus Interleaved Transfers 411 else printf nReading d 6E i rdgs i 0 0025 free rdgs ES EASEE ERE EE ERST
304. ince executing the CAL GAIN CAL ZERO or CAL STORe commands increments the number the CALibration COUNt command detects any accidental or unauthorized HP E1429 calibration Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1or2 none Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e Your HP E1429 was calibrated before it left the factory Before using read the calibration count to determine its initial value e Both channels share the same counter so it does not matter whether channel 1 or channel 2 is specified the same answer is returned for either e The HP E1429 stores the calibration number in its non volatile calibration memory which remains intact even with power off 198 Command Reference CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem CALibration lt chan gt DATA e Executing the CALibration GAIN or CALibration ZERO commands with calibration security disabled CALibration SECure STATe OFF set and with CALibration STORe AUTO ON increments the calibration number by one With CALibration STORe AUTO ON a complete calibration of all input ranges increments the number by several counts It is possible by setting CALibration STORe AUTO to OFF to defer the storing of calibration constants until explicitly told to do so by invoking the CALibration STORe command e The count increments whenever either channel stores calibration data to memory The maximum valu
305. ing 123 E E1429A B Logical Address 16 Embedded controller addressing the E1429A B using an 19 Embedded controller VME bus data transfers 72 Enable register Operation status group 170 Questionable signal status group 168 Enabling non volatile memory 132 Enabling the 10 MHz filter register based 370 Enabling the input ports 108 Enabling the inputs register based 369 Enabling the synchronization signal 120 129 End of line terminator suppressing 29 EOI terminating commands 29 EOL terminator suppressing 29 Event register Operation status group 170 Questionable signal status group 168 Example program Local bus interleaved transfers 408 Example program configuration 30 Example program programming language 49 Example programs configuring the digitizer input 50 416 Index HP E1429A B User s Manual dual rate sampling 55 level arming 52 Local bus data transfers 83 pre and post arm readings 53 specifying a sample rate 54 taking a burst of readings 51 using 49 using multiple digitizers 56 using the digitizer status registers 101 using the packed data format 59 VME bus data transfers 63 VME bus data transfers using an embedded controller 72 Example programs disk C compiliers used 31 compiling and linking 31 Executable when initiated commands 183 Executing Coupled Commands 29 F FETCh subsystem retrieving readings 139 FETChing readings from memory 139 Format Common
306. ing is divided by 16 to remove the data label bits 0 3 and is multipled by 0 0025 which is the reading resolution for the 5V range refer to Chapter 3 for more information on data labels and packed reading conversions 414 Local Bus Interleaved Transfers Appendix D Index HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual IDN command sending 20 A A D readings 137 A24 base address 344 A24 base address determining 147 A24 registers accessing 343 Abbreviated Commands 179 ABORt 185 ABORt subsystem 185 Aborting measurements procedure 377 Accessing the registers 343 Addressing the digitizer over HP IB 19 Addressing the digitizer using an embedded controller 19 Analog to digital converter 129 Arm count setting 117 Arm delay setting 117 Arm immediate register procedure 376 377 Arm immediate using registers 376 Arm level range 117 Arm level setting 116 Arm rate 118 Arm signal slope setting 115 ARM signals synchronization 118 Arm source setting 114 ARM subsystem overview 114 ARM Synchronization signals 118 Arm window boundaries 116 ARM TRIG state diagram 112 post arm path 112 pre arm path 112 Arming and triggering 111 Arming and triggering register based 372 Arming the Digitizer 113 Arming immediate 118 Assigning the Digitizer to a commander 16 Attenuators 109 B Base address A24 address space 344 Battery charge 133 Block diagram 103 Bus request level 18 guidelines 18
307. ings and remove the block header Remove line feed which trails the last data byte length 1 IOENTERS ADDR If_remove amp length print label label rdgs 0 amp Ox000P printf nLabel d label convert and print each reading as a voltage for i 0 i lt 20 i rdgs i 16 remove label from each reading if rdgs i gt 2047 rdgs i lt 2046 printf nReading overrange else printf nReading d 6E i rdgs i 0 0005 free rdgs JERFRERRER ERRE ERE AER RE RE RARA RA RAR RARA RR ARA RR ARA ARA RAR ARMA RARA AAA void rst_clr void Reset and clear the digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR RST CLS 9 Send 9 characters Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 61 ERPSSESISSRESS SERS SISSIES SELES SESERERISE SELES SELES EE SSE SELES SELES SELES SESE ES void check_error char func_tion char into 161 intlength 160 IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 Query error register IOENTERS ADDR into amp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit while atoi into 0 printf Error s in function s n n into func_tion IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS ADDR into amp length exit 1 Comments _ 1 Packed Reading Format Packed digitizer readings are signed 1
308. ings numeric 100 to 32767 DEFault none period numeric reference period to Seconds reference period 4E8 DEFault flag boolean ON OFF defaults to ON none Comments Executable when initiated No Coupled Command No e Before executing CALibration lt chan gt GAIN you must do the following steps Note that if you use the CONFigure command it must be sent first otherwise several of the settings such as CALibration SECure STATe and CALibration V ALue will be reset to their RST values a Disable the calibration security by setting CALibration lt chan gt SECure STATe OFF b Use the CONFigure command or the SENSe VOLTage RANGe and SENSe FUNCtion commands to place the HP E1429 in the desired range and using the desired port i e CONF lt channel gt ARR VOLT 1000 lt range gt lt port gt c Program the input filter and impedance if applicable to the desired settings use the INPut FILTer and INPut IMPedance commands d Specify the voltage which will be applied using the CALibration VALue command This voltage must be 85 to 99 5 of the full scale input for the range being calibrated The CONFigure command will reset the value of this setting so this step must be done after any CONFigure command is used e Connect a fixed standard DC voltage to the input to be calibrated where the standard is between 85 0 and 99 5 of the full scale reading for the range being calibrated e MINimum and
309. ion QUEStionable ENABle 267 OPERation QUEStionable EVENE s eae 64 406 44 4 ook Rw RR E 268 OPERation QUEStionable NTRansition o 269 OPERation QUEStionable PTRansiti n 2o 0cc o o acesos 269 PRESS dea EE A E SE ARANA ARAS ARA 270 BY LN rr ld oo we Ak E E E AR a tr de Ae Ge 271 BERRO ppke add is A DREYER be R A 271 RMON bie hg ke a A a ee eRe Oe de 271 URE e ERASE A IAEA A 272 Pe ONE a see da tn e carats a a me cede o Bod 274 ESTAR IMMediate oc 2 06 654 ad GREER EY EDO HOS RH ERE ESO 276 Per AR SOU Rie ck pee RE eee OE Ree EER CK ES 276 ESTARSE 225 idee ete wed od bw ee kG owe eee ne ee 278 PERIOD VALUE TABLE 0004 4 4 2 iteki a Re 280 ESTARI TIM oc oa o4 6 CRG SERRE ES SHS SS SESE ER EEE S 280 PERIOD VALUE TABLE 324440 846884 RR EKER OS ORE 282 a e ee Ao ce ech ee ok oe ak ee Oa ES G 283 Decal Bus tanis eoa ee eK ARE OS SA a EO eH 283 VME VXI data transfer Bus transfers 2 aooaa ee 284 CONE LES FERD irere reda 245904345 5 646564444 285 LCONFigure LBUS MEMoryINIViat 226252 s ae eee ee 286 CONF five EBUSEMODES 6 6 3 o 0 amp oom oe ba od oe bee S 287 LCONFignte LBUS RESE oc ad Ge kL E RARER ERA SOMERS SEE CES 288 CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts perbersit 289 CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO o o o o 290 CONFigure TEST DATA cos cae eek a wR sr REE eR 291 CONFigute YME FEED ss ee ea RRR ER Oe Re a A 293 CONFigure
310. ipt of this command Local bus data is neither used nor passed through PIPeline Local bus data is passed through and not altered This mode becomes effective immediately upon receipt of this command Select this mode when data should be transparently passed through the HP E1429B The module will remain in the PIPeline mode even after an end of frame flag is received therefore it is necessary to change modes to take the module out of PIPeline mode 162 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Setting the Local Bus Data Source Local Bus Data Format The source of the readings transferred over the Local bus is set with the command VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt The lt source gt parameters follow Sources beginning with MEMory are the post measurement sources sources beginning with CONVerter are the real time A D sources The Local bus data source is independent of any Local bus transfer mode MEMory CHANnell Channel 1 memory is the data source for the Local bus Two bytes per reading will be output to the bus MEMory CHANnel2 Channel 2 memory is the data source for the Local bus Two bytes per reading will be output to the bus MEMory BOTH Both channels of memory are the data source for the Local bus In this mode the channel 2 reading is output first followed by the channel 1 reading With two bytes per reading four bytes for each set of readings will be output to the b
311. is program resets the digitizer and clears its status register Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L 1 0 path from PC to the digitizer via the E1406 Function Prototypes void rst_clr void ii SAREE RER RARER AS ARER ESAS AAAS A SARARAAEESAERERRERERRARER RARER A REET void main void Run the program rst_clr Reset and clear the digitizer ERPSSESSSSESSS SERIE SERIES SELES EESEE SESS ERERE ESSE EES RE SESE SEES ER ESSER EESSERS void rst_clr void IOOUTPUTS ADDR RST CLS 9 reset and clear the digitizer 24 Getting Started Chapter 1 Querying the After resetting the digitizer or cycling power the digitizer parameters are Dig itizer setto their power on values These values are listed in Appendix B Table Conti gur ation B 2 You can determine the creel reset settings or its current configuration using the command LRN The data returned by LRN is a semicolon separated list of each parameter setting HP BASIC 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Assign an I O path between the computer and the A D ASSIGN A_d TO 70905 Call the subprogram Lrn_conf A_d END SUB Lrn_conf A_d 80 Lrn_conf subprogram which queries the digitizer configuration 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 DIM Lrn 2000 INTEGER OUTP
312. isabled Channel 1 S E input impedance IMP 5 00000000E 001 Channel 1 S E input state STAT 1 enabled Channel 2 S E input filter INP2 FILT 0 disabled Channel 2 S E input impedance IMP 5 00000000E 001 Channel 2 S E input state STAT 1 enabled Channel 1 differential input filter INP3 FILT 0 disabled Channel 1 differential input state STAT 1 enabled Channel 2 differential input filter INP4 FILT 0 disabled Channel 2 differential input state STAT 1 enabled Input port select channel 1 FUNC VOLT1 Measurement range channel 1 VOLT RANG 1 02350000E 000 Input port select channel 2 SENS2 FUNC VOLT2 Measurement range channel 1 SENS2 VOLT RANG 1 02350000E 000 Reference oscillator freqency ROSC EXT FREQ 2 00000000E 007 Reference oscillator source ROSC SOUR INTernal VME bus data source VINS VME FEED MEM BOTH32 VME bus data transfer mode MODE OFF Local bus data source VINS LBUS FEED MEM BOTH Local bus data transfer mode MODE OFF Local bus readings per block VINS LBUS SEND POIN 2 00000000E 000 Interleaved transfer mode POIN AUTO ON 334 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 2 HP E1429A B Power On Reset Configuration Cont d Parameter Command Power on Reset Setting Arm count ARM COUN 1 00000000E 000 Arm delay DEL 0 00000000E 000 Arm source1 SOUR IMMediate Arm slope1 SLOP1 POSitive Arm level1 negative ARM LEV NEG 1 02241848E 000 Arm level1 positive POS 1
313. it for trigger The path through the states depends upon whether pre arm sampling is part of the measurement configuration Both paths begin with the digitizer in the idle state The digitizer enters the idle state when power is applied or following a reset or an ABORt This is the state in which the digitizer is configured using CONFigure and its low level commands Note When configuring the digitizer s arming and triggering hardware the configuration applies to both digitizer channels Thus both channels enter the same Arm Trigger state at the same time In arming and triggering commands where a channel can be specified such as SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt the configuration of the last channel specified or implied overrides the previous configuration of both channels The Pre Arm Path The digitizer is capable of pre arm and post arm sampling If pre arm samples readings have been specified SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt in addition to post arm samples the digitizer moves to the wait for trigger state when INITiate MMediate is executed and begins sampling The digitizer continues to pre arm sample until the pre arm reading count is reached and until the digitizer receives an arm signal When the arm is received the digitizer begins post arm sampling as triggers are received The digitizer continues to post arm sample until the total number of samples pre and post arm sp
314. itiation register base 4516 The memory address registers base 23 16 to base 2716 are useful for determining if the digitizer has been re initiated by indicating the number of readings that have been taken For example 1f 100 readings are to be taken when the digitizer is re initiated the memory address registers point to the location where the 100th reading is to be stored Retrieving Data from Memory Initializing Digitizer Memory to Retrieve Data This section explains how to use register reads writes to retrieve readings from memory and transfer them over the VME VXI data transfer bus The procedure given in this section for reading data from memory assumes that data is stored under the following digitizer configuration restrictions e asingle burst of post arm readings As with storing data in memory digitizer memory must be initialized before data is retrieved from memory The registers used in the data retrieval process are e traffic register base 0216 e pulse register base 0816 e memory control register base 2116 e terminal address register base 2B 16 e base address registers base 2D16 and base 2F16 e data register base 0C16 Appendix C Register Programming 385 Procedure 1 Place the last reading from the A D into memory A Using the traffic register base 0216 set the pulse register as the high speed clock source by setting bits 3 2 to 0 0 Retain the settings of the
315. itional information for application assistance 4 1 2 1 and similar notation refer to sections of IEEE Standard 1057 Trial Use Standard for Digitizing Waveform Recorders published July 21 1989 This document prescribes standard measurement procedures for several performance characteristics Full scale refers to the entire two sided range and of the A D NOT to the one sided interpretation customarily used by HP The usage here conforms to that defined by IEEE 1057 Equal amounts of memory are dedicated to channel 1 and channel 2 During measurements both channels sample simultaneously and send data to their respective portions of memory Memory is not dual ported and may not be read while it is being filled However data being routed to the memory may simultaneously be routed to the Local Bus or the VME Bus according to their respective speed capabilities Appendix A Specifications 317 Read Out To VME Bus After measurement completion memory read out may be requested for either channel separately or for both channels interleaved Memory access is via repeated reading from a single VME register address 16 or 32 bit accesses are permitted This is the channel I O model i e memory can not be mapped or shared as can VME memory Speed to VME Bus should be up to 2M transfers s 16 or 32 bit transfers 2M readings s or 4M readings s respectively however rates this high have not been tested with existing contro
316. itizer is in the idle state and can be configured If bit 1 is set to 1 the digitizer is in the initiated state and should not be configured 372 Register Programming Appendix C Setting the Digitizer Configuration Note Setting the Arm Sources Procedure The digitizer configuration covered in this section includes setting the arm sources setting the arm count setting the arm delay setting the reference source setting the trigger source sending arm immediate sending trigger immediate aborting measurements The trigger count pre arm and post arm reading counts and the sample rate are set when the timebase processor is initialized See Initializing the Timebase Processor in the section Re initiating the Digitizer for more information The registers used to set the arm sources are listed below e Arm Source register base 4916 e Arm Control register base 4B16 used when changing arm source while initiated The arm source can be set changed when the digitizer is in the idle state or while it is initiated 1 Setting changing the arm source in the idle state A Write the decimal equivalent bit pattern to the arm source register base 4916 2 Setting changing the arm source while initiated A Suspend the arm trigger by setting bit 2 of the arm control register base 4B 16 to 1 Retain the settings of the other register bits B Write the decimal equivalent bit pattern for the de
317. itored for a low to high transition When the bit is high 1 the next segment can be transferred Set up ARM STAR SOUR IMM ARM STAR COUN 2 SENS SWE OFFS POIN 10 TRIG STAR COUN 20 pg o Segment 1 readings Pre Arm readings e Post Arm readings UU UU UU UU UU Data register is accessed for each reading in the segment fe Segment 2 readings Pre Arm readings a Post Arm readings UU UU UU UU UU UU Partition Window 1 Init 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 Read Traffic Register base 02 6 Arm Status Register base 43 46 E1429A FIG3 13 6 Arm 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Unused Ready Busy Operation Status Group Condition Register STAT OPER PTR 512 STAT OPER ENAB 512 Figure 3 13 Monitoring the Partition Window During Segmented Reading Transfers Note It is only necessary to monitor the partition window bit when the digitizer readings are segmented and the data register is accessed at speeds available through an embedded controller Also monitoring bit 1 of the arm status register base 43 16 is faster than using SCPI commands to monitor condition register bit 9 Bit 4 of the traffic register base 0216 is monitored so that post measurement readings either segmented or non segment
318. izer 119 Routing the Signal to a Source The arm signal can be routed to the locations described above provided the port or trigger line is not also used as an input for a reference clock source arm source or trigger source Summarized below are the external sources available to the digitizer External reference clock sources Ext 2 BNC port ECLTRG lt n gt trigger line External arm sources Ext 1 BNC port ECLTRG lt n gt trigger line TTLTRG lt n gt trigger line External trigger sources Ext 1 BNC port Ext 2 port ECLTRG lt n gt trigger line TTLTRG lt n gt trigger line If one of these ports or trigger lines is an input source then that same port or line cannot be used to route OUTPut the signal Enabling the Synchronization Signal In order for the arm synchronization signal to be routed to the Ext 1 port or to an ECLTRG or TTLTRG trigger line the routing must be enabled This is done with the commands OUTPut EXTernal 1 STATe lt mode gt OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt For each command the lt mode gt settings are ON enables the port or trigger line to route the signal OFF disables the port or trigger line from routing the signal Multiple TTLTRG trigger lines are individually enabled or disabled by executing the OUTP TTLT lt n gt STAT command for each line Note The TTLTRG trigger lines are not independent with regard
319. izer memory real time measurement transfers from the digitizer A D e Multiple digitizers and interleaved transfers interleaved real time transfers from the digitizer A D The programming sequences for the first two configurations follow Chapter 2 contains example programs using these sequences Note Refer to Appendix D Local Bus Interleaved Data Transfers for programming information on transferring data from multiple digitizers in an interleaved sequence Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 159 Single Digitizer In a single digitizer configuration the digitizer is usually the data generator and a device such as the HP E1488 memory card is the consumer With this configuration the programming sequence is 1 Use the CONFigure command and the low level digitizer commands to configure the digitizer for the required measurements 2 Use the VINStrument subsystem to reset the digitizer s Local bus chip to set the Local bus transfer mode generate and to set the data source post measurement or real time transfer VINStrument CONFigure LBUS RESet VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt 3 Reset the consumer s 1 e memory card s Local bus chip and configure the consumer to receive data 4 Activate initiate the consumer 5 Use INITiate MMediate to activate the digitizer and start reading transfers Multiple Digitizers and In a configuration wit
320. izer2 ADDR_A check_error memory ADDR_MEM pe void initiate void int i 0 readings 20 swap 0 bytes 0 length 1 rdgs float rdy char If_remove 1 dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 20 sizeof float allocate computer memory for reading storage swap sizeof int each reading in memory is two bytes bytes 20 swap read 40 bytes IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM INIT 4 initiate the memory card IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM OPC 5 wait for INIT to parse before continuing IOENTER ADDR_MEM amp rdy enter OPC response from memory card IOOUTPUTS ADDR_A INIT 4 initiate the appender digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR_G INIT 4 initiate the generator digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR_G OPC 5 allow the readings to complete before retrieving them from the memory card IOENTER ADDR_G amp rdy enter OPC response from the digitizer IOOUTPUTS ADDR_MEM TRAC DATA SET1 15 retrieve readings from memory card IOENTERAB ADDR_MEM rdgs amp bytes swap enter readings and remove block header Y Continued on Next Page 90 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 remove line feed which trails the last data byte IOENTERS ADDR_MEM If_remove amp length convert and display the readings the generator digitizer readings occur first followed by the appender digitizer readings for i 0 i
321. k There are two possible count settings 1 point per feed channel or all points per feed channel Normally there is no need to set a count with this command because with VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO ON the power on and RST setting the number of points will automatically be matched to the current setting of VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED Therefore the count will normally be TRIGger COUNt 2 if VINS LBUS FEED is xxx BOTH or TRIGger COUNt 1 if the feed is xxx CHAN1 or xxx CHAN2 If VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO is set to OFF then the number of points sent per block must either be 2 for feed CONV BOTH or 1 for feeds CONV CHANI and CONV CHAN2 This setting is only allowed when the feed is one of the CONV xxx direct from A D converter settings The combination of VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO OFF and VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts 1 or 2 is needed only when the goal is to multiplex readings directly from multiple digitizers onto the Local bus Parameters MINimum and MAXimum will both set the same value which is the number of readings that will be transferred as determined by the current VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO and VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED settings Comments Executable when initiated No VINStrument Subsystem Command Reference 289 VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts AUTO e Coupled command VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND PO
322. l Rate Sampling TheHP E1429 digitizer s dual rate sampling feature allows pre arm readings and post arm readings to occur at different sample rates The following trigger sources specify dual rate sampling e DECLtrg VXIbus trigger line ECLTRGO paces pre arm readings ECLTRGI paces post arm readings e DEXTernal input port Ext 1 paces pre arm readings input port Ext 2 paces post arm readings e DTIMer TRIGger STARt TIMerl paces pre arm readings TRIGger STARt TIMer2 paces post arm readings When the dual rate sampling trigger source is DTIM one sample rate must equal the reference period For example if the digitizer s 20 MHz oscillator is used one sample rate must be 50 ns Similarly if VXI CLK10 is used one sample rate must be 100 ns 1 10 MHz If the reference source for DTIM is ECLTO ECLT1 or EXT2 one rate must be equal to the reference period The other rate can be any other valid sample rate given the reference source When the dual rate sampling trigger source is DECL or DEXT both sampling rates can be any periods you choose Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 123 Note It is recommended that pre arm readings use the faster of the two sample rates One additional sample pulse at the pre arm rate after the arm occurs is required for the sample rate to change The digitizer does not sample on this additional pulse Post arm sample pulses may be ignored depending on how fast they occur foll
323. l address is 40 If this address is not changed the base address of the digitizer s configuration registers in Al6is 148 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 1FC00016 40 64 16 1FC00016 A0016 1FCA0016 or decimal 2 080 768 40 64 2 080 768 2560 2 083 328 Given the A16 base address and the offset of the Offset register 06 from Figure 3 12 the digitizer s A24 base address can be determined as shown in the program A24_READ C A24_READ C This program reads the digitizer s A24 base address Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library define CMD_MOD 70900L I O path between the digitizer and the Command Module Function prototypes long get_base_addr void ERSSESSSS SESS SASSI S SESS SESS SE SESEE EE ERE BEERS SESEE EES ES SEARS SES EE EES SE EES SE SS void main void long base_addr variable for digitizer A24 base address base_addr get_base_addr function call to calculate and return digitizer A24 base address printf nA24 base address ld base_addr RERSPEESSSS ESSER ESSER ASSSERESESSRSS ESAS SETAE SE SRE long get_base_addr void base address of A24 offset register in A16 address space long base_addr 0x1FC000 40 64 6 digitizer logical address is 40 Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Un
324. l time delay 630 us between segments while the CPU switches the memory address to point to the next segment It is possible to determine when data is available again by monitoring bit 1 of the A24 arm status register base 4316 This bit goes high when the data is again ready for transfer See Chapter 3 for additional information e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED ARM subsystem TRIGger subsystem e RST Condition None Example Send channel 2 of memory data out over the VXIbus whenever the VME data register is accessed VINS VME MODE GEN Set mode to GENerate VINS VME FEED MEM CHAN2 Set data source to be memory channel 2 VINS VME MEM INIT Begin sending data to VXIbus when the VME A24 register is read CONFigure VME MODE VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE lt mode gt selects the operating mode for the VME bus The only available modes are GENerate and OFF This command is used when it is desirable to transfer data over the VME bus by reading the data register at offset 12 0C16 in A24 address space VINStrument Subsystem Command Reference 295 VINStrument CONFigure VME SEND ADDRess DATA Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode discrete GENerate OFF none Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command Yes VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE GENerate is not allowed unless VINStrument CONFigu
325. ld Setting bit 2 to 1 sets arm trigger hold which prevents the digitizer from accepting arm signals from any source except an arm immediate writing any value to base 4116 This bit is used to suspend arming while changing the arm source when the digitizer is initiated triginf Setting bit 1 to 1 sets the digitizer to accept an infinite number of arm triggers The bit overrides the arm count registers however the arm count remains active Thus if a number of arms less than the arm count have occurred when bit 1 is set the counter will keep track of the number of arms which have occurred When bit 1 is cleared 0 the digitizer returns to the idle state if the arm count was reached Otherwise arms are accepted until the arm count is reached delay ref When bit 0 is set to 1 the arm delay is derived from the reference clock When bit 0 is cleared 0 the arm delay is derived from the reference clock 10 See Setting the Arm Delay for more information The Trigger Source Register base 4D16 The trigger source register is used to set the digitizer s trigger sample source The register bits are defined below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 4D16 128 64 32 16 8 4 gt i Purpose Sample Sample Sample Trigger Source Internal TTL Hold Infinite Once Sources Setting 0 OFF 0 OFF 0 OFF 000 111 00 11 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON Trigger Source Register
326. led command No e Related commands DMC RMC e RST Condition none PUD lt data gt stores the specified data in the HP E1429 s non volatile calibration memory The data must be sent in IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite block format Calibration security must have been previously disabled The query form returns the current protected user data in IEEE 488 2 definite block format The query form may be executed regardless of the state of calibration security Chapter 4 Command Reference 304 RCL Note When shipped from the factory the protected user data area contains information regarding when the HP E1429 was last calibrated Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mask block O through 63 characters none data or string Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e RST Condition unaffected e Power On Condition unaffected Example Setting the protected user data PUD 17Unit 5 Set data to Unit 5 RCL RCL lt number gt restores a previously stored programming state from one of the 10 possible stored state areas Number indicates which of the stored state areas should be used This command affects the same command settings as does RST Notable exceptions include MEMory BATTery STATe the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECurity command state Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values
327. llers To Local Bus E1429B only After measurement completion memory read out may be requested for either channel separately or for both channels interleaved Data may also be routed to Local Bus in real time while digitizing is occurring Speed is up to 40 MBytes s 20 Mreadings s for either channel separately or 80 MBytes s 40 Mreadings s for both channels interleaved Memory Size 524 288 readings per channel 512K 1K 1024 Nonvolatile memory A battery and associated support functions are provided to make the memory non volatile for 4 years nominal Battery life can be extended to 7 years nominal shelf life by electronically disconnecting it A register indicates low battery Partitions Segments When pre arm readings are to be taken and ARM COUNtis from 1 to 128 memory is partitioned This permits each partition to be used as a circular buffer without disturbing data already recorded in other partitions Each partition records data both pre arm and post arm data from one arm event Number of Partitions 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 or 128 Partitions are always equal sized The number of partitions is sufficient for the value programmed for ARM COUNt For example an ARM COUNt value of 5 6 7 or 8 will cause 8 partitions to be created 318 Specifications Appendix A Total Readings per Partition total memory size number of partitions When the non volatile mode of memory is enabled this number is reduced by
328. lt readings i rdgs i 16 if rdgs i gt 2047 rdgs i lt 2046 printf nReading overrange else printf nReading d 6E i rdgs i 0 0025 free rdgs JERERERRRARARRARARER RARE RRA RENERRERARRARARDARARDARARDARARDARARDARRADARARDAR AE void rst_clr long address Reset and clear the instruments IOOUTPUTS address RST CLS 9 E TPO TE Ce Ty OPO PEC TPCT OCU GC TPCT COP POS COOP OPPO STOOPS GOOEY void check_error char array long address char _ into 161 intlength 160 IOOUTPUTS address SYST ERR 9 Query error register IOENTERS address into amp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 91 while atoi into l 0 printf Error s in s n n into array length 160 IOOUTPUTS address SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS address into amp length Comments 1 GENerator Digitizer Configuration Channel 1 of the GENerator digitizer is CONFigured for 10 readings on the 5V range Before setting the digitizer s Local bus configuration the Local bus chip is reset Next the Local bus mode is set to GENerate and the feed data source is set to MEMory CHANnell 2 APPender Digitizer Configuration Channel of the APPender digitizer is CONFigured for 10 readings on the 5V range F
329. lude lt stdlib h gt include e1429 h E1429 E1429 WORD lAddr MessInst lAddr SetMapping l MAP_EXTEND 0 1 NULL Map ULONG E1429 GetLongDataReg void ULONG Result IMGet 0x0c amp Result 1 return Result 82 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Local Bus Data Transfers The following programs demonstrate e how readings are transferred over the Local bus from a single digitizer to the HP E1488 memory card LOCAL_AD C e how readings in digitizer memory are transferred over the Local bus from two digitizers to the HP E1488 memory card LBUS2PST C e how readings from two digitizer A Ds are transferred over the Local bus to the HP E1488 memory card LBUSAUTO C For completeness the entire C language versions of these programs are listed The programs are also contained on the example programs disk HP p n E1429 10302 LOCA L AD C This program transfers readings from both digitizer channels to the HP E1488 memory card The readings are tranferred directly from the digitizer A Ds LOCAL_AD C This program demonstrates a Local bus data transfer directly real time from the HP E1429B digitizer A Ds to the E1488A memory card Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L
330. m TRIGger STARt TIMer1 TRIGger STARt TIMer2 SENSe SWEep POINts e RST Condition TRIGger STARt SOURce TIMer Example Setting the start trigger source TRIG SOUR ECLTO A reading will be taken with each ECLTO pulse STARt TlMer 1 TRIGger STARt TIMer 1 lt period gt specifies the time period between each sampling event The time period must be a multiple of the reference oscillator period with allowable multiples being 1 2 4 10 20 40 1E8 2E8 4E8 See the table below for the exact periods available with the internal 20 MHz reference Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units period numeric reference period to seconds reference period 4E8 MINimum MAXimum 278 Command Reference TRIGger Subsystem Comments TRIGger STARt TIMer 1 e Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command This command is coupled to the TRIGger STARt TIMer2 command and TRIGger STARt SOURce command as noted below Unless TRIGger STARt SOURce is DTIMer the settings of TRIGger STARt TIMerl and TRIGger STARt TIMer2 are not coupled and changing one will not affect the setting of the other If TRIGger STARt SOURce is DTIM then both TRIGger STARt TIMerl and TRIGger STARt TIMer2 are used and there is a coupling between the two settings The relationship between the two settings is such that one of these two values must be exactly one reference oscillator period and the other
331. m the digitizer are separated into two groups common commands and subsystem commands Common commands begin with an asterisk and include commands such as RST CLS OPC Chapter 4 contains a complete listing of the digitizer s common commands Subsystem commands are those commands which configure the digitizer Each subsystem is a set of commands that roughly corresponds to a functional block inside the digitizer Figure 1 4 identifies the SCPI subsystems used with the digitizer Arm source Arm count Arm delay ARM Subsystem Trigger source Trigger count Sample rate INPut Subsystem A D Enable input Input impedance SENSe Input filter Subsystem TRIGger Subsystem Digitizer reading format Non volatile memory enable FORMat Subsystem MEMory Subsystem Reference oscillator source Pre and post arm reading count Measurement range ABORt Subsystem Abort measurements Retrieve readings other subsystems INITiat ate GONFIgUIS Subsystem Subsystem Subsystem MEASure CALibration Initi DIAGnostic nitiate measurements OUTPut Virtual VME bus data transfers INStrument Local bus d STATus Subsystem ocal bus data transfers SYSTem E1429A FIG1 4 Figure 1 4 HP E1429A B Digitizer Command Subsystems Chapter 1 Getting Started 33 Usi ng the MEASure Each time the digitizer takes a reading it does so from a con
332. mat Data is transferred over the VME bus in the digitizer s packed data format Readings are 16 bits or 32 bits depending on the source specified by the VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED lt source gt command The source parameters are listed in Chapter 3 under the section Setting the VME bus Transfer Mode 66 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 4 System Configuration The system configuration on which the program VME_REAL C was developed is listed on page 1 10 VME_SEG1 C VME_SEG1 C This program demonstrates how to transfer segmented readings over the VME bus The program sets up 2 bursts segments of 10 pre arm and 10 post arm readings A reading is taken each time the digitizer s data register is accessed and is transferred real time over the VME bus Before the next burst is taken bit 1 of offset register 43h is monitored to determine when the next segment of readings can be taken Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L 1 0 path from the PC to the digitizer define CMD MOD 70900L Path from the PC to the Command Module Function Prototypes long get_base_addr void void rst_clr void void ad_conf void void ad_read long base_addr void check_
333. mbedded controller and replace DIAG PEEK DIAG POKE and DIAG UPL SADD with the appropriate SICL reads and writes 342 Register Programming Appendix C Addressing the Registers Access to the digitizer s registers is through addresses mapped into A24 address space At power on the system resource manager HP E1406 reads the digitizer s Device Type register in A16 address space to determine the amount of A24 memory the digitizer needs 4096 bytes The resource manager allocates a block of A24 memory to the digitizer and writes the base starting address into the digitizer s Offset register also in A16 space Figure C 1 is an example of how the HP E1406 resource manager maps the digitizer registers into A16 and A24 address space E1406 ADDRESS MAP FFFFFFy 6 221000 6 OFFSET REGISTER A24 Register Address A24 Base Address Register Offset 00000 6 BREES X A24 Base Address can be determined by SPACE e Noting the offset assigned by resource manager during the power on sequence e Executing VXI CONFigure DeviceLIST e Reading the A16 offset register 2200005 J HP E1429 A24 Address space REGISTER 221000 y y OFFSET 16 BIT WORDS SE16 220000 4 200000 6 3016 o o 200000 6 o o REGISTER 2 2 IFCOOO ADDRESS OE Data Low Register 200000
334. measurement data will be preserved in the HP E1429A s internal memory when power fails or the instrument is turned off Note For data to be saved MEMory BATTery STATe ON must be set before the readings are taken i e before the INITiate MMediate command is sent Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units state discrete OFF ON O 1 none Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes The state is coupled to the maximum trigger count e RST Condition not affected e Power On condition The factory setting for MEMory BATTery STATe is OFF The battery state does not change at power down or power on e Enabling the battery abbreviates the power on selt test A complete self test is executed with TST which erases memory Example Enable memory to be non volatile MEM BATT ON Turn the battery on 240 Command Reference MEMory Subsystem MEMory BATTery CHARge BATTery CHARge MEMory BATTery CHAR ge returns 1 if the battery has sufficient charge to maintain memory and returns 0 if the battery has insufficient charge to maintain memory Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e Related commands MEMory BATTery STATe e RST Condition none Example Check the battery charge MEM BATT CHAR A 1 is returned if the battery has enough charge MEMory Subsystem Command Reference 241 OUTPut The OUTPut subsystem controls whic
335. mmand No CHANnel lt chan gt LABel DIAGnostic CHANnel lt chan gt LABel lt label gt puts the bit pattern specified into the lower 4 bits of all data on the specified channel These four bits are ignored when data is fetched or read with FORMat DATA ASCii or REAL but they are sent with FORMat DATA is PACKed and they are transmitted out over the local bus or VME bus when data is sent out via those routes This command could be DIAGnostic Subsystem Command Reference 217 DIAGnostic FETCh Parameters Comments Example 1 FETCh Parameters Comments useful for tagging data which is going out over the local bus or VME bus when multiple channels or HP E1429 s are involved Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel numeric 1 12 none label numeric O through 15 none MINimum MAXimum e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e Related Commands ABORt FETCh e RST Condition DIAG CHANI LAB 0 DIAG CHAN2 LAB 0 Tagging the data with channel number DIAG CHAN1 LAB 1 contain the bit pattern 0001 DIAG CHAN2 LAB 2 contain the bit pattern 0010 Make the lower 4 bits of all channel 1 data Make the lower 4 bits of all channel 2 data DIA Gnostic FETCh lt chan gt lt start_addr gt lt count gt returns count number of readings starting with the one at start_addr The data is returned in PACKed format block of 16 bit integers
336. mp length Enter error message if atoi into 0 Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit while atoi into l 0 printf Error s in array s n n into array length 160 IOOUTPUTS address SYST ERR 9 IOENTERS address into amp length 86 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Comments 1 Digitizer Configuration Both channel s HI differential inputs ports 3 and 4 are CONFigured for 10 readings on the 5V range Two readings channel 1 and channel 2 are taken on each sample trigger The sample rate as set by the CONFigure command is 50 ns 20 MHz Thus data is transferred at a rate of 40 MSamples 80 MBytes second Before setting the digitizer s Local bus configuration the Local bus chip is reset Next the Local bus mode is set to GENerate and the feed data source is set to CONVerter BOTH 2 Post Arm Readings When transferring readings over the Local bus from the digitizer A D all readings must be post arm 3 Initiating the Digitizer After the memory card is configured it is INITiated first so that it is ready to receive the digitizer readings When the digitizer is INITiated OPC is used to allow the readings to complete and be transferred before they are retrieved from the memory card 4 Reading Sequence and Format When this program executes the readings are transferred to the memory card and later displayed in the following sequence channel
337. mpedance ona Rea eR ddes YAGER ORR HR ESLER 370 Enabling the 10 MHZ Filter p52 eo ed Bo ee aa a REE AA A 370 Sowing The Measurement RANK ge eR A Oh RE EEE A 370 Arming and Tiggere nt ee Ree RK GLEE OES EERE EEE HES 372 Checking ihe lde Sime is e BK A RR MAREE ED AAA O 372 Setting the Digitizer CONFUCIO e es dede AR 313 DEBE ME AUSTEN ti AA A o AS aes Song he Ami COUNT i eke FS Oe RED CREE AAA 374 Satine He Armm Pelay coser RARA ORES KE 374 Seite the Reference SOU de eR AR 313 SEUA Tripper SOUS er RRA 376 Sending an Arm Immediate Signal oo a 376 Sending a Trigger Immediate Signal 377 Aborting Measuremi nis saasaa a SS Se EH a a 37I Remite the Digit o o ded eee a k e a E A 378 Initializing Digitizer Memory escroto 378 Initializing and Initiating the Timebase Processor ooo a 380 Retrisvina Date froni Memory sd s ge a eek ay ok A ee ed 385 Initializing Digitizer Memory to Retrieve Data o 385 Example Progam 22264 8 ASS SER SOE ED AA 388 Contents HP E1429A B Digitizer User s Manual 7 Appendix D Local Bus Interleaved Transfers o 405 Appends Contenls nie ERED AA AA 405 Interleaved Tar tas Br BA A ARA A e 405 Setting the Interleaved Transter M d ioococcrrorrsrs erro 406 Programming POCOS s sesa rra a e A A 407 Example PIOEGOL 25 445 4k 848 KES AAA 408 COMENS 2s ek Code eG ee derek Coe AAA he ee ee 413 8 HP E1429A B
338. mum selects 655350 reference oscillator periods delay The above values bound the valid range for period The period value is rounded to the nearest period that can be produced Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command Yes This command is coupled to SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts and to SENSe ROSCillator SOURce e If pre arm readings are specified then delay will be forced to 0 regardless of what value was specified for delay A settings conflict error will also occur 190 Command Reference ARM Subsystem Example ARM STARt IMMediate e The actual delay time after receipt of arm event is not precisely the delay time specified above There is an inherent delay of typically 230 ns plus an amount of sample period uncertainty Refer to Appendix A Specifications for additional information on the inherent delay e Related Commands TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts e RST Condition ARM STARt DELay 0 Setting the arming delay ARM DEL 001 Delay I millisecond after arm pulse before arming the start trigger STARt IMMediate Comments ARM STARt IMMediate will cause the start trigger to be armed immediately regardless of the selected ARM STARt SOURce The selected ARM STARt SOURce remains unchanged The INITiate MMediate command must have been sent before this command otherwise error 212 Arm ignored will occur There is no query form of this command e Executable
339. n SENSe ROSCillator SOURce INTernal Example Setting the Reference Oscillator Source SENS ROSC SOUR CLK10 Select VXI CLKIO line as oscillator source 256 Command Reference SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt SWEep The SENSe SWEep commands select how many readings will be taken during a measurement and how many of the readings occur before pre arm and after post arm the arm event Since the triggering and timebase circuits of the HP E1429 are shared between both sensing channels the settings for SENSe lt chan gt SWEep are the same for both values of chan 1 and 2 Setting SENSel SWEep values will also set SENSe2 SWEep values and vice versa Memory Usage Measurements which specify multiple bursts ARM STARt COUNt gt 1 of both pre arm and post arm readings SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts lt 3 with SENSe SWEep POINts gt 9 cause memory to be partitioned into segments to hold each burst of readings The HP E1429 will automatically allocate ARM STARt COUNt memory partitions large enough to hold the specified number of pre arm and post arm readings Since a large number of pre arm readings may occur before the arm event causes post arm readings to be taken each memory partition is treated like a circular buffer where pre arm readings may wrap or overwrite each other multiple times before the arm event occurs and the burst of readings completes with the post arm readings being taken After all p
340. na bit position enables the corresponding event a O disables it e Executable when initiated Yes Chapter 4 Command Reference 300 ESR e Coupled command No Related Commands ESR SRE STB e RST Condition unaffected e Power On Condition no events are enabled Example Enable all error events ESE 60 Enable error events ESR ESR returns the value of the Standard Event Status Register The register is then cleared all bits 0 Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e RST Condition none e Power On Condition register is cleared GMC GMC lt name gt returns the definition of the specified macro in IEEE 488 2 definite block format Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units name string defined macro name none data Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related Commands DMC e RST Condition none e Power On Condition no macros are defined 301 Command Reference Chapter 4 Example IDN Note Comments LMC Comments IDN Query macro definition GMC RESTART Query macro definition IDN returns indentification information for the HP E1429 The response consists of four fields HEWLETT PACKARD E1429 0 A 01 00 The first two fields identify this instrument as model number E1429 manufactured by Hewlett Packard The third field is 0 since the serial number o
341. nd Reference Chapter Contents This chapter describes the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI command set and the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands for the HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer Included in this chapter are the following sections e Command Types ti erei ceta na iae ee eee ee 178 e SCPI Command Format 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee 179 e SCPI Command Parameters 0 0000 e eee 180 e SCPI Command Execution 0 0 0 0 0000005 182 e SCPI Command Reference 0 000 184 e Common Command Reference 000 298 e HP E1429 Command Quick Reference 310 e SCPI Conformance Information 314 ABORT caiste dada Raids 185 SENSitivity o o o o 217 ZERO x5 a ia 217 ARM caros ca ets 2 187 SENSitivity o ooooooo 217 STARt SEQuence 1 187 CHANnel lt chan gt 217 GOUN Ear one pcia 190 LAB re no ei estes 217 DELAY ee ee 191 FETCh lt chan gt 005 218 IMMediate 192 MEMory lt chan gt 220 LEVel lt chan gt 192 Fl ca e ia 220 NEGatiVe 192 ADDResses o o ooo oo 220 POS IVO o o oooooo 193 PEEK ooo aveo E E des 221 SLOPelen gt oooooooo 194 POKE oe ta os rd 222 SOURcel lt n gt 196 SGETZ icono an a acta 223 SPU rana anal aia
342. nd of frame flag is sent with the GENerator s end of block flag 406 Local Bus Interleaved Transfers Appendix D Programming Procedure These commands are sent as a single command string in order to prevent Settings conflict errors Note that the readings per block and the interleaved transfer mode need only be specified when doing interleaved Local bus transfers The programming procedure for interleaved transfers is 1 Use the CONFigure command and the low level digitizer commands to configure the digitizers for the required measurements All digitizers must have the same trigger source and the same sample rate The digitizers must be synchronized such that readings are taken and the frame is transferred before the next sample occurs The example program which follows shows how the digitizers are synchronized using one trigger source for both digitizers 2 Use the VINStrument subsystem to reset the leftmost digitizer s Local bus chip to set the Local bus transfer mode to GENerate to set the data source to the digitizer s A D CONVerter CHANneln and to set the interleaved transfer mode Use the VINStrument subsystem to reset the inner digitizer s Local bus chip to set the Local bus transfer mode to INSert to set the data source to the digitizer s A D CONVerter CHANneln and to set the interleaved transfer mode VINStrument CONFigure LBUS RESet VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt VINStrument C
343. nd will then return the data Note that this could generate a deadlock error message if either the arming source or the trigger source is set to BUS because a software trigger could not break in after FETCh is sent e If desired the negative transition of the BUSY bit bit 8 in the STATus OPERation CONDition register can be used to determine when measurements have completed so a FETCh could execute without delay or threat of deadlock This status register bit can be enabled to generate an SRQ when readings are complete and thus interrupt the controller See the STATus subsystem in the Command Reference for more details e If error 230 Data corrupt or stale occurs and you must read the data the FETCh RECover command can be used to force data read with no error e FETCh or FETCh1 will return readings from channel 1 only FETCh2 will return readings from channel 2 only 224 Command Reference FETCh lt chan gt Subsystem e The data may be read any number of times as long as no parameters have changed which could affect new data such as changing TRIGger STARt COUNt ARM STARt COUNt SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts RST RCL etc If any measurement parameters are changed then error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur e The number of readings that FETCh is going to return for each channel can be determined two ways The simplest way is to use the FETCh COUNt query This will return how many readings will be fetched The s
344. nee 3 Differential Inputs A ouple s Input Impedance 1M0 20pF CO Input Range 102 3V to 102 35V i ki Channel 2 Overload Annunciator Indicates the input protection relay has opened due to a single ended Channel 2 Port 2 Single Ended Input input amplifier overrange DC coupled Impedance 50Q or 750 Input Range 1 0230 to 1 0235V Single Ended Input Impedance Indicates the input impedance of the single ended input Channel 2 Port 4 Differential Inputs DC Coupled Input Impedance 1MQ 20pF Input Range 102 3V to 102 35V Ext 1 Input normally TTL high e Outputs arm and trigger signals to synchronize other digitizers or devices O Input to externally arm or trigger the digitizer Ext 2 Input normally TTL High e Input for an externally supplied reference clock e Input to externally trigger the digitizer E1429A FIG1 1 Figure 1 1 The HP E1429A B Digitizer 14 Getting Started Chapter 1 HP E1429A B Table 1 1 lists the digitizer s VXIbus device information and factory VXlIbus _ settings Appendix A has the complete list of HP E1429A B operating Configuration specifications Table 1 1 HP E1429A B VXIbus Configuration VXlbus Device Information Device type message based servant C size 1 slot Connectors P1 and P2 Addressing modes A16 A24 Data transfer modes D08 D16 D32 slave A24 size 4096 bytes Dynamically Configurable Non interrupter non interrupt handle
345. ng address 4 of the memory segment Write the most significant byte of starting address 4 to the base O address register base 2D16 Write the least significant byte of starting address 4 to the base 1 address register base 2F16 Appendix C Register Programming 379 For example if the segment size is 10 000 readings the terminal and base addresses would be start address 524 287 9 999 514 288 514 288 4 128 572 1F63C16 terminal address 254 1 since 128 572 gt 65 535 base address F63C the 1 is part of the terminal address 254 1 MSB LSB 11110110 00111100 24610 6010 24610 is written to register base 2D16 6010 is written to register base 2F16 5 Enable memory to be written to A Enable data to be written to digitizer memory and enable the address counter by setting memory control register base 2116 bits 2 O to 101 Initializing and The second step in re initiating the digitizer is initializing and initiating the P 8 8 8 8 Initiating the timebase processor The timebase processor must be initialized each time Timebase the pre arm reading count post arm reading count or sample rate is changed Processor 380 Register Programming Appendix C The registers used to initialize the processor are summarized below Timebase reset e Abort and arm immediate register base 4116 e Timebase reset register base 5F16 e Interpolator control register base 6516 e
346. ng in memory 142 Readings transfer rates 137 Recalling digitizer configurations RCL 175 Reference clock 124 Reference source setting 124 Register descriptions arm count 374 arm delay 360 arm source 373 Register interface 105 Register programming aborting measurements 377 setting the arm count 374 setting the arm delay 374 setting the arm source 373 Register based programming example program system configuration 341 Registers arm count 374 arm delay 360 arm source 373 Removing the arbitrary block header 135 Reset configuration 25 Resetting and clearing the digitizer 23 Resolution reading 136 Retrieving readings using DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress 141 Retrieving readings using READ 139 Retrieving readings with the FETCh subsystem 139 Retrieving readings determining the number of 140 Retrieving readings methods 137 Retrieving readings transfer speeds 137 Routing the signal to a source 120 128 S Safety warnings 10 Sample period description 122 setting 122 Sampling dual rate 123 Saving digitizer configurations 174 SAV 175 SCPI Conformance Information 314 SCPI command control input section 106 SCPI command coupling 182 SCPI command execution 182 SCPI command listings as found in the manual 28 SCPI command parameters 180 SCPI Commands 177 Format 179 Reference 184 SCPI Conformance Information 314 SCPI programming 28 SCPI programming introduction 3
347. ng input signal arms the digitizer 116 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Note Setting the Arm Delay Note Setting the Arm Count The Arm Level Range When setting the input voltage level which arms the digitizer the levels are restricted to the current signal range as set by the expected value parameter of the CONFigure or MEASure command or as set by the SENSE VOLTage RANGE command Table 3 1 lists the digitizer s signal ranges When level arming arms that occur because of multiple passes through the arm level are ignored until the trigger count is reached There is an inherent delay of typically 230 ns plus an amount of sample period uncertainty from when an arm is received to when the arm is accepted When the digitizer is taking only post arm readings a delay in addition to the inherent delay can be specified with the command ARM STARt DELay lt period gt The range for lt period gt is based on the frequency of the reference clock If T is the reference period then the arm delay period is expressed as 0 to 65534T in steps of T 66540T to 655350T in steps of 10T Using the digitizer s internal 20 MHz reference this is 0 to 3 27 ms 3 32ms to 32 76 ms Appendix A Specifications contains additional information on the inherent arm delay The arm count is the number of reading cycles bursts the digitizer will take on each channel before it returns to the idle state The arm coun
348. ngs made previously on input port 1 or vice versa Just note that the currently active settings may change when switching between input ports on a given channel The selection mechanism for specifying which of two ports is connected to a given channel is the SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion VOLTage DC lt port gt command See the SENSe FUNCtion command for more information Note The input filter impedance and state can be changed while the HP E1429 is taking readings initiated Due to settling times associated with changing these parameters readings taken during this period may have unexpected values Subsystem INPut lt port gt Syntax FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt IMPedance lt impedance gt STATe lt mode gt 232 Command Reference INPut lt port gt Subsystem FILTer LPASs STATe Parameters Comments Example IMPedance INPut lt port gt FILTer LPASs STATe INPut lt port gt FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt enables or disables the 10 MHz input filter Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units port numeric 1 2 3 4 none mode boolean OFF O ON 1 none Executable when initiated Yes Coupled Command No Enabling or disabling the filter while the digitizer is taking readings initiated may cause unexpected reading values due to relay settling during the transition Enabling the filter on an input port does not affect the input filter setting on th
349. nostic 80 intlength 256 float tst IOOUTPUTS ADDR TST 5 send the self test command IOENTER ADDR amp tst enter the code printf dinin int tst display the code if tst 0 IOOUTPUTS ADDR SYST ERR 9 query error register IOENTERS ADDR message amp length enter error message printf Error s n n message print error message IOOUTPUTS ADDR DIAG TEST 10 get diagnostic information IOENTERS ADDR diagnostic amp length on self test error printf Diagnostic information s n diagnostic Resetti ng and The commands used to reset and clear the digitizer are Clearing the Digitizer RST CLS OPC OPeration Complete is often executed after RST and CLS to allow the reset and clear to complete before program execution continues Resetting the digitizer sets it to its power on configuration and clearing the digitizer clears its status registers Additional information on the status registers is located in Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Getting Started 23 HP BASIC 10 Assign an I O path between the computer and digitizer 20 ASSIGN A_d TO 70905 30 COM A_d 40 Call the subprogram 50 Rst_cls 60 END 70 80 SUB Rst_cls 90 Rst_cls subprogram which resets and clears the digitizer 100 COM A_d 110 OUTPUT A_d RST CLS OPC reset and clear 120 ENTER A_d Complete 130 SUBEND RSTCLS C RSTCLS C Th
350. ns to the most recently attempted CAL GAIN or CAL ZERO Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel numeric 1 2 none e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No 216 Command Reference DIAGnostic Subsystem DIAGnostic CALibration lt chan gt GAIN SENSitivity CALibration lt chan gt GAIN SENSitivity DIAGnostic CALibration lt chan gt GAIN SENSitivity returns a real number which is the sensitivity constant calculated for use during the most recently executed CAL GAIN command The channel parameter is irrelevant because the data returned always applies to the last executed CAL GAIN command regardless of which channel was involved Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel numeric 1 2 none Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No CALibration lt chan gt ZERO SENSitivity DIAGnostic CALibration lt chan gt ZERO SENSitivity returns a real number which is the sensitivity constant calculated for use during the most recently executed CAL ZERO command The channel parameter is irrelevant because the data returned always applies to the last executed CAL ZERO command regardless of which channel was involved Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units channel numeric 1 2 none Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Co
351. nsition to be recognized and the negative transition to be ignored Because the application is interested in the high to low transition the transition filter is set for a negative transition of bit 6 STATus OPERation NTRansition 64 and to ignore the positive transition STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 2 Setting the Enable Register When the high to low transition occurs the event is recorded by setting to 1 a corresponding bit in the event register Event register bits are set from low to high regardless of the transition recognized by the transition filter In order for the controller computer to know that the event has occurred the enable register is set such that the arm event sets a bit in the status byte STATus OPERation ENA Ble 64 3 Reading the Status Byte Once the program initiates the digitizer INIT command the program continually monitors the digitizer status byte using STB When the arm event occurs bit 7 in the status byte is set Status byte bits are also set from low to high regardless of the transition recognized by the transition filter This signals the controller computer that the event occurred At this point the program exits the loop and then prompts the user to press Enter which then triggers the digitizer TRIGger IMMediate Additional information on the digitizer status groups and on using the registers in the groups can be found in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer 1
352. nsmitting a list of data Sets the VME VXI data transfer bus data source Places the digitizer in the wait for trigger state and starts the data transfer from digitizer memory to the VME VXI data transfer bus Sets the VME VXI data transfer bus mode Returns the A24 offset address used to read measurement data from memory Indicates the virtual instrument capability of the digitizer Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference 313 SCPI Conformance Information The HP E1429A B 20 MSa s 2 Channel Digitizer conforms to the SCPI 1992 0 standard The following tables list all the SCPI confirmed approved and non SCPI commands that the HP E1429A B can execute Table 4 2 SCPI Confirmed Commands ABORt ARM START SEQuence 1 COUNt lt count gt DELay lt period gt IMMediate LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt POSitive lt voltage gt SLOPe lt n gt lt edge gt SOURCce lt n gt lt source gt CALibration lt chan gt DATA lt block_data gt GAIN lt readings gt lt period gt MALue lt number gt ZERO lt readings gt lt period gt lt mode gt CONFigure lt chan gt Ray VOLTage DC lt size gt expected value gt lt resolution gt E lt input port gt FETCh lt chan gt FORMat DATA lt type gt lt ength gt INITiate IMMediate INPut lt port gt FILTer LPASs S
353. nt CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate Chapter 4 Command Reference 183 Li nking Commands Linking commands means sending multiple commands in the same output string This is done to avoid settings conflict errors since command coupling interactions are not resolved until the carriage return CR is received Linking IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Use a semicolon between the commands For example RST CLS OPC Linking Multiple SCPI Commands A semicolon is used to separate commands within the same subsystem and saves typing For example sending this command message TRIG SOUR TIM TIM1 100E 9 COUN 100 Is the same as sending these three commands TRIG SOUR TIM TRIG TIM1 100E 9 TRIG COUN 100 When linking commands in different subsystems a semicolon and a colon are used For example ARM SOUR IMM COUN10 TRIG SOUR TIM TIM1 100E 9 COUN 30000 Command Choices Some commands are listed as two commands separated with a vertical bar 1 This means that either command name can be used For example you could use either STAR or SEQ1 when STARt ISEQuence1 is shown SCPI Command Reference This section describes the SCPI commands for the HP E1429 Digitizer Commands are listed alphabetically by subsystem and alphabetically within each subsystem A command guide is printed in the top margin of each page The guide indicates the first command listed on that page 184 Command Reference Chapter
354. nt appended to this message for a description of the error 1009 Error during gain cal An error occurred during gain calibration Refer to the statement appended to this message for a description of the error 1010 Error during linearity cal An error occurred during linearity calibration Refer to the statement appended to this message for a description of the error 1015 A D control register not responding The serial interface register was not working properly at power on 1016 Illegal during LBUS or VME memory transfer The command can not be executed while a VME bus or Local bus data transfer is in progress 1017 Battery too low data may be lost The battery does not contain sufficient charge to maintain memory over an extended period This error occurs when readings are taken when the battery is enabled disabled or during the self test 1018 Battery backed data corrupt This error is due to a low battery charge or if the battery is enabled after readings are in memory Appendix B Useful Tables 339 Table B 3 HP E1429A B Error Messages Cont d Code Message Description 1019 Data loss detected during LBUS Readings from the digitizer A D were lost during a transfer Local bus transfer This error usually occurs when multiple digitizers are used and arming triggering signals between them cause readings to b
355. ntents of the event register and the enable mask are logically ANDed bit for bit if any bit of the result is set the summary bit for that register is set in the status byte The status byte summary bit for the Operation status register is bit 7 for the Questionable Signal status register bit 3 Operation Status Register Only bits 0 CALibrating 6 Waiting for ARM 8 BUSY and 9 READy are defined for the HP E1429 All other bits are always zero Bit 0 CALibrating Set 1 during the execution of the CALibration ZERO CALibration GAIN or CALibration DELay command Cleared 0 otherwise Bit 6 Waiting for ARM Set 1 when waiting for a start arm Cleared 0 when a start arm is accepted or when measurement is aborted Bit 8 BUSY Set 1 by the INITiate MMediate VINStrument CONFigure VME MEMory INITiate or VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate command Cleared 0 when the measurement is complete or is aborted returning the digitizer to the idle state Bit 9 READy Set 1 when the digitizer memory segment is ready for data storage Cleared 0 while the digitizer is partitioning the next memory segment STATus Subsystem Command Reference 265 STATus OPC INITiate Questionable Signal Status Register Only bits 0 VOLTage 2 TIME and 8 CALibration are defined All other bits are always 0 Bit 0 VOLTage Set 1 if an overload voltage is detected during a measurement Cleared 0 otherwise
356. ntinues down to the wait for arm state if ARM STARt COUNT is not yet satisfied e Wait for arm In this state the instrument waits for the specified ARM event to occur before exiting to the wait for trigger state to make a measurment e Wait for trigger In this state the instrument waits for the specified trigger event to occur and when it occurs a reading is taken After a reading is taken the cumulative number of readings taken thus far is compared to the count specified in TRIGger STARt COUNt or SENSe SWEep POINts When the count is met the state is exited otherwise the instrument waits for another trigger and takes another reading Upon exit from this state the instrument goes to the initiated state and checks to see whether or not ARM STARt COUNT is satisfied The following controls can be specified from the TRIGger STARt subsystem e The number of triggers readings to occur before the digitizer returns to the initiated state TRIGger STARt COUN e The source of the trigger TRIGger STARt SOURce e The sample time for each reading TRIGger STARt TIMer1 and TRIGger STARt TIMer2 Memory Usage Measurements which specify multiple bursts ARM STARt COUNt gt 1 of both pre arm and post arm readings SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts lt 3 with SENSe SWEep POINts gt 9 cause memory to be partitioned into segments to hold each burst of readings The HP E1429 will automatically allocate ARM STARt COUNt memory partitions large
357. nts Executable when initiated No Coupled command Yes VINStrument CONHigure LBUS FEED will be changed to MEMory BOTH VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE will be set to GENerate and VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE will be set to OFF The module receiving the data must have been previously set up so that it is ready to CONSume data When testing the Local bus you must send a minimum of 28 bytes and the byte count must be a multiple of 4 If less than 28 bytes are sent error 109 Missing parameter occurs If the byte count is not a multiple of 4 error 161 Invalid block data occurs Because MEMory BOTH is the FEED the first data point is sent from channel 2 the second data point is sent from channel 1 the third data point from channel 2 and so on As mentioned above the lower 4 bits of each 16 bit reading sent out over the Local bus are determined by the current setting of DIA Gnostic CHANnel LA Bel for the channel the data was stored into These 4 bits may not have the same value as the data sent with this command Therefore the consuming module may receive slightly different data than what was downloaded with this command Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE RST Condition none Example Testing Local Bus operation VINS TEST DATA 240 lt 40 bytes of data gt Send 40 bytes 10 readings per channel using IEEE 488 2 definite length block 292 Command Reference
358. o the shift register from the A D serial register base 0516 The configuration is then latched to the A D with a single write to the A D strobe register base 0B 16 The bits of the shift register are defined as follows Only the unshaded bits are covered in this appendix Bits 55 52 are undefined and are not shown Appendix C Register Programming 351 Bit Name Function Bit Name Function 0 ENSYNC1 Enable Ext1 output 26 OPENINH Input protection inhibit 1 ENSYNC2 Enable Ext2 output 27 TESTLEDS LED test 2 ENEXT1 Enable Ext1 input 28 not used 3 ENEXT2 Enable Ext2 input 29 not used 4 CALSELA Lower bit of cal source select 30 not used 5 CALSELB Upper bit of cal source select 31 not used 6 TERM75 1 0 Ch1 input impedance 500 32 CH1HCAL 0 switches H_CAL to ch1 input 1 Ch1 input impedance 750 1 switches HI to ch1 input 7 SINGEND1 0 Ch1 S E input disabled 33 CH1LCAL 0 switches L_CAL to ch1 input 1 Ch1 S E input enabled 1 switches LO to ch1 input 8 DUMMY1 Chi dummy load select 34 ATT20DB 0 Ch1 20dB input attenuator ON 1 Ch1 20dB input attenuator OFF 9 FILTER1 0 Chi filter disabled 35 CH1POST 0 Ch1 200B post attenuator ON 1 Ch1 filter enabled 1 Ch1 20dB post attenuator OFF 10 PIGGY1 0 Ch1 attenuators disabled 36 CH1INPT 0 Ch1 differential input enabled 1 Ch1 attenuators enabled 1 Ch1 dif
359. oat Scale 0 0025 16 0 Reading Readings WORD malloc NSegments NReadings sizeof WORD for SegCnt 0 SegCnt lt NSegments SegCnt while Dig gt bGet 67 amp 2 0 Dig gt MGetDataReg UWORD Reading NReadings Reading NReadings printf Channel 1 n printf Seg1 Seg 2 n printf Reading Readings Reading2 Readings NReadings for ReadCnt 1 ReadCnt lt NReadings ReadCnt printf 2d 10 41 10 4f n ReadCnt Scale Reading Scale Reading2 printf n free Readings return 0 SEGTST32 CPP This program transfers 32 bit readings real time from the channel 2 and channel 1 A D converters to the VME bus In a 32 bit transfer the upper 16 bits are the reading from channel 2 and the lower 16 bits are the reading from channel 1 Figure 3 11 The include files and structure definitions used in this this program are listed following the program listing 74 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Options Compiler CodeGeneration Model Set to Large Options Directories Include Directories Add C EPCONNEC INCLUDE Options Directories Library Directories Add CAEPCONNECALIB Project Items INST CPP E1429 CPP SEGTST32 CPP BSICL LIB ERCMSC LIB include lt stdlib h gt include lt stdio h gt include e1429 h define BUFLEN 200 extern int ierrno int Measure E1429 Dig int ReadData E1429 Dig kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Ma
360. ommand No SPUT DIAGnostic SPUT lt bit value gt changes the state 0 or 1 of the specified bit of the serial control register to the value given This register is the one which controls things such as signal conditioning signal routing input filter state and input impedance Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units bit numeric O through 55 none Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No TEST DIA Gnostic TEST returns additional data on a failed self test The string returned may be up to 40 characters in length DIAGnostic Subsystem Command Reference 223 FETCh lt chan gt Subsystem Syntax FETCh Parameters Comments The FETCh command is used in conjunction with the INITiate MMediate command to obtain readings The FETCh COUNt command is used to indicate how many readings are available FETCh lt chan gt query only COUNt query only RECover query only FETCh lt chan gt returns readings from the specified channel in the format set by the FORMat DATA command An INITiate MMediate command must have been issued previously or else error 230 Data corrupt or stale will occur Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 12 none e If measurements are still being taken when the FETCh command is sent the command will wait until readings have completed a
361. on D Continue through the loop until the loop count is 0 This shifts each bit back to its original position 2 After the configuration is set write a value of 4 to the A D parallel strobe register base 0B 16 This copies each shift register bit to the shift register latch at which point the configuration is set Enabling the Inputs At power on or following a reset the single ended and differential inputs of channels 1 and 2 are enabled such that input signals can be applied An input can be disabled and later enabled using the following bits of the A D shift register Bit Name Setting Position 7 SINGEND1 0 Ch1 S E input disabled 1 Ch1 S E input enabled 12 SINGEND2 0 Ch2 S E input disabled 1 Ch2 S E input enabled 36 CH1INPT 0 Ch1 differential input enabled 1 Ch1 differential input disabled 44 CH2INPT 0 Ch1 differential input enabled 1 Ch1 differential input disabled Procedure With the bit positions known disable enable the inputs as required using the procedure for reading and writing to the shift register Appendix C Register Programming 369 Setting the Input Impedance The impedance of the single ended inputs can be set to 50Q or 75Q At power on or following a reset the impedance is set to 50Q The impedance is changed using the following bits of the A D shift register Bit Position Name Setting TERM75 1 0 Ch1 50Q input ime
362. on register will set the same bit in the associated event register Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units unmask numeric or O through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands STATus subsystem SRE STB e RST Condition unaffected e Power on Condition STATUS OPERation QUEStionable NTRansition O Example Setting the Operation register negative transition mask STAT OPER NTR 64 Set event bit when wait for arm state is entered OPERation QUEStionable PTRansition STATus OPERation QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt sets the positive transition mask For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the associated condition register will set the same bit in the associated event register STATus Subsystem Command Reference 269 STATus PRESet Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units unmask numeric or O through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e Related commands STATus subsystem SRE STB e RST Condition unaffected e Power on Condition STATUS OPERation QUEStionable PTRansition 327
363. or Programmable Instruments SCPI 184 Standard Event status group 170 standard event status enable register 171 standard event status register 170 Standard Event status register reading 171 Status Byte register reading 173 Status Byte status group 172 Service Request Enable register 173 Status Byte register 172 Status registers 165 Status registers example program 101 Status system registers 165 Storing readings in memory 130 Storing readings segmented 143 Storing readings unsegmented 142 Synchronizing the Digitizer 174 Syntax Variable Command 180 T Taking readings using CONFigure 40 Terminating commands 29 Transfer mode interleaved 406 Transfer rates data 137 Transition filter Operation status group 169 Questionable signal status group 167 TRIG ARM state diagram 112 TRIGger and SENSe subsystems overview 121 Trigger count setting 125 Trigger immediate using registers 377 Trigger signals synchronization 126 Trigger source setting 121 Trigger Synchronization signals 126 Triggering the Digitizer 121 Triggering and arming 111 U Unsegmented readings where they are stored 142 Using MEASure and CONFigure 34 Using the 1V single ended input range 110 Using the A D Shift Register 368 Using the digitizer status registers example program 101 Using the example programs 49 Using the packed reading format register based 372 V Variable Command Syntax 180 VINStrument subsy
364. or all digitizer s doing Local bus transfers the Local bus chip must be reset first Next the Local bus mode is set to APPend and the feed data source is set to MEMory CHANnell 3 Pre and Post Arm Readings When the Local bus data source is MEMory the readings are transferred over the Local bus from digitizer memory rather than directly from the A D In this case pre and post arm readings are allowed prior to the Local bus transfer 4 Initiating the Digitizers After the memory card is configured the card is INITiated first so that it is ready to receive the digitizer readings In a configuration with multiple digitizers in the APPend mode the APPender digitizer s is are INITiated next Because CONFigure sets the arm source to IMMediate INITiating the APPender digitizer causes it to take its readings After the APPender is INITiated the GENerator digitizer is INITiated OPC is used to allow the GENerator readings to complete and be transferred before they are retrieved from the memory card Note that the APPender digitizers must have finished taking data before the GENerator is finished All APPenders must be ready to pipeline the GENerator s data at the time the data is sent 92 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 5 Reading Sequence and Format When this program executes the readings are transferred to the memory card and later displayed in the following sequence GENerator digitizer reading 1 GENerator digitizer
365. or previous digitizer commands have completed Note that bits 7 5 4 3 2 and 0 have corresponding decimal values of 128 32 16 8 4 and 1 Reading the Standard Event Status Register The settings of the Standard Event Status register can be read with the command ESR The bits are cleared at power on or by ESR or CLS The Standard Event Status Enable register specifies which bits in the Standard Event Status register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The digitizer logically ANDs the bits in the Event register with bits in the Enable register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable register that are to be ANDed with bits in the Event register are specified unmasked with the command ESE lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Enable register bit to be unmasked Bits 7 5 4 3 2 and 0 have corresponding decimal values of 128 32 16 8 4 and 1 All unmasked bits in the Enable register can be determined with the command ESE The Standard Event Status Enable register is cleared at power on or with an lt unmask gt value of 0 Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 171 The Status Byte Status Group The Status Byte The registers in the Status Byte Status Group enable conditions monitored by the other status groups to generate a service requ
366. ort gt in the other digitizer commands In those commands lt port gt is optional as indicated by the brackets If a port number is not specified port 1 channel 1 is assumed The active input port is also selected with the command SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion lt function gt The lt function gt settings are VOLTage DC 1port 1 channel 1 VOLTage DC 2port 2 channel 2 VOLTage DC 3port 3 channel 1 VOLTage DC 4port 4 channel 2 Readings are taken on only one input port per channel Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 107 Enabling the Input Each input port has a relay that is used to enable and disable the input This Ports relay is controlled by the command INPut lt port gt STATe lt mode gt The lt mode gt settings are ON the input is enabled OFF the input is disabled For the single ended input the port is set to a high impedance At power on or following a reset each input port is enabled lt mode gt is ON However the port used for the measurement is specified by the lt input port gt parameter of CONFigure MEA Sure or by SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion Setting the Input The impedance of the single ended input port can be set to 50Q or 750 The Impedance impedance is set with the command INPut lt port gt IMPedance lt impedance gt The lt impedance gt settings are 50 sets single ended input impedance to 50Q 75 sets single end
367. ort 3 of channel 1 INIT Start the measurement FETC Get channel 1 readings CONFigure lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 215 DIAGnostic Subsystem DIAGnostic Syntax CALibration lt chan gt CONVerge GAIN SENSitivity ZERO SENSitivity CHANnel lt chan gt LABel lt abel gt FETCh lt chan gt lt start_addr gt lt count gt MEMory lt chan gt FILL lt num_segments gt lt count gt ADDresses PEEK lt address gt lt bits gt POKE lt address gt lt bits gt SGET lt bit gt SPUT lt bit gt lt value gt TEST CALibration lt chan gt CONVerge Parameters Comments The DIAGnostic subsystem contains several commands which were developed to test the instrument at the factory Several of these commands may prove useful for trouble shooting or special applications and so they are written up here query only query only query only query only query only query only query only query only DIAGnostic CALibration lt chan gt CONVerge returns a real array containing convergance data from the latest CAL ZERO or CAL GAIN command This array contains pairs of data points with the first data point in a pair being the average of the readings taken and the second data point is the new calibration constant which will be used on the next convergance iteration The channel number passed in is irrelevant as the data brought back always pertai
368. ost arm readings have been taken in a partition if ARM STARt COUNt is not yet satisfied the instrument directs the next burst of readings into the next memory partition Note There is a time window of typically 630 us where pre arm readings will be lost while the HP E1429 arranges for readings to be directed into the next memory partition If an ARM event ARM STARt SOURce or TRIGger event sample occurs during this time window it will be ignored with no error reported SENSe lt chan gt SWEep Subsystem Command Reference 257 SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt Number of Maximum Number Memory Segments of Readings 1 524 288 2 262 144 4 131 072 8 65 536 16 32 768 32 16 384 64 8 192 128 4 096 NOTE If the non volatile mode of memory is enabled then the maximum number of readings for each memory partition decreases by four These four memory locations in each segment hold the data necessary to recover all readings after a power failure Subsystem SENSe lt chan gt Syntax SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt POINts lt count gt OFFSet POINts lt count gt SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt specifies how many pre arm readings will be taken When pre arm readings are not 0 then there must always be at least 7 post arm readings taken Note that count is specified as a negative number Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of D
369. ost arm readings there must be at least three pre arm readings and seven post arm readings specified Note that pre arm readings are preceded by a minus sign 2 Total Reading Count The size parameter of the CONFigure command specifies the total number of readings pre and post arm SENS1 SWE OFFS POIN specifies the number of pre arm readings The number of post arm readings in this program is then 200 100 100 The total reading count can be changed without re sending the CONFigure command by using the TRIGger STARt COUNt command or SENSe SWEep POINts command 3 Pre arm Readings Pre arm readings start when the digitizer receives the INITiate MMediate command Pre arm readings continue until an arm is received Arms are ignored until the pre arm reading count is reached If the pre arm count is exceeded before the arm occurs the last SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts number of readings taken are stored in memory Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 53 Specifying a Sample Rate This program demonstrates e how to set the digitizer trigger sample source e how to set the sample rate In this example a 1 kHz square wave is sampled at a rate which includes the 11th harmonic All samples are post arm SAMPLE C RST CLS reset and clear the digitizer CONF 1 ARR VOLT 50 10 3 set 50 readings 10V range ARM SOUR1 IMM arm when put in wait for arm state TRIG SOUR TIM set trigger source to timer 1 TRIG TIM1
370. other bits B Send a clock pulse to the internal high speed bus by reading or writing any value to the pulse register base 0816 2 Initialize the memory control register A Set bits 2 O of the memory control register base 2116 to 0 Retain the settings of bits 7 3 3 Enable memory A Enable data to be retrieved from digitizer memory by setting the memory control register base 2116 as indicated Retain the settings of the other bits bits2 0 110 B Using the traffic register base 0216 set digitizer memory as the data source for the internal high speed bus and set the pulse register as the high speed clock source by setting the following traffic register bits as indicated bits 3 2 0 O clock source is pulse register bits 1 0 1 1 memory is internal bus data source The internal high speed bus links digitizer memory to the VME bus which is accessed by the user Figure 3 7 C Send a clock pulse to the internal high speed bus by reading or writing any value to the pulse register base 0816 4 Determine the starting address of the memory segment A The segment size which is the number of readings that were taken must be divisible by 4 The starting address is computed as starting address ending address segment size 1 The data retrieval procedure is for one segment of post arm readings Therefore the ending address 524 287 is the size of digitizer memory
371. ource bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg OxF3 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x02 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command send aclock pulse to the internal high speed bus to place the last A D reading into memory sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x08 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command initialize the memory control register by setting bits 2 O to 0 0 0 sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x21 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD 8bit_pat retain register settings set memory control register bits 2 0 to 0 bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg amp OxF8 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x21 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Programming 399 enable data to be read from memory and enable the address counter sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x21 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit_pat retain register settings set memory control register bits 2 0 to 1 10 bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg OxF8 0x06 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_add
372. ow Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 base 4516 register write initiates the timebase processor register read sample trigger Writing any 8 bit value to the register initiates the timebase processor Reading this register generates a sample trigger when the trigger source is an HP IB Group Execute Trigger or the IEEE 488 2 TRG command 354 Register Programming Appendix C The Arm Internal Bus Register base 4716 The function of the arm internal bus register is defined below Address base 4716 7 6 5 4 3 2 register write arm trigger i Writing any 8 bit value to the register generates an arm trigger when the arm source is an HP IB Group Execute Trigger or the IEEE 488 2 TRG command The Arm Source Register base 4916 The Arm source register is used to set the source and slope of the signal which arms the digitizer The register bits are described below Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 4916 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 Purpose Source 2 Arm source 2 Source 1 Arm source 1 slope slope Setting 0 positive 000 111 0 positive 000 111 1 negative 1 negative Bit Descriptions Arm Source Register Power on Reset Settings At power on or following a reset the arm source register is set to 0111 1111 or 7F16 Source 2 slope Bit 7 sets the slope of arm source 2 For all arm sou
373. ower on Reset Settings At power on or following a reset the memory control register is set to 0011 1000 or 3816 Backup Enable Bit 7 is used to enable disable the battery which maintains memory at power down TTL Mux and BNC Mux Bit 6 and bits 5 3 are used by the digitizer s timebase processor Their usage is not covered in this appendix Address Count Enable Bit 2 is used to initialize the memory address counter Setting bit 2 to 0 disables the memory address counter but sets it to receive the next memory address from the base address registers Setting bit 2 to l enables the address counter to receive addresses from the terminal address register thus allowing the counter to wrap around and make repeated passes through memory Memory Read Enable Setting bit 1 to 1 places digitizer memory in the read mode Data is placed on the internal high speed bus if enabled by bits 1 0 of the traffic register Memory Write Enable Bit 0 enables A D readings to be written to digitizer memory when bit 1 memory read enable is set to 0 Appendix C Register Programming 365 The Memory Address Registers base 2316 to base 2716 The memory address registers are read only registers that return the address where the last reading in the set will be stored These registers are useful for determining if the digitizer has been re initiated by indicating the number of readings that have been taken For example if 100 rea
374. owing the rate change Refer to Appendix A Specifications for additional information on dual rate sampling characteristics The Dig itizer When the digitizer trigger source is TIMer or DTIM dual rate sampling Reference Clock _ the sample reading rate is derived from a reference clock Figure 3 5 The commands used to select the clock source and its frequency are part of the SENSe subsystem SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt SOURce lt source gt Setting the Reference The reference source is set with the command Source SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator SOURce lt source gt The reference sources are CLK10 the VXIbus 10 MHz clock ECLTrg0 the VXIbus ECLTRG 0 trigger line ECLTrg1 the VXIbus ECLTRG 1 trigger line EXTernal2 the digitizer s Ext 2 BNC port INTernal the digitizer s internal 20 MHz oscillator This is the default source Specifying the External When the trigger source is TIMer or DTIM and the clock source is one of Reference Frequency _ the following ECLTrg0 ECLTrg1 EXTernal2 the digitizer processor must be informed of the reference frequency in order for TRIGger STARt TIMerl or TRIGger STARt TIMer2 to generate the correct sample rate This is done with the command SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt 124 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Note An active reference clock oscillator is re
375. pecifying an lt expected value gt of 1V in the MEASure or CONFigure command or by specifying a range of 1V in the SENSe VOLTage command SENS VOLT RANG 1 110 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Arming and Triggering The HP E1429 digitizer uses the SCPI Arm Trigger configuration shown in Figure 3 4 This section describes the Arm Trigger state sequence and identifies the different ways to arm and trigger the digitizer Idle State RST Abort Initiated State INITiate IMMediate no lt Pre Arm Sampling ARM START SOURce lt n gt lt source gt Wait for Arm State y TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt Wait tor Trigger State NX SENse lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt post arm sample ls the Pre Arm Reading Count Reached Has an ARM Been Received Is the Trigger Count Reached Wait for Trigger State yes TRIGger STARt COUnt lt count gt post arm sample Is the Trigger Count Reached E1429A FIG5 4 Is the Arm ARM STARt COUNt lt count gt Count Reached yes Figure 3 4 HP E1429 Digitizer State Diagram Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 111 The ARM TRIG The state diagram of Figure 3 4 shows that the digitizer operates within four State Diag ram states idle initiated wait for arm and wa
376. placed by a number No space is left between the keyword ECLTrg and the number because the number is part of the keyword SCPI Command Parameters Parameter Types Explanations and Examples The following information contains explanations and examples of the parameter types found in this chapter e Numeric Accepts all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation 123 123E2 123 1 23E2 123 1 23E 2 1 23000E 01 Special cases include MIN MAX and INFinity The Comments section within the Command Reference will state whether a numeric parameter can also be specified in hex octal and or binary H7B Q173 B1111011 e Boolean Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false Any non zero value is considered true ON OFF 1 0 180 Command Reference Chapter 4 e Discrete Selects from a finite number of values These parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting An example is the TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt command where source can be BUS ECLTrg0 ECLTrg1 EXTernall EXTernal e String STRING PROGRAM DATA parameters are enclosed with single quotation marks or double quotation marks Examples of string program data parameters are those associated with the OUTPut FEED commands OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED lt source gt OUTPut T
377. pre and post arm readings taken during each arm cycle SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC RANGe lt range gt Sets the digitizer measurement range SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC RESolution Queries the digitizer reading resolution STATus STATus OPC INITiate lt state gt Controls whether OPC OPC and WAI will complete immediately or wait for the measurement or data transfer to complete STATus OPERation QUEStionable CONDition Reads the settings of the condition register STATus OPERation QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt Specifies which bits in the event register are included in the summary bit STATus OPERation QUEStionable EVENt Reads the settings of the event register STATus OPERation QUEStionable NTRansition Sets the negative transition mask lt unmask gt STATus OPERation QUEStionable PTRansition Sets the positive transition mask lt unmask gt STATus PRESet Initializes the enable registers and transition masks and sets STATus OPC INITiate ON SYSTem SYSTem ERRor Reads the error codes and messages in SYSTem VERsion the digitizer error queue Returns the SCPI conversion to which the digitizer complies 312 Command Quick Reference Chapter 4 Table 4 1 HP E1429A B Command Quick Reference Cont d Subsystem Commands Description TRIGger ABORt TRIGger STARt COUNt lt number gt TRIGger STARt MMediate TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt
378. pulse each time a convert pulse TRIGger is sent to the A to D converter 242 Command Reference OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe Note These pulses will also be generated when data is read out of memory from the VINStrument LBUS or VINStrument VME subsystems Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units n numeric O 1 none source string EXTernal 1 none SENSe 1 2 ROSCillator TRIGgoer STARt SEQuence 1 Executable when initiated No Coupled Command No Note that if the feed is EXTernall then OUTPut EXTernal1 STATe must be ON in addition to OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe ON for an output to occur on the chosen trigger line The source of the synchronization pulse is independent for each ECLTRG trigger line Related Commands OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTPut EXTernal1 FEED OUTPut EXTernal1 STATe RST Condition OUTPut ECLTrg0 FEED TRIGger STARtSEQuence 1 OUTPut ECLTrg1 FEED EXTernal1 Example Setting the ECLTrg0 sync pulse source OUTP ECLTO FEED TRIG Output a pulse whenever a reading is taken ECLTrg lt n gt STATe OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt enables or disables the routing of the selected synchronization pulse to the specified VXIbus ECLTRG trigger line ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 OUTPut Subsystem Command Reference 243 OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED Parameters Par
379. quired for the digitizer to recognize and accept arm signals Setting the Trigger The trigger count is the total number of readings pre and post arm per Count arm event The trigger count is normally set by the lt size gt parameter of the CONFigure and MEASure commands However when you want to change the total reading count without entirely re configuring the digitizer the reading count trigger count can be set with either of the following commands TRIGger STARt COUNt lt count gt SENSe lt chan gt SWEep POINts lt count gt Setting the Pre Arm Pre arm readings are samples the digitizer takes before an arm signal is Reading Count accepted Pre arm readings start after the digitizer receives the INITiate MMediate command Readings continue until the pre arm reading count is reached and until the arm is received The command which sets the minimum number of pre arm readings is SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt lt count gt is specified as a negative number You must specify at least three pre arm readings and seven post arm readings Refer to the SENSe subsystem in Chapter 4 Command Reference for more details on setting the pre arm reading count If the pre arm reading count is reached and the arm has not occurred the readings continue and overwrite previous readings When the arm occurs the most recent number of lt count gt readings are stored in memory If an arm occurs before the p
380. r VXlbus Revision Compliance 1 4 SCPI Revision 1992 0 See side of module for power cooling requirements HP E1429A B Factory Settings Parameter Setting Logical Address 40 Servant Area 0 not used Bus Request Level 3 Input signals DC and AC which may be connected to this module are likely to include occasional overvoltage transients These overvoltages may be caused by motor inductances switching circuits q lightning etc If the input signal is likely to exhibit transients greater than 800 Vpk add external transient suppression circuitry to reduce transients to 800 Vpk or less Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 Caution The 800 Vpk level is a product safety test specification and does not assure correct product operation if 800 Vpk transients have been applied To maintain product functionality and performance do not exceed 42 Vpk on the single ended inputs or 102 4 Vpk on the differential inputs Preparation for Use This section contains configuration information specific to the HP E1429A B digitizer Note For more VXIbus system configuration information refer to the C Size VXIbus Systems Installation and Getting Started Guide The Digitizer The HP E1429A B digitizer logical address is used Logical Address e to place the digitizer in the servant area of a commander e g HP E1406 Command Module embedded controller or another instrument e to address
381. r 0x21 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set digitizer memory as the high speed bus data source and the pulse register as the clock source sprintf command DIAG PEEK ld d base_addr 0x02 8 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command IOENTER CMD_MOD amp bit_pat retain register settings set the data source and clock source bit_reg int bit_pat bit_pat gt 0 5 5 bit_reg bit_reg amp OxFO 0x03 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x02 8 bit_reg IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command Send a clock pulse to the internal high speed bus sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x08 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command write the terminal ending address to the terminal address register sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x2B 8 255 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set the base starting address most significant byte sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x2D 8 255 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set the base starting address least significant byte sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x2F 8 251 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command Continued on Next Page 400 Register Programming Appendix C initialize the transfer stages by sending three clock pulses to the internal hig
382. r 3 in the section Converting Packed Readings VME Bus Data Transfers The following programs demonstrate e how post arm readings are transferred from the digitizer s A D converter directly to the VME bus VME_REAL C e how segmented readings pre and post arm are transferred from the digitizer s A D converter directly to the VME bus VME_SEG1 C e how segmented 32 bit readings channel 2 and channel 1 combined are transferred from the A D converter to the VME bus The system configuration on which programs VME_REAL C and VME_SEG1 C were developed is listed on page 1 10 VME_REAL C VME_REAL C This program reads data directly from the digitizer s A D converter and places it on the VME VXI data transfer bus Each time the digitizer s data register is accessed a measurement is triggered and the reading is transferred to the VME bus during the same reading cycle Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library define ADDR 70905L VO path between the digitizer and PC define CMD_MOD 70900L I O path between the digitizer and the Command Module Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 63 Function prototypes long get_base_addr void void rst_clr void void ad_conf void
383. r 30 readings on channel 1 port 1 INIT Take the measurement FETC Get readings from channel 1 FETCh lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 225 FETCh lt chan gt COUNt Example 2 Reading back PACKed data HP BASIC program DIM Ndig 1 Count 9 Dimension parameters for header ASSIGN EX TO 70905 FORMAT OFF Turn format off for array data OUTPUT 70905 FETC1 Query for channel I measurement data ENTER EX USING X K K Ndig Count 1 VAL Ndig Strip the header preceeding the data ALLOCATE INTEGER Meas_data 1 VAL Count 2 Allocate an array to hold the data ENTER X Meas_data Read in the measurement data ENTER 70905 USING B Junk Need to strip off left over line feed COUNt FETCh lt chan gt COUNt returns the total number of readings stored in memory for the channel specified The count is the same for both channels so either channel may be queried Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 12 none Comments This command is most useful after an ABORt command has been issued on a measurement in progress The number returned will be the number of readings which were taken before the ABORt command forced measurements to stop If an infinite measurement was aborted then the number returned will be the maximum memory size if more than that number of readings were taken e Related Commands ABORt INITiate MMediate ARM STARt COUNt TRIGger S
384. ram you must compile and link the program to make an the Programs executable file To compile and link a program e Be sure the necessary paths have been added to the AUTOEXEC BAT file for the compilers to find the library and header files see the appropriate C Language manual to set the proper paths e Link the appropriate HP IB C library located on the HP IB Command Library disk that came with the HP IB Interface Card Use the following libraries Microsoft QuickCO clhpib lib Turbo C 0 tchhpib lib e If NOT compiling in the Large Huge memory model include the cfunc h header file located on the HP IB Command Library disk in the program Command Line Compiling To compile and link the programs from the DOS command line using the Large memory model execute the following from the directory containing qel or tec e Microsoft QuickCO qcl AL lt path program name gt lt path clhpib lib gt e g qcl AL b input c c qc2 lib clhpib lib e Turbo C 0 tcc ml lt path program name gt lt path tchhpib lib gt e g tec ml bAinput c c tc lib tchhpib lib Change the AL and mI parameters to the appropriate types when compiling in the smaller memory models see your C language manual for the parameter type For some programs executed under the Microsoft QuickC environment if may be necessary to change the stack size using the F option of the qcl command Chapter 1 Ge
385. rate setting the A D as the data source for memory and initiating the timebase processor Note that the registers must be read and written to in the sequence shown char command 80 float bit_pat 0 int addr_ptr data_ptr bit_reg 0 int tb_addr 0x41 0x5F 0x65 0x67 0x69 0x6B 0x7D 0x7F 1 int tb data 0 1 1 5 0 0 0 0 data_ptr tb_data reset the timebase processor by writing the values to the corresponding registers shown above for addr_ptr tb_addr addr_ptr 1 addr_ptr sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr addr_ptr 8 data_ptr IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command since only post arm readings are taken set the pre arm reading count to 1 write least significant byte of pre arm count sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x73 8 1 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command write most significant byte of pre arm count sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x75 8 0 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command set the trigger count post arm readings only by loading the post arm reading count registers This program sets up 20 post arm readings write least significant byte of post arm count count 3 sprintf command DIAG POKE ld d d base_addr 0x77 8 17 IOOUTPUTS CMD_MOD command strlen command Continued on Next Page
386. rces except a TTLTrg trigger line bits 6 4 001 and the HP IB GET command or TRG command bits 6 4 010 the slope should be set to positive 0 Arm source 2 Bits 6 4 set arm trigger source 2 Arm source 2 and arm source 1 are ORed together so that an arm from either source arms the digitizer Setting bits 6 4 as follows sets the arm source indicated 000 Ext 1 BNC connector 0 0 1 TTLTrg trigger line negative edge triggered 0 1 0 HP IB GET command or IEEE 488 2 TRG command negative edge triggered 0 11 arm when a specified input level on channel 1 is reached 100 arm when a specified input level on channel 2 is reached 1 0 1 ECLTrg0 trigger line 1 10 ECLTrg1 trigger line 1 1 1 OFF arm source 2 is disabled Appendix C Register Programming 355 Source 1 slope Bit 3 sets the slope of arm source 1 For all arm sources except a TTLTrg trigger line bits 2 0 001 and the HP IB GET command or TRG command bits 2 0 010 the slope should be set to positive 0 Arm source 1 Bits 2 0 set arm trigger source 1 Arm source 2 and arm source 1 are ORed together so that an arm from either source arms the digitizer Setting bits 2 0 as follows sets the arm source indicated 000 Ext 1 BNC connector 0 0 1 TTLTrg trigger line negative edge triggered 0 1 0 HP IB GET command or IEEE 488 2 TRG command negative edge triggered 0 11 arm when a specified input level on channel 1
387. re VME FEED lt source gt MEMory INITiate MODE lt mode gt SEND ADDRess DATA To configure the digitizer for VME bus data transfers e Use the CONFigure command and the low level digitizer commands to specify the number of readings the expected value of the readings the input port the arm source etc e Use the TRIGger STARt SOURce command to set the trigger source to VME for real time data transfers only e Use the VINStrument subsystem to set the VME bus transfer mode and data source e Use the INITiate MMediate command to initiate reading transfers The VME bus data transfer mode is set with the command VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE lt mode gt The lt mode gt parameters are GENerate VME bus data transfers are enabled OFF VME bus data transfers are disabled At power on or following a reset the lt mode gt is OFF When transferring data over the VME bus the Local bus transfer mode HP E1429B must be disabled This is done with the command VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE OFF Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 151 Setting the VME bus The source of the readings transferred over the VME bus is set with the Data Source command VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED lt source gt The lt source gt parameters are given below Sources beginning with MEMory are the post measurement sources modes sources beginning with CONVerter are the real time
388. re and Post arm Readings The MEMory The digitizer s MEMory subsystem contains commands which enable Su bsystem non volatile memory and which query the charge on the battery maintaining memory The commands in the subsystem include MEMory BATTery CHARge STATe lt state gt Enabling Non Volatile Digitizer memory is non volatile when the battery maintaining memory is Memory enabled with the command MEMory BATTery STATe lt state gt 132 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 The lt state gt settings are ON enables the battery memory is non volatile OFF disables the battery memory is lost when power is cycled factory setting If memory is to be battery backed the battery must be enabled before readings are taken Cycling power or resetting the digitizer does not affect the battery state set by MEMory BATTery STATe Battery life is normally four years if it remains enabled Battery life can be extended to approximately seven years if it is disabled when non volatile memory is not required Determining the To ensure that the battery has sufficient charge to maintain memory the Battery Charge command MEMory BATTery CHARge can be sent This command returns a 1 if the battery has sufficient charge to maintain memory If the battery does not have sufficient charge a 0 is returned Leaving the digitizer in the VXI mainframe with the power on will not recharge the battery A bat
389. re LBUS MODE is set to OFF or PIPeline e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE OFF Example Setting the VXIbus data transfer bus operation mode VINS VME GEN Set GENerate mode CONFigure VME SEND ADDRess DATA VINStrument CONFigure VME SEND ADDRess DATA returns two values A24 12 A24 indicates that the HP E1429 s A24 address space should be used for reading measurement data and 12 0C16 is the offset of the data register in A24 address space Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE TRIGger STARt SOURce VINStrument CONFigure V ME MEMory INI T ate e RST Condition A24 12 Example Querying the A24 address space offset VINS VME SEND ADDR DATA Query A24 offset for data reads 296 Command Reference VINStrument Subsystem IDENtity Comments Example VINStrument IDENtity VINStrument IDENtity returns a response consisting of 4 fields indicating the virtual instrument capability of the HP E1429 HEWLETT PACKARD VIRTUAL INSTRUMENT ANY ATOD 0 A 01 00 The first and last fields indicate that the HP E1429 conforms to revision A 01 00 of HP s Virtual Instrument Local Bus System Specification The second field indicates that the HP E1429 is a analog to digital converter The third field is reserved for future use e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled command No e R
390. re arm reading count is reached the arm is ignored and error 212 Arm ignored is generated Sending an Immediate In some applications the user may want to manually issue a sample trigger Trigger This is accomplished with the command TRIGger STARt IMMediate When the digitizer is armed wait for trigger state executing TRIG STAR IMM takes a reading regardless of the specified trigger source The trigger count is decremented by 1 and the selected trigger source remains unchanged TRIG STAR IMM is often used with TRIG SOUR HOLD to suspend triggering until the trigger is issued by TRIG STAR IMM Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 125 Trigger The trigger and reference clock signals can be routed to the following Synchronization locations Signals Ext 1 BNC port ECLTRG trigger line This allows the digitizer to synchronize other digitizers or events The commands used to output the trigger and reference signals are OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt e lt source gt TRIGger STARtISEQuence 1 Outputs a trigger signal to the ECLT lt n gt trigger line each time a convert pulse is sent to the A D converter Sample Trigger Input eres lle llo ll lt gt mes 25ns E1429A FIG3c e lt source gt SENSe 112 ROSCillator The significant edge of an ECL signal is the rising edge Therefore the ECLTrg lt n gt trigger line goes high with the falling edge of an extern
391. readings until the trigger count is reached Notice the CONFigure command specifies 10 readings trigger count 10 Therefore with an arm count of three 30 readings are taken before the digitizer returns to the idle state 2 Additional Information Digitizer arming and triggering is covered in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 51 Level Arming This program demonstrates e how to set the arm source such that the digitizer is armed when the input signal enters a specified voltage range window from a level outside the range e how to set the arm slope such that an arm occurs when the input signal enters the arm window from either a positive going or negative going direction e how to set the voltage levels which define the arm window For this example the arm signal should be applied to the HI input of port 3 with the LO input of port 3 grounded ARMLEVEL C RST CLS reset and clear the digitizer CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 10 3 set 10 readings on Diff port 3 ARM SOUR1 INT1 set arm source 1 to level arming ARM SOUR2 HOLD disable arm source 2 ARM SLOP1 EITH arm when signal enters window from either direction ARM LEV1 POS 4 set arm window lower boundary ARM LEV1 NEG 6 set arm window upper boundary ARM COUN 2 set two measurement bursts INIT put digitizer in wait for arm state FETCH retrieve readings after arms occur
392. readings use the faster of the two sample rates The reason is once the arm is received one addtional sample at the pre arm rate must occur before the post arm rate is used 3 Dual Rate Sampling Reference Sources The reference sources available with trigger source DTIMer are INTernal the digitizer s internal 20 MHz oscillator default source CLK10 the VXIbus system s 10 MHz clock ECLTrg0 the VXI backplane ECLTrg0 trigger line ECLTrg1 the VXI backplane ECLTrg1 trigger line EXTernal2 the digitizer s front panel Ext 2 BNC port When using any of these references one of the two sample rates must be set to the reference period Also the reference used must be specified with the SENSe ROSCillator SOURce command and if the source is ECLTrg0 1 or EXTernal 2 the frequency of the reference must be specified with the SENSe ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency command 4 Other Dual Rate Sampling Sources When the dual rate sampling source is DECLtrg ECLTrg0 paces the pre arm readings and ECLTrg1 paces the post arm readings The sample rates are determined entirely by the source s driving the trigger lines When the dual rate sampling source is DEXTernal front panel port Ext 1 paces the pre arm readings and port Ext 2 paces the post arm readings The sample rates are determined entirely by the source s driving the ports 5 Additional Information More information on dual rate sampling is found in Chapter 3 Understanding
393. resource manager into A24 address space The data register offset 1210 or 0C16 and Offset register 4316 6710 is added to the A24 base address to form the complete register addresses In the program the C function long get_base_addr void determines the A24 base address by reading the digitizer s offset register in A16 address space Detailed information on locating the data and offset 4316 registers can be found in Chapter 3 under the section VME Bus Data Transfers Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 71 VME Bus Data Transfers Using an Embedded Controller The following programs transfer data over the VME bus using the following system configuration e Controller RadiSys EPC 7 Embedded Controller e Runtime library Standard Instrument Control Library SICL for DOS e Compiler BorlandO C CPP These programs are also contained on the C language example programs disk HP E1429 10302 SEGTST16 CPP This program transfers 16 bit readings real time from the channel 1 A D converter to the VME bus The include files and structure definitions used in this this program are listed following the SEGTST16 CPP and SEGTST32 CPP program listings Options Compiler CodeGeneration Model Set to Large Options Directories Include Directories Add C EPCONNEC INCLUDE Options Directories Library Directories Add C EPCONNEC LIB Project Items INST CPP E1429 CPP SEGTST16 CPP BSICL LIB ERCMSC LIB include lt stdlib h
394. ress TRIG_COUN 1 which in most cases will not be the starting address if the segment has wrapped around at least once with pre arm data The digitizer firmware keeps track of the last address used in each segment and automatically reads the data in the proper order when a FETCh VME bus transfer or Local bus data transfer is performed Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 143 The DIAGnostic MEMory ADDResses command returns a list of 32 bit integers for each segment in memory In each 32 bit list bit 1 is the aborted flag and bit 0 is the memory wrapped flag Bit 31 through bit 2 is the value of the address counter for that segment Thus to obtain the memory address only a divide by 4 right shift of 2 of the 32 bit list must be done Since the address counter points to the memory location where the next reading will be stored the address should be decremented by 1 before use As an example assume ARM COUN 5 SENS SWE POIN 20 TRIG COUN 35 Because of the ARM COUN specified memory is divided into eight segments Table 3 5 each of which could contain up to 65536 readings For ARM COUN 5 only five of the eight possible segments will be used starting with the segment that begins at address 0 and ends at address 65535 The ending address for each of the five segments can be calculated from the equation ending segment address segment_number 65536 1 This yields the following ending addresses for the fi
395. ress i e EO000C16 would specify the data register as opposed to the VME A24 offset of C16 Examining the setting of the traffic register DIAG PEEK HE00002 8 Retrieve the contents of the 8 bit traffic register DIAGnostic POKE lt address bits value gt places the specified value into the memory location specified Parameters Comments Example Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units address numeric O thru FFFFFF 16 none bits numeric 8 16 32 none value numeric 2147483648 thru none 2147483647 e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e The specified address is assumed to be relative to the local processor and is not the A24 offset but is instead the full address i e EO000C16 would specify the data register as opposed to the VME A24 offset of C16 Changing the contents of the traffic register DIAG POKE HE00002 8 H4B Set traffic register to value of 4B hex 222 Command Reference DIAGnostic Subsystem DIAGnostic SGET SGET DIA Gnostic SGET lt bit gt returns the state 0 or 1 of the specified bit of the serial control register This register is the one which controls things such as signal conditioning signal routing input filter state and input impedance Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units bit numeric O through 55 none Comments Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled C
396. rites of SCPI commands is eliminated This appendix is not a 1 to 1 correlation between each digitizer SCPI command and an equivalent register read or write However basic digitizer configuration is covered together with methods of re initiating the digitizer and retrieving data from memory through direct register access The sections of the appendix include e Addressing the Registers o ooo ooooocoocooooo o 343 e Register Descriptions 0 00 c cece eee eee 347 e Configuring the Digitizer Input 0 368 e Arming and Triggering 0 0 2 e eee ae 372 e Re i itiating the Digitizer oooooocooccooomo oo 378 e Retrieving Data from Memory 004 385 e Example Program 0 0 0 cece ee eee 388 The example programs and programming techniques shown in this appendix are based on the following system configuration Controller HP Vectra 386 25 personal computer HP IB Interface Card HP 82335 HP IB Interface with Command Library Mainframe HP 75000 Series C Slot0 Resource Manager HP E1406 Command Module HP E1429A B Logical Address 40 Appendix C Register Programming 341 Each program uses a combination of SCPI commands and register reads writes In most cases SCPI commands set the initial digitizer configuration Register reads writes are used to modify the configuration re initialize the digitizer and retrieve readings Readi ng and The example
397. rogram the digitizers single ended input ports channel 1 and differential input ports channel 2 are set to two different signal ranges This was done using SENSe FUNCtion to select the port and SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe to set the range CONFigure was not used since executing CONF2 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 would not only set the range on channel 2 but would also change the settings made following the first CONFigure CONF1 command 4 Routing Sourcing Signals If a digitizer trigger port e g Ext 1 Ext 2 or a VXI backplane trigger line ECLTrg lt n gt TTLTrg lt n gt is the source of areference signal arm signal or trigger signal then that port or line cannot be used to route OUTPut a synchronization signal 5 Retrieving Readings When readings are retrieved from digitizer memory using the FETCh command each channel s readings must be retrieved separately That is channel 1 s readings must be fetched and then channel 2 s must be fetched or vice versa However VME bus data transfers retrievals allow both channels readings to be retrieved simultaneously The VME Bus Data Transfers examples in this chapter show how this is done 58 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 6 Additional Information Additional information on using arming triggering and reference signals to synchronize other digitizers can be found in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer Additional information on the CONFigure command can b
398. rt gt If you send the command without specifying the expected value resolution or input port parameters the digitizer sets default values Similarly if chan in the command keyword is not specified the default channel 1 is used Unless otherwise noted in the subsystem syntax parameter settings can be queried by adding a question mark to the command For example TRIG SOUR HOLD sets the trigger source to HOLD The value can be queried by executing TRIG SOUR The MINimum or MAXimum value of a parameter is determined by adding the word MIN or MAX to the end of the query See below SENS SWE OFFS POIN MIN SENS SWE OFFS POIN MAX The minimum and maximum values returned are based on the current settings of other digitizer parameters SCPI Command Execution Command Coupling The following information should be remembered when executing SCPI commands Some of the digitizer SCPI commands are functional or value coupled Functionally coupled commands are those that for one command to have affect another command must be set to a particular value A value coupled command changes the settings of other commands 182 Command Reference Chapter 4 Command couplings can often result in Settings conflict errors when the program executes When a coupled command is executed the command setting is evaluated by the digitizer processor If the setting causes an illegal digitizer configuration a Settings conflict error oc
399. rther conversion is needed by the user e Both PACKed 16 and REAL 64 formats return data preceded by the IEEE 488 2 definite length arbitrary block header The header is as follows lt num_digits gt lt num_bytes gt signifies a block transfer lt num_digits gt is a single digit 1 through 9 which specifies how many digits ASCII characters are in the lt num_bytes gt descriptor which follows lt num_bytes gt is the number of data bytes which immediately follow the lt num_bytes gt field 228 Command Reference FORMat Subsystem Example 1 Example 2 FORMat DATA e ASCii 9 format sends data back as comma separated ASCII numbers The data is converted internally to reflect the SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage RANGe setting and no further conversion is needed by the user The optional parameter 9 is the number of significant digits in the data This parameter is always 9 and may not be changed To read this data into an array it is first necessary to determine how many readings are coming back from the FETCh or READ If using FETCh then the FETCh COUNt command will specify how many readings will be returned READ requires the user to calculate in advance how many readings to expect See the next comment below for details on how to calculate number of readings e The number of readings that FETCh or READ will return for each channel can be calculated as number of start triggers pre arm readings post
400. s Readings are stored and retrieved from memory as single 24 bit numbers see How Readings are Stored Each 12 bit reading sent to the VME VXI data transfer bus directly from the A D or from memory is expanded Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 129 A D Channel 1 12 24 A D Channel 2 How Readings are Stored Assigning a Data Label to 16 bits When both channels readings are selected the data is expanded to 32 bits 16 bits per reading Similarly readings sent to the Local bus from either the A D or memory are expanded to 16 or 32 bits depending on whether one or two channels is selected The readings are transferred eight bits at a time however Memory Ch 2 Ch 1 RDG 1 12 bits RDG 2 12 bits RDGn 12 bits Data RDG 1 12 bits RDG 2 12 bits RDGn 12 bits 24 Processor Channels 1 amp 2 Combined High Speed Data Bus Local Bus Interface 160r32 24 VXI VXI Data Transfer Bus Backplane 160r32 E1429A FIG3 7 Figure 3 7 HP E1429 Digitizer Data Flow The digitizer can store 512K 524 288 readings from each channel in memory The readings which are taken simultaneously are stored as a single 24 bit number A pair of readings stored in a single memory location is shown in Figure 3 8 Data is not available to the user in the internal storage 12 bit format shown Instead readings retrieved from memory are expanded to 16 or
401. s and TRIGger STARt TIMerl was some value greater than 1us like 2us TRIGger STARt TIMer1 would be automatically changed tolus so that one of the two values is 1 0 times the reference period If dual rate sampling is enabled TRIGger STARt SOUR is DTIM then the sample period specified by TIMer1 will be the sample rate for the pre arm readings of the dual rate measurement and TRIGger STARt TIMer2 will be the post arm sample rate Note that it is only necessary to set the longest sample rate if TRIGger STARt SOURce is DTIM The other setting will be automatically forced to be one reference oscillator period due to the coupling between the two rates when TRIGger STARt SOURce is DTIM If TRIGger STARt SOUR is TIMer then only the sample rate specified by TIMerl is used If dual rate sampling is not enabled TRIGger STARt SOUR DTIM then the TRIGger STARt TIMer 2 setting is retained but not used If the HP E1429 can not sample within 1 percent of the period specified by TRIGger STARt TIMer2 then the TIME bit bit 2 in the QUEStionable Status register is set TRIGger Subsystem Command Reference 281 e Related Commands TRIGger STARt TIMer1 TRIGger STARt SOURce e RST Condition 1 0E 7 seconds PERIOD VALUE TABLE The following sample periods are available with the digitizer s internal 20 MHz reference oscillator Multiple Period Multiple Period Multiple Period Seconds Seconds Seconds 1 5 0E 8 2 1
402. s in this appendix are based on the system configuration listed Writing to the previously With this configuration the digitizer s A24 registers are read Re gi sters and written to using the HP E1406 Command Module s DIAGnostic PEEK DIAGnostic POKE and DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress commands DIAGnostic PEEK lt address gt lt width gt DIAGnostic POKE lt address gt lt width gt lt data gt DIAGnostic UPLoad SADDress lt address gt lt byte_count gt lt address gt the address A24 base address register offset of the register lt width gt the number of bits read DIAG PEEK or the number of data bits written to the register DIAG POKE Unless otherwise noted register reads and writes are 8 bits lt data gt the integer data written to the register lt byte_count gt the number of reading bytes uploaded read from digitizer memory Since each reading is two bytes byte_count is equal to 2 times the number of readings to upload In the example program at the end of this appendix DIA Gnostic UPLoad SADDress is used to retrieve all the readings from memory once the digitizer has been re initiated Note With an embedded controller the Standard Instrument Control Library SICL and the programming procedures found in this appendix higher throughput rates can be achieved than the rates available with the system configuration listed To use these procedures note the A24 address mapping of the e
403. s returned Table 1 2 HP E1429A B Self Test Codes Self Test Code Description 0 Test passed 1 Test failed An error message describes the failure Chapter 1 Getting Started 21 HP BASIC SLFTST C Caution Executing the self test erases the readings in the digitizer s non volatile memory If the self test fails the command DIAGnostic TEST can be executed to obtain additional information on the failure Note that DIAGnostic TEST can return a string up to 40 characters Send the self test command enter and display the result 20 DIM Message 256 Diagnostic 40 30 OUTPUT 70905 TST 40 ENTER 70905 Rsit 50 IF Rsit lt gt 0 THEN 60 REPEAT 70 OUTPUT 70905 SYST ERR 80 ENTER 70905 Code Message 90 PRINT Code Message 100 UNTIL Code 0 110 OUTPUT 70905 DIAG TEST 120 ENTER 70905 Diagnostic 130 PRINT Diagnostic 140 END IF 150 PRINT Rsit 160 END SLFTST C This program performs a self test on the digitizer and prints out the resulting self test code Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR 70905L 1 0 path from the PC to the digitizer via the E1406 Continued on Next Page 22 Getting Started Chapter 1 EESSESSSSSESSS SESS S SESSS SELES SELES SESE SESIE SAS void main void Run the program char message 256 diag
404. s the digitizer arm source CALibration CALibration lt chan gt COUNt Returns a number that indicates how often the digitizer has been calibrated CALibration lt chan gt DATA lt block_data gt Manually sets or queries the calibration constants CALibration lt chan gt DELay Calibrates the A D converter delay constant CALibration lt chan gt GAIN lt readings gt Performs a gain calibration using the lt period gt lt flag gt specified number of readings and sample rate CALibration lt chan gt SECure CODE lt code gt Sets the code required to disable calibration security CALibration lt chan gt SECure STATe lt mode gt lt code gt Enables disables calibration security CALibration lt chan gt STORe Stores the currently selected channel s calibration constants into non volatile memory CALibration lt chan gt STORe AUTO lt mode gt Selects whether or not calibration constants will be automatically stored CALibration lt chan gt VALue lt number gt Specifies the voltage level at the input CALibration lt chan gt ZERO lt readings gt lt period gt lt mode gt Performs a calibration of the zero offset CONFigure CONFigure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC lt size gt Configures the digitizer for lt size gt number lt expected value gt lt resolution gt of readings on the specified channel and lt input port gt input port DIAGnostic DlAGnostic CALibr
405. sed with the HP E1485 Digital Signal Processing DSP module the digitizer must be in the servant area of the DSP module The digitizer s logical address switch is shown in Figure 1 2 Servant Area o 4 o o o LLO HHL Bae 71 AM T isu 2 Log A Servant Area 0 2345067 8 Not Used 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 L el 2 2S e OY 26 e Logical Address 40 Switch Down e pr Switch Up TOP VIEW Logical Address 8th slot from front epee A Jk MK P WL E1445A figi 2
406. set up the digitizer s dual rate sampling function whereby pre arm and post arm readings are taken at different sample rates e how level arming can be used with dual rate sampling The digitizer pre arm samples at 50 ns until the level of the input signal on channel 1 reaches 5V At 5V the digitizer 1s armed and post arm samples at 10 ms DUALSAMP C RST CLS clear and reset the digitizer CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 10 3 set 20 readings 10V range ARM SOUR1 INT1 set arm source 1 for level arming ARM SOUR2 HOLD disable arm source 2 ARM SLOP1 POS arm on increasing input signal ARM LEV1 POS 5 arm at 5V 10V range SENS SWE OFFS POIN 10 set 10 pre arm readings TRIG SOUR DTIM set dual rate sampling TRIG TIM1 50E 9 set sample rate for pre arm readings TRIG TIM2 10E 3 set sample rate for post arm readings INIT put digitizer in wait for arm state FETCH retrieve readings Comments 1 Dual Rate Sampling Periods The dual rate sampling trigger source DTIMer uses the internal timer sources Thus one sample period must equal the reference period In this program the digitizer s internal 20 MHz oscillator is the reference source Therefore one sample rate must be 50 ns 1 20 MHz Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 55 2 Pre and Post Arm Sample Rates With dual rate sampling pre arm and post arm readings occur at different sample rates It is recommended that pre arm
407. sired arm source to the arm source register base 4916 C Enable the arm trigger by setting bit 2 of the arm control register base 4B 16 to 0 Retain the settings of the other register bits Appendix C Register Programming 373 Setti ng the Arm The registers used to set the arm count are listed below Count e Arm count registers base 5516 and base 5716 Procedure 1 Load the arm count registers A With the digitizer in the idle state write the decimal equivalent of the most significant byte to register 55 Writing the decimal equivalent of the least significant byte to register 57 You can set the arm count from 1 to 65 535 arms For example to program an arm count of 20 MSB LSB 0000 0000 00010100 0 2010 0 is written to register 55 2010 is written to register 57 To program an arm count of 300 MSB LSB 0000 0001 00101100 110 4410 110 is written to register 55 4410 is written to register 57 Setti ng the Arm The arm delay is the amount of additional delay to occur from when the Delay digitizer accepts the arm signal to when it enters the wait for trigger state There is always a delay of one reference clock cycle The registers used to set the arm delay are listed below e Arm Control register base 4B 16 e Arm Delay registers base 5116 and base 5316 374 Register Programming Appendix C Procedure Setting the Reference Source Procedure 1 Determine the reference period
408. sk gt Event Register STATus OPERation EVENt Enable Register STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt Summary bit Figure 3 16 HP E1429 Status Groups and Associated Registers 166 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 The Questionable The digitizer s Questionable Signal status group monitors overload Sig nal Status Group conditions the frequency accuracy of the divide by n reference source and error conditions in non volatile calibration memory The Condition Register Overload conditions divide by n frequency accuracy and non volatile calibration memory errors are monitored with the following bits in the Condition register All other bits are unused 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 unused CAL unused TIME VOLT VOLT age Bit 0 is set 1 if an amplifier overrange single ended or differential input is detected during a measurement sequence Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 TIME Bit 2 is set 1 when the divide by n reference source cannot generate a sample rate that is within 1 of the rate specified by TRIG TIMerl or TRIG TIMer2 Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 CALibration Bit 8 is set 1 when an error is detected in non volatile calibration memory Reading the Condition Register The current state of bits 0 2 and 8 can be determined by reading the Condition register with the command STATus QUEStiona
409. sources may be set to any legal source for this mode but TRIGger START SOURce must be set to VME Selections can be made using the VINStrument CONFigure VME FEED command such that a single read produces data from only one channel 16 bits or both channels simultaneously 32 bits When the data is transferred post measurement completion of the INITiate MMediate command will automatically configure for a VME transfer from memory based on the settings of the VINStrument VME FEED command When the measurement has completed and the VME transfer has been set up by the HP E1429 bit 1 Memory Read Enable of the A24 memory control register base 2116 will go high 1 At this point data transfer can be initiated by the receiver by reading the A24 data register base 0C16 Again the VINStrument VME FEED command is used to specify whether a single read will produce one channel 16 bits of data or two channels 32 bits of data The VINStrument VME MEMory INITiate command will also configure for a post measurement VME data transfer but it need not be sent unless it is desirable to read the same data multiple times VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt MEMory INITiate no query MODE lt mode gt RESet no query SEND POINts lt count gt AUTO lt mode gt TEST DATA lt voltage_list gt no query VME FEED lt source gt MEMory INITiate no query MODE lt mode gt SEND ADDR
410. ssage in the queue is replaced with error 350 Too many errors No additional messages are placed into the queue until SYSTem ERRor reads some messages or until the queue is cleared using the CLS clear status command e When the error queue is empty SYSTem ERRor returns 0 No error e RST Condition unaffected e Power On Condition no errors are in the error queue Reading the error queue SYST ERR Query the error queue SYSTem VERSion returns the SCPI version number to which the HP E1429A B complies 1992 0 Querying the SCPI revision SYST VERS Query SCPI revision e RST Condition none SYSTem Subsystem Command Reference 271 TRIGger The TRIGger command subsystem controls the fourth state in a four state measurement process The four states which occur during a successful reading are idle initiated wait for arm and wait for trigger The last two states have event detection associated with them which control when they exit the current state These four states are more fully described as follows e Idle In this state the instrument is not measuring This is the state where setting changes are done via commands to the instrument This state is exited when an INITiate command is received This state is returned to after a reset successful completion of measurement or abort of measurement e Initiated Once the instrument is initiated with the INITiate command it passes through this state and co
411. stem 151 VME bus data format 153 VME bus data transfer programming sequence 151 VME bus data Transfers 146 multiple 155 164 VME bus transfers setting the mode 151 VXIbus configuration digitizer 15 W WARNINGS 10 Warranty 9 Where segmented readings are stored 143 Where unsegmented readings are stored 142 420 Index HP E1429A B User s Manual
412. ster 61 16 and the binary division register 6316 For example to program a sample rate of 1 kHz 1 ms period using the digitizer s internal 20 MHz reference N 20 MHz 1 kHz 20 000 1610 is written to the decade division register base 6116 to set a division by 10 000 All other bits are set to 0 13210 is written to the binary division register base 6316 to set a division by 2 Bits 7 4 must always be set to 1 0 0 0 These settings divide the reference frequency by 20 000 which gives the required sample rate of 1 kHz 5 Set the digitizer A D converter as the high speed clock source and data source for memory A Using the traffic register base 0216 set the pulse register as the high speed clock source by setting bits 3 2 to 0 0 Retain the settings of the other bits B Send aclock pulse to the internal high speed bus by reading or writing any value to the pulse register base 08 16 C Using the traffic register base 0216 set the A D as the high speed clock source and as the high speed data source by setting bits 3 O to 0 1 0 0 Retain the settings of the other bits 384 Register Programming Appendix C Note 6 Load the arm count and send the initiate pulse A Load the arm count and initialize the trigger counters by writing any value to the arm count latch register base 5916 three times B Initiate the timebase processor by writing any value to the timebase in
413. t access the Command Module send the following command sequence ABORT 7 ABORT 7 CLEAR 70905 selected device clear Chapter 1 Getting Started 47 Where to go Next For additional progamming examples Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer For the digitizer description of operation Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer For information on the digitizer command set Chapter 4 Command Reference For the digitizer operating specifications Appendix A Specifications For a listing of the digitizer error messages Appendix B Useful Tables For register programming information Appendix C Register Programming 48 Getting Started Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer Chapter Contents This chapter contains example programs that show you how to use the digitizer The programs which demonstrate the various features of the digitizer are presented in the same sequence as the features are covered in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer The examples in this chapter include e Configuring the Digitizer Input 0 50 e Taking a Burst of Readings 0000 51 e Level Arming it Salita iad Steeda 8 52 e Pre and Post Arm Readings 0200 00 53 e Specifying a Sample Rate 00 00 0000 54 e Dual Rate Sampling 0 00 0 eee eee ee eee 55 e Using Multiple Digitizers o ooooooocooooooo 56 e Using the Packed Data Format
414. t a time Table 1 3 lists some of the commands and their settings that are equivalent to the values set by MEASure and CONFigure When MEASure or CONFigure is executed many of the digitizer parameters are set to their reset values see Appendix B Table B 2 for a complete listing of reset values The parameters specified within the MEASure or CONFigure command are then set accordingly This prevents Settings conflict errors from occurring due to previous digitizer configurations 34 Getting Started Chapter 1 Table 1 3 Digitizer Configuration using MEASure and CONFigure Parameter Command Setting Reference SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator SOURce INTernal the digitizer s internal 20 MHz oscillator Oscillator Source lt source gt Input Port SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion lt function gt VOLT lt port gt where lt port gt is set by the lt ports lt input port parameter of MEASure or CONFigure Measurement SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage DC RANGe set according to the lt expected value gt parameter of range lt range gt MEASure or CONFigure Input Impedance INPut lt port gt IMPedance lt impedance gt 50Q when lt port gt is 1 or 2 lt count gt 10 mE Input INPut lt port gt FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt ON ilter Input State INPut lt port STATe lt mode gt ON for all ports Arm Source ARM STARt SOURce lt n gt lt source gt IMMediate for n 1 HOLD for n 2
415. t arm readings e 1V range e single ended input MEASure cannot be used since it sets the pre arm reading count to 0 By using CONFigure the low level command SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt can be used to set the desired number of pre arm readings Chapter 1 Getting Started 39 CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 1 1 SENS1 SWE OFFS POIN 10 Taking Readings After To take readings the digitizer must be triggered The MEASure command Using CONFigure automatically triggers the digitizer after setting the configuration When CONFigure is used the digitizer must be triggered using the READ command or INITiate MMediate and FETCh lt chan gt commands as shown CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 1 1 SENS1 SWE OFFS POIN 10 READ readings are sent to the digitizer output buffer from memory or CONF1 ARR VOLT 20 1 1 SENS1 SWE OFFS POIN 10 INIT IMM readings are stored in memory FETC readings are retrieved from memory READ is equivalent to executing ABORt INITiate IMMediate FETCh ABORt stops any measurement or VME or Local bus transfer before proceeding with INITiate With READ the readings pass directly through digitizer memory to the device s output buffer INITiate places the digitizer in the wait for arm state FETC waits for the readings to complete and then retrieves fetches the readings from memory and places them into the output buffer HP BASIC DIM Readings 1 20 OUTPUT 70905 R
416. t is specified with the command ARM STARt COUNt lt count gt The range for lt count gt is 1 through 65 535 or INFinity post arm readings only 1 through 128 pre arm and post arm readings Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 117 When only post arm readings are specified an error will occur when the total number of readings ARM COUNt TRIGger COUNt is greater than 524 288 readings However an error will not occur if the arm count or trigger count is set to INFinity or if the readings are going the VME bus or Local bus directly from the A D converter When pre arm readings are included in a measurement sequence with an arm count gt 1 digitizer memory is segmented When memory is segmented the maximum number of arms is 128 and the maximum number of pre arm and post arm readings per arm is 524 288 number of arms rounded up to a power of 2 Note If the arm count is set to INFinity use the ABORt command to return the digitizer to the idle state Arm Rate When the arm count is greater than one and the sample rate is derived from the digitizer s internal oscillator the next arm occurs 0 5 us after the last reading in the burst This rate will vary with other references Immediate Arming Once the digitizer has been placed in the wait for arm state with the INITiate command the digitizer can be armed immediately with the following command regardless of the arm source ARM STARt IMMediate
417. t is also possible to calculate the end of pre arm data and the beginning of post arm data when both are present in a measurement The data will always be returned with the specified number of pre arm readings followed by post arm readings e The READ command is equivalent to the command sequence ABORt INITiate MMediate FETCh Because of the ABORt VME VXI data transfer bus or Local bus transfers in progress will be aborted This includes the pipelining of data e Related Commands ABORt FETCh FORMat DATA INITiate MMediate ARM STARt COUNt TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts e RST Condition none Example 1 Obtaining readings from the HP E1429 CONF1 ARR VOLT 30 6 DEF 1 Configure for 30 readings on channel 1 port 1 READ1 Start measurement and get readings from channel 1 Example 2 Reading back PACKed data HP BASIC program DIM Ndig 1 Count 9 Dimension parameters for header ASSIGN X TO 70905 FORMAT OFF Turn format off for array data OUTPUT 70905 READ1 Query for channel 1 measurement data ENTER EX USING X K K Ndig Count 1 VAL Ndig Strip the header preceeding the data ALLOCATE INTEGER Meas_data 1 VAL Count 2 Allocate an array to hold the data ENTER X Meas_data Read in the measurement data ENTER 70905 USING B Junk Need to strip off left over line feed 250 Command Reference READ lt chans Subsystem SENSe The SENSe subsystem is used to specify the reference os
418. t is easier to specify an expected value SENSe VOLTage RANGe can be used to change the signal range without changing the entire digitizer configuration with CONFigure 50 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 Taking a Burst of Readings ARMCNT C Comments This program demonstrates e how to set the arm count for multiple bursts of post arm readings e how to set the arm source to VXI backplane trigger line ECLTRGO and use the HP E1406 Command Module to apply arming pulses to the trigger line digitizer commands RST CLS reset and clear the digitizer CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 1 1 set 10 readings 1V range S E input port 1 ARM SOUR1 ECLTO arm source is ECLTRGO trigger line ARM COUN 3 set arm count for 3 bursts OUTP ECLTO STAT ON enable line ECLTRGO Command Module INIT place digitizer in wait for arm state send arming pulse Command Module commands OUTP ECLTO lMM apply a pulse to ECLTRGO ask for next pulse OUTP ECLT0 IMM apply a 2nd pulse to ECLTRGO ask for next pulse OUTP ECLT0 IMM apply a 3rd pulse to ECLTRGO digitizer command FETC1 retrieve digitizer readings 1 Arm and Trigger Counts The arm count is the number of reading bursts or arm signals the digitizer is to accept before the digitizer returns to the idle state When the digitizer receives an arm it takes a reading each time a trigger is received and continues to take
419. t readings last b The second exception is when either TRIGger STARt COUNt INF or ARM STARt COUNt INF has been specified It is assumed in this case that the user knows data is being overwritten After the ABORt is done to stop the measurement a FETCh command would bring back the entire memory contents with the most recent readings at the end of the block of data ARM Subsystem Command Reference 189 ARM STARt DELay e Related Commands ABORt INITiate IMMediate TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe SWEep POINts SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts e RST Condition ARM STARt COUNt 1 Example Setting the arm count ARM COUN 10 Set 10 measurement cycles per INITiate STARt DELay ARM STARt DELay lt period gt specifies how long to delay entering the wait for trigger state after the arming pulse is received and processed Delays of greater than O can be specified only if no pre arm readings are being taken with the post arm readings 1 e SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts is 0 The delay time is generated using either the reference oscillator period or ten times the reference oscillator period If we designate the current reference oscillator period as T then the two ranges of delay can be expressed as 0 to 65534T in steps of T 65540T to 655350T in steps of 10T Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units period numeric MINimum MAXimum Seconds value see below MINimum selects 0 delay MAXi
420. tation History All Editions and Updates of this manual and their creation date are listed below The first Edition of the manual is Edition 1 The Edi tion number increments by whenever the manual is revised Updates which are issued between Editions contain replacement pages to correct or add additional information to the current Edition of the manual Whenever a new Edition is created it will contain all of the Update information for the previous Edition Each new Edition or Update also includes a revised copy of this documentation his tory page EIA A da oda March 1993 EMO Zi ET dia June 1993 Safety Symbols Instruction manual symbol affixed to prod uct Indicates that the user must refer to the Ay Alternating current AC manual for specific WARNING or CAU TION information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product ee Direct current DC Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates the field wiring terminal that must l be connected to earth ground before operat f ing the equipment protects against electri Calls attention to a procedure practice or cal shock in case of fault WARNING condition that could cause bodily injury or death Calls attention to a procedure practice or con Frame or chassis ground terminal ty pi CAUTION dition that could possibly cause damage to rh of cally connects to the equipment s metal equipment or permanent loss of data frame WARNINGS The following general safet
421. te ARM STARt COUNt TRIGger STARt COUNt SENSe S WEep OFFSet POINts e RST Condition none Example Recovering readings in memory FETC1 REC Do a fetch on the data on channel 1 The battery must be enabled for this to work FETCh lt chan gt Subsystem Command Reference 227 FORMat Subsystem Syntax DATA Parameters Comments The FORMat command subsystem is used to specify the output format of the readings from the HP E1429 Digitizer FORMat DATA lt type gt lt ength gt FORMat DATA lt type gt lt length gt specifies the output format for measurement data Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units type discrete ASCii PACKed REAL none length numeric 9 ASCii 16 PACKed none 64 REAL e PACKed format is signed 16 bits however the original 12 bit reading is shifted left 4 bits and the lower most 4 bits are 0 filled Thus to get the actual value of the reading the packed value should be divided by 16 Packed readings always represent a value between 1 023 and 1 0235 i e there is no correction done internally for the range setting and further post processing by the user is necessary to get the actual reading value if the SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage RANGe setting is not 1V e REAL 64 format sends data back as IEEE 754 64 bit real numbers The data is converted internally to reflect the SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage RANGe setting and no fu
422. te data for the Local bus VINS CONF LBUS FEED MEM CHAN1 Set data source to channel 1 memory Set up other modules to right of this one Last module on right must be in VINS LBUS MODE CONSume INIT Start the measurement data will be transferred over the Local bus as soon as the measurement completes CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate causes the instrument to begin the process of transferring data from memory out over the Local bus If the FEED and MODE are set correctly e g MODE APPend GENerate or INSert before the measurement is taken this command is not necessary because the data will automatically be sent If however the measurement was aborted or if it is necessary to change the MODE or FEED after the measurement has completed then executing this command will start the data transfer Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled command Yes This command will error if VINStrument CONFigure LB US FEED is not MEMory xxx if VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE is OFF or if the HP E1429 is already INITiated 286 Command Reference VINStrument Subsystem VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE e This command results in an error if VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED is not one of the MEMory choices i e MEMory BOTH etc e If the data in memory is in multiple segments ARM STARt COUNt gt 1 and SENSe S WEep POINts DELay lt 0 then there will be a small time delay
423. ter are latched and remain set until the register is cleared by one of the following commands STATus QUEStionable EVENt CLS The Enable Register The Enable register specifies which bits in the Event register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The digitizer logically ANDs the bits in the Event register with bits in the Enable register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable register that are to be ANDed with bits in the Event register are specified unmasked with the command STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Enable register bit to be unmasked The decimal values of bits 0 2 and 8 are 1 4 and 256 The Enable register is cleared at power on by specifying an lt unmask gt value of 0 or by executing the STATus PRESet command The Ope ration The Operation status group monitors current operating conditions within the Status Group digitizer The specific conditions include CALibrating MEASuring entering the wait for arm state and execution of the INITiate MMediate command 168 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 The Condition Register Calibration waiting for an arm signal execution of the INITiate MMediate command and memory partitioning are monitored with the following bits in the Condition register All other bits are unuse
424. tery with insufficient charge must be replaced Digitizer Data There are three digitizer data formats available when readings are taken Formats using MEASure or READ or when the readings are FETCh ed from memory These formats are set using the FORMat subsystem which consists of the command FORMat DATA lt type gt lt ength gt The formats available are lt type gt lt length gt ASCii 9 PACKed 16 REAL 64 ASCii 9 format returns retrieves data as comma separated ASCII numbers Figure 3 11 This is the default format Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 133 PACKed 16 format returns signed 16 bit numbers preceded by the ANSI TEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block header Figure 3 11 Packed readings always represent a value between 1 0225 and 1 0230 or an overrange value and must be converted by the user to the actual reading value see Packed Reading Conversions REAL 64 format returns retrieves data as 64 bit REAL numbers also preceded by the ANSI IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Definite Length Arbitrary Block header Figure 3 11 REAL 64 readings are converted by the digitizer to the actual reading value Thus no further conversions are required A line feed LF and End Or Identify EOI follow the last reading in all formats The Definite Length In the definite length arbitrary block header Arbitrary Block Header e indicates the data is in an arbitrary block
425. the Local bus These readings are also stored in digitizer memory Transferring real time or post measurement readings from memory does not remove the readings from memory As a result a set of readings can be transferred over the Local bus multiple times The digitizer is configured for each additional data transfer with the command VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate Also if a measurement is aborted with the ABORt command the digitizer should be configured with VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate for each subsequent data transfer Note Detailed information on the digitizers Local bus commands can be found in Chapter 4 Command Reference 164 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 The Digitizer Status Registers This chapter describes the HP E1429 digitizer status system Included is information on the STATus subsystem commands the status groups used by the digitizer the conditions monitored by each group and information on how to enable a condition to interrupt a computer The Status The commands included in the STATus subsystem are Subsystem Commands S ATus OPC INITiate lt state gt OPERation QUEStionable CONDition ENABle lt unmask gt EVENt NTRansition lt unmask gt PTRansition lt unmask gt PRESet Status System Operating conditions within the digitizer are monitored by registers in Registe rs Various status groups The status groups implemented by the di
426. the TTLTO trigger line when the inserter digitizer has completed its measurements Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 93 define ADDR_G70905L VO path from the PC to the generator digitizer define ADDR_ 70906L 1 0 path from the PC to the inserter digitizer define ADDR_MEM 70903L 1 0 path from the PC to the memory card define CMD_MOD 70900L 1 0 path from the PC to the Command Module Function Prototypes void rst_clr long address long get_base_addr void void configure void void initiate long base_addr void check_error char func_tion long address REESESSSSESSSS SS SSS TE SSSSSSAS SS SRSES TASES SASS void main void run the program long base_adar variable for A24 base address clrscr rst_clr ADDR_G reset the generator digitizer rst_clr ADDR_1 reset the inserter digitizer rst_clr ADDR_MEM reset memory card base_addr get_base_addr get digitizer A24 base address configure configure the digitizers and memory card initiate base_addr initiate the digitizers and memory card retrieve the readings from the memory card ERER SSOP ISRO Se OOS S
427. the differential input reaches 3V When the level is reached and the arm occurs the user is notified that the digitizer is armed and is ready to sample STATUS C CONF1 ARR VOLT 1 5 3 set 1 reading 5V range ARM STAR SOUR INT1 arm on input signal level ARM STAR SLOP1 POS arm on positive going signal ARM STAR LEV1 POS 3 arm at 3V level TRIG STAR SOUR HOLD set trigger source to hold STAT OPER PTR 0 prevent any positive transitions from causing summary bit to set OPER STAT OPER NTR 64 set event register bit on negative transition of bit 6 STAT OPER ENAB 64 enable summary bit to set OPER bit in status register INIT put digitizer in wait for arm state print message waiting for input signal to reach arm level loop STB read status byte enter byte is byte lt 128 check if OPER bit in status byte is cleared 0 end loop print message digitizer armed press Enter return to trigger the reading TRIG IMM issue a single trigger FETC1 retrieve reading Chapter 2 Using the Digitizer 101 Comments 1 Setting the Transition Filter When the digitizer is INITiated a low to high transition of bit 6 in the condition register occurs indicating the digitizer is in the wait for arm state When an arm is received a high to low transition of bit 6 occurs The power on reset setting of the transition filter allows the positive tra
428. the input signal to the attenuators A To set the measurement range the input signal must be routed to the attenuators This is done by setting bit 10 channel 1 or bit 15 channel 2 to l 2 Set the required attenuation A From Table C 1 and with the bit positions known set the bits for the required attenuation measurement range using the procedure for reading and writing to the shift register 3 Copy the shift register bits to the shift register latch A Write a value of 4 to the A D parallel strobe register base 0B 16 to copy the shift register bits to the shift register latch Using the Packed When the measurement range is set using registers the reading resolution Reading Format used to convert the readings to voltages is unknown to the processor As a result the packed data format should be used and the readings converted by the user as described in Chapter 3 Understanding the Digitizer Arming and Triggering This section contains the procedures used to configure the digitizer s arm and triggering timebase hardware Checking the Idle Except as noted configuring the arming and triggering hardware occurs State When the digitizer is in the idle state The register used to check the idle state is listed below e Arm status register base 4316 Procedure 1 Determine if the digitizer is in the idle state by checking bit 1 of the arm status register base 43 16 If bit 1 is set to 0 the dig
429. ther example if a configuration consists of two digitizers and only three channels are used the maximum sample rate for each digitizer is 40 MSamples 3 channels 13 3 MHz For the digitizer using two channels this would be 26 6 MSamples second since a single sample trigger causes both channels to sample For the digitizer using only a single channel the sample rate would be 13 3 MSamples second Together the two digitizers are within the 40 MSample 80 MByte second Local bus transfer specification Note The maximum sample rates computed may not always be available using the digitizer s internal reference In those instances select a slower sample rate that is available from the internal reference or use an external reference or an external trigger source Setting the In addition to resetting the digitizer s Local bus chip setting the Local bus Interleaved mode and setting the data source the interleaved transfer mode must be set Transfer Mode This is done using the commands VINStrument CONFigure LBUS SEND POINts lt count gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS POINts AUTO lt mode gt lt count gt is the number of readings per block If readings are taken on only one channel lt count gt is set to 1 If readings are taken on both channels lt count gt is set to 2 Setting lt mode gt to OFF sets the interleaved transfer mode In this mode the end of block flag is sent after each reading or set of readings The e
430. tile memory Chapter 4 Command Quick Reference 311 Table 4 1 HP E1429A B Command Quick Reference Cont d Subsystem Commands Description OUTPut OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt Specifies the source of the synchronization pulse routed to ECLTRGO or ECLTRG1 OUTPut ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt Enables disables the routing of the synchronization pulse OUTPut EXTernal 1 FEED lt source gt Specifies the source of the synchronization pulse routed to the Ext 1 BNC port OUTPut EXTernal 1 STATe lt mode gt Enables disables the routing of the synchronization pulse OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt Specifies the source of the synchronization pulse routed to a TTLTRG trigger line OUTPut TTLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt Enables disables the routing of the synchronization pulse READ READ lt chan gt Returns readings from the specified channel SENSe SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion lt function gt Selects the channel s input port that will be used SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency Indicates the frequency of the external lt frequency gt reference source SENSe lt chan gt ROSCillator SOURce lt source gt Selects the reference frequency source SENSe lt chan gt S WEep OFFSet POINts lt count gt Specifies the number of pre arm readings SENSe lt chan gt S WEep POINts lt count gt Specifies the total number of
431. tion of data flow Figure 1 3 Installing the HP E1429B Digitizer in a Local Bus Configuration 18 Getting Started Chapter 1 Note For compliance with European EMC standards EN 55011 and EN 50082 1 backplane connector shields are included with each HP E1429A B digitizer ordered The shields need only be installed in the VXI mainframe if it is necessary to comply with these standards Add ressing the Devices in the Series C mainframe and in the servant area of the HP E1406 Digiti zer over HP IB Command Module are located by an HP IB address The HP IB address is a combination of the controller s interface select code the Command Module s primary HP IB address and the device s secondary HP IB address An address in this form appears as 70905 Interface Select Code 7 Determined by the address of the HP IB interface card in the controller In most Hewlett Packard controllers this card has a factory set address of 7 including the HP 82335 HP IB Interface Card this card was used with an HP Vectra AT compatible personal computer to create the C programs on the example programs disk Primary HP IB Address 09 This is the address of the HP IB port on the Command Module Valid addresses are 0 to 30 The Command Module has a factory set address of 9 Secondary HP IB Address 05 This address is derived from the logical address of the digitizer by dividing the logical address by 8 Thus for the HP E1429A B digitizer factory s
432. tizer Input Section SCPI Command Control The digitizer s input section including the input state input impedance and low pass filtering is controlled by the SCPI INPut subsystem The input port is selected by the SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion subsystem The input signal range is controlled by the SENSe lt chan gt VOLTage subsystem The commands in these subsystems are listed below INPUT lt port gt FILTer LPASs STATE lt mode gt IMPedance lt impedance gt STATe lt mode gt 106 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Note Selecting the Input Port SENSe lt chan gt FUNCtion lt function gt SENSe lt chan gt VOL Tage DC RANGE lt range gt Each command in these subsystems is covered in detail in Chapter 4 Command Reference Each input parameter setting is unique to each port The settings are remembered so that changes made to one port do not affect the changes made previously to the other port However the signal range set or changed for one port applies to the other port as well The digitizer input channels are numbered 1 and 2 The input ports on each channel are e channel 1 port 1 singled ended input port 3 differential input e channel 2 port 2 single ended input port 4 differential input The active input port is specified by the lt input port gt parameter of the CONFigure and MEA Sure commands and by lt p
433. to set the data source post measurement or real time transfer VINStrument CONFigure LBUS RESet VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS FEED lt source gt Note that you must reset the Local bus chip of each appender or inserter digitizer each time the generator digitizer s Local bus mode or data source is changed 3 Reset the consumer s 1 e memory card s Local bus chip and configure the consumer to receive data 4 Activate initiate the consumer 5 If the digitizer s is in the append mode use INITiate MMediate to activate the appender digitizer first Then use INITiate MMediate to activate the generator digitizer 6 If the digitizer s is in the insert mode use INITiate MMediate to activate the generator digitizer first Then use INITiate MMediate to activate the inserter digitizer igiti e igitizer can be configured for measurements as require Digitizer The HP E1429B d g be figured fi quired Co nfigu ration With the following exceptions Restrictions e Ifthe Local bus data source is the digitizer A D real time transfers only post arm readings are allowed This includes multiple arms bursts e When the Local bus mode is set to a mode other than OFF or pipeline the VME bus transfer mode must be disabled This is done with the command VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE OFF Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 161 Setting the Local The Local bus
434. to the synchronization signal supplied by FEED This means that all TTLTRG trigger lines enabled by OUTP TTLT lt n gt STAT will carry the same synchronization pulse 120 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Triggering the Digitizer TRIGger and SENSe Subsystems Overview Setting the Trigger Source After the digitizer is armed it enters the wait for trigger state Thus when trigger signals are received the digitizer samples the inputs on its channels Figure 3 5 The hardware associated with triggering the digitizer is controlled by the SCPI TRIGger subsystem and by selected commands in the SENSe subsystem The commands used in those subsystems include TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt count gt IMMediate SOURce lt source gt TlMer1 lt period gt TIMer2 lt period gt SENSe lt chan gt SWEep OFFSET POINts lt count gt POINts lt count gt The following information summarizes each command in the TRIGger subsystem and the two commands from the SENSe subsystem The Command Reference Chapter 4 contains detailed information on the parameter settings and on reset conditions The trigger source specifies the signal which triggers the digitizer to take a reading The source is specified with the command TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt The lt source gt parameters are e BUS HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET commmand or the TRG common command e ECLTrg0 E
435. too fine for the given expected value error 231 Data questionable CONF or MEAS unable to attain resolution specified will occur Each channel consists of two ports one port is single ended and the other is differential The two ports on channel 1 have odd numbers port 1 is the single ended input and port 3 is the differential input On channel 2 the single ended input 1s port 2 and the differential input is port 4 The expected value parameter specified should be the maximum expected measurement value The voltage range is set according to the expected value supplied If the expected value is greater than 98 of a given range the next higher range is automatically chosen The table under the Settings heading gives the crossover points for range changes 212 Command Reference CONFigure lt chan gt Subsystem CONFigure lt chan gt ARRay VOLTage DC Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 2 none size numeric 1 7 to 524288 none expected numeric 102 30 to 102 35 volts value DEFault MINimum MAXimum resolution numeric 00005 to 05 volts DEFault MINimum MAXimum input port numeric 113 with CONFigure1 none 2 4 with CONFigure2 1 and 2 are single ended 3 and 4 are differential The maximum size parameter will be 524284 if the battery is enabled instead of 524288 For expected value MINimum selects the 0 100 V range and
436. tput as soon as this feed is selected and will be output continuously until the feed source is changed to some other selection TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Outputs an approximately 25 nanosecond wide negative going pulse each time a convert pulse TRIGger is sent to the A to D converter Note that these pulses will also be generated when data is read out of memory from the VINStrument LBUS or VINStrument LBUS subsystems These pulses will also be generated when data is read out of memory from the VINStrument LBUS or VINStrument VME subsystems Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source string ARM STARt SE Quence 1 none RFT Rigger SENSef 1 2 ROSCillator SENSe S WEep OFF Set POINts TRIGgoer STARt SEQuence 1 OUTPut Subsystem Command Reference 245 OUTPut EXTernal 1 STATe Comments Executable when initiated No e Coupled Command No e Related Commands OUTPut EXTernal 1 STATe e RST Condition OUTPut EXTernal FEED TRIGger STARt Example Setting the sync pulse source OUTP EXT FEED ROSC Output the reference oscillator pulses EXTernal 1 STATe OUTPut EXTernal 1 STATe lt mode gt enables or disables output of the synchronization pulse on the front panel Ext 1 BNC Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode boolean OFF O ON 1 none
437. transfer mode is set with the command Bus Transfer Mode VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt The lt mode gt parameters are APPend Local Bus data is received from the left and passed on to the right until an end of frame is detected When end of frame is received from the left side all data from this module is appended followed by an end of block marker and a new end of frame After sending the end of frame marker the module enters the paused state This mode requires a module to the left that is in GENerate mode The mode is not active until either an INITiate command or a VINStrument LBUS MEMory INITiate command is sent GENerate Local bus data originates in this module and is passed to the right followed by an end of frame marker The mode is not active until either an INITiate command or a VINStrument LBUS MEMory INITiate command is sent INSert Local bus data is inserted onto the bus from this module The module will place its data out onto the Local bus with an end of block flag at the end The module will then pass through pipeline any data it receives from the left and will enter the paused state when an end of frame flag is received from the left This mode requires at least one module to the left which is in GENerate mode The mode is not active until either an INITiate command or a VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MEMory INITiate command is sent OFF The Local bus interface is disabled immediately upon rece
438. tting Started 31 Once compiled and linked an executable file EXE and object file OBJ are created in the current directory You execute the program by typing and entering the file name with the EXE extension Compiling in the Integrated Environment You can compile link and run your C programs from the Microsoft QuickCO or Turbo C 0 integrated environments To do so add program_name C CLHPIB LIB to the program list under the Make menu in the Microsoft QuickCO environment Under Environment in the Options menu include paths to the header files and external CLHPIB LIB library For example Include Files Directory c qc2 include Library Files Directory c qce2 lib In the Turbo C environment add the items program_name C TCHHPIB LIB to the project under the Project menu Under Directories in the Options menu include paths to the header files and external TCHHPIB LIB library For example Include Directories CATCUNCLUDE Library Directories C TC LIB C Program Format The general format of the C language programs on the example programs disk is shown in the program listings at the end of this chapter Generally the program flow is reset and clear the digitizer configure the digitizer check for configuration errors e e e e trigger the digitizer and retrieve the readings 32 Getting Started Chapter 1 Introduction to Programming The SCPI commands used to progra
439. uators Range Input Post 6 dB 14 dB Attenuator Attenuator bits 37 45 38 46 bits 34 42 bits 35 43 0 10230 to 0 10235 OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 2046 to 0 2047 OFF OFF ON OFF 0 5115 to 0 51175 OFF OFF OFF ON 1 0230 to 1 0235 OFF ON OFF OFF 2 0460 to 2 0470 OFF ON ON OFF 5 115to 5 1175 OFF ON OFF ON 10 230 to 10 235 ON ON OFF OFF 20 460 to 20 470 ON ON ON OFF 51 150 to 51 175 ON ON OFF ON 102 30 to 102 35 ON ON ON ON The A D shift register bits used to turn the attenuators off and on are listed below Bit Name Setting Position 10 PIGGY1 0 Chi attenuators disabled 1 Ch1 attenuators enabled 34 ATT20DB 0 Ch1 20dB input attenuator ON 1 Ch1 20dB input attenuator OFF 35 CH1POST 0 Ch1 200B post attenuator ON 1 Ch1 20dB post attenuator OFF 37 CH1INT 0 Ch1 6dB internal attenuator ON 1 Ch1 6dB internal attenuator OFF 38 CH1INT 0 Ch1 14dB internal attenuator ON 1 Chi 14aB internal attenuator OFF 15 PIGGY2 10 Ch2 attenuators disabled 1 Ch2 attenuators enabled 42 ATT20DB 0 Ch2 20dB input attenuator ON 1 Ch2 20dB input attenuator OFF 43 CH2POST 0 Ch2 200B post attenuator ON 1 Ch2 20dB post attenuator OFF 45 CH2INT 0 Ch2 6dB internal attenuator ON 1 Ch2 6dB internal attenuator OFF 46 CH2INT 0 Ch2 14dB internal attenuator ON 1 Ch2 14aB internal attenuator OFF Appendix C Register Programming 371 Procedure 1 Route
440. umber from 0 thru 9 The configuration s is saved until power is cycled 174 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 How to Save and Recall a Configuration Digitizer configurations are saved and recalled with the commands SAV lt register gt RCL lt register gt where register is a number from 0 to 9 The following example shows how a configuration can be saved and recalled CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 10 3 set 10 readings on Diff port 3 ARM SOUR1 INT1 set arm source 1 for level arming ARM SOUR2 HOLD disable arm source 2 ARM SLOP1 EITH arm when signal enters window from either direction ARM LEV1 POS 4 set arm window lower boundary ARM LEV1 NEG 6 set arm window upper boundary ARM COUN 2 set two reading bursts SAV 0 save the configuration in location O RST reset the digitizer RCL 0 recall the configuration This program saves a configuration in register 0 The digitizer is then reset in order to change the current configuration to the power on configuration The configuration in register O is recalled which also leaves the digitizer in the idle state By placing the digitizer in the wait for arm state with READ or INIT readings are taken when the arm occurs and when trigger signals are received Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 175 Notes 176 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Comma
441. umeric 1or2 none mode boolean ON 1 OFF O none e Executable when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e Enabling CALibration lt chan gt STORe AUTO for either channel enables it for both channels e Related commands CALibration GAIN CALibration SECure STATe CALibration ZERO CALibration STORe e RST Condition CALibration STORe AUTO ON Turn automatic storage of calibration values off CAL STOR AUTO OFF Disable automatic storage CALibration lt chan gt VALue lt number gt specifies the voltage level supplied at the input This voltage value is then used in subsequent CALibration GAIN or CALibration ZERO commands The HP E1429 can not distinguish between a value which is exactly full scale and one which is an overload both cases would generate the same measured value Therefore the voltage specified for CALibration V ALue is not allowed to be closer than 10 counts from full scale approximately 99 5 of full scale The following table shows the allowable CALibration V ALues which are closest to full scale on their respective voltage ranges 208 Command Reference CALibration lt chan gt Subsystem Parameters Comments CALibration lt chan gt VALue Maximum Gain Voltage Range Allowable Calibration Values V Volts Ports 10180 and 10185 0 10235 1 2 3 4 2036 and 2037 0 2047 1 2 3 4 5090 and 50925 0 51175 1 2 3 4 1 0180 and 1 0185 1 0
442. us CONVerter CHANnell The channel 1 A D converter is the data source for the Local bus Two bytes per reading will be output to the bus CONVerter CHANnel2 The channel 2 A D converter is the data source for the Local bus Two bytes per reading will be output to the bus CONVerter BOTH Both A D converters are the data source for the Local bus In this mode the channel 2 reading is output first followed by the channel 1 reading With two bytes per reading four bytes for each set of readings will be output to the bus Data is transferred real time or post measurement over the Local bus in the digitizer s packed A D format Data is transferred one byte at a time in the following sequence Two Channels channel 2 MSByte channel 2 LSByte channel 1 MSByte channel 1 LSByte One Channel channel n MSByte channel n LSByte Chapter 3 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer 163 Additionally if the transfer configuration involves multiple digitizers appender digitizer readings will follow the generator digitizer readings Inserter digitizer readings will precede the generator digitizer readings Data in the packed format are left justified signed 2 s complement numbers Figure 3 8 See Packed Reading Conversions on page 134 for information on converting the readings to voltages Mu Itiple Local Bus During real time data transfers readings are taken directly from the A D Data Transfers converter and sent to
443. us capability has two interfaces one to each of the modules in the physically adjacent slots A device may connect the bus segments together or connect to each segment independently Figure 3 14 shows how the lines are used by the HP E1429B digitizer Backplane TAO Eight Data Lines TA7 Eat Two Handshake Lines EQ9 data available data request FRAME 10 BLOCK11 1 Two Flags end of frame end of block E1429A fig3 15 Figure 3 14 Local Bus Signal Line Definitions Data flows left to right over the Local bus through adjacent slots The following signal levels are allowed on the bus Analog low 5 5V 500 medium 16 0V 500 mA high 42 0V 500 mA Digital TTL 0 5V to 5 5V 200 mA ECL 5 46V to 0 0V 50 mA 156 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 A Local bus key Figure 1 1 prevents devices with incompatible Local bus signal levels from being installed in adjacent slots How Data is Data is transferred over the Local bus in units of blocks and frames Figure Transferred 3 15 A frame consists of a series of blocks and each block is a stream of data bytes generated by a single device If only one device is generating data then the block size and frame size are the same Device 2 Device 3 Device 4 Block
444. uted and name is not defined 271 Macro syntax error A syntax error occurred among the commands within the macro 272 Macro execution error Macro program data sequence could not be executed due to a syntax error within the macro definition 273 Illegal macro label The macro label defined in the DMC command was too long the same as a common command keyword or contained invalid header syntax 274 Macro parameter error The macro definition improperly used a macro parameter placeholder 275 Macro definition too long The commands within the macro could not be executed because the string or block contents were too long 276 Macro recursion error A macro program data sequence could not be executed because the sequence leads to the execution of a macro being defined 277 Macro redefinition not allowed A macro label in the DMC command could not be executed because the macro label was already defined 278 Macro header not found A legal macro label in the GMC query could not be executed because the header was not previously defined 312 PUD memory lost The protected user data saved by the PUD command has been lost 313 Calibration memory lost The nonvolatile calibration data used by the CAL command has been lost 330 Self test failed Note the information associated with the message for a description of the failure
445. ve segments segment 1 65535 segment 2 131071 segment 3 196607 segment 4 262143 segment 5 327679 Assume you want to read the data from segment number 4 Then the number of readings 35 1 36 padded to make divisable by 4 The first reading in the segment is at address first address ending segment address number of readings 1 262143 36 1 262108 If the readings in the memory segment did not wrap around the address 262108 and count 35 would be specified in the DIAGnostic FETCh command Tf for example readings in the segment did wrap around then the starting address specified in the DIAGnostic FETCh command will not be the first address in the segment where a reading is stored To determine the starting address use the DIAGnostic MEMory ADDRess command and get the 32 bits representing the 4th segment this would be the 13th through 16th bytes in the block of data returned 144 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 Assume that this 32 bit value is FFF8116 Bit 0 is high 1 indicating readings have wrapped around the segment Bit 1 is low 0 indicating that this segment completed normally and was not aborted by the user with the ABORt command The address returned is divided by 4 so that the aborted and wrapped bits are discarded and the address counter value of 3FFE016 26211210 remains To retrieve the most recent 35 readings with a circular buffer size of 36 th
446. void input_config long base_addr void set_trig_source long base_addr void initialize long base_addr void initiate long base_addr void memory_retrieve long base_addr void data_read long base_addr void check_error char function IPPO A O void main void long base_adar variable for digitizer A24 base address rst_clr reset and clear the digitizer base_addr get_base_addr function call to calculate and return digitizer A24 base address conf_read function call to take first set of readings input_config base_addr function call to set the 1V measurement range set trig_source base_addr function call which sets the trigger source initialize base_addr Continued on Next Page 390 Register Programming Appendix C initiate base_addr function call which prepares memory to store readings memory_retrieve base_addr function call which prepares memory to retrieve readings data_read base_addr function call which reads the data register ERSSSS EASES SSS SESE S SELES SELES ESSER ERIS SE SSS SSIES SS SSS SELES SELES SISSIES ESSE SS void conf_read void This function uses the CONFigure command to set up 20 readings on the 5V range The READ command is used to take the readings char go int readings 20 i 0 float rdgs readcnt dynamically allocate memory for readings rdgs malloc 20 sizeof float
447. void mem_read long base_addr void check_error char function RAIL void main void long base_adar variable for digitizer A24 base address rst_clr reset and clear the digitizer base_addr get_base_addr function call to calculate and return digitizer A24 base address ad_conf function call to configure the digitizer mem_read base_addr function call which reads the data register PATA TT TART TTT AT ee RSA A ARE RR AER ARNESES RAE ARANA NRO void ad_conf void int length 0 loop 0 use the set_commands array to configure digitizer channel 1 char static set_commands CONF1 ARR VOLT 100 1 1 set 100 readings on S E port 1 TRIG STAR SOUR VME trigger source is reads of data register VINS CONF VME MODE GEN enable data transfer over the VME bus VINS CONF VME FEED CONV CHAN1 set real time data transfer INIT place the digitizer in the wait for arm state length sizeof set_commands sizeof char Execute each command using a loop for loop 0 loop lt length loop IOOUTPUTS ADDR set_commands loop strlen set_commands loop function call to check for digitizer configuration errors check_error ad_conf Continued on Next Page 64 Using the Digitizer Chapter 2 BESSESSSSEESSS SESS ESSENSE SEARS SESERSESSE SESEE void mem_read long base_addr int
448. when initiated Yes e Coupled Command No e If the instrument is in the idle or wait for trigger states the ARM STARt IMMediate command will cause error 212 Arm ignored to be generated e If ARM STARt COUNt is greater than 1 only a single measurement cycle is affected by ARM STARt IMMediate the count is decremented by one and the remaining ARM STARt COUNt cycles will be executed with the original arming source active e When ARM STARt IMMediate is sent any ARM STARt DELay is bypassed for that arm only e Related Commands INITiate MMediate ARM STARt COUNt TRIGger subsystem e RST Condition none ARM Subsystem Command Reference 191 ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt Example Arming for measurement ARM SOUR1 EXTernal Set arming sourcel to be the EXTI BNC connector INITiate Begin measurement wait for arming pulse ARM Arm start trigger immediately don t wait for external pulse STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt ARM STARt LEVel lt chan gt NEGative lt voltage gt selects the input voltage level which will arm a measurement cycle The ARM LEVel NEGative setting is used only when either of the ARM STARt SOURce s is set to INTernal1 or INTernal2 and the corresponding ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt setting is NEGative or ElTHer The value programmed is retained but not used when other sources are selected or when the corresponding ARM STARt SLOPe lt n gt setting is
449. which is mapped into A24 address space At power on the system resource manager reads the digitizer s device type register in A16 address space to determine the amount of A24 memory the digitizer needs which is 4096 bytes The resource manager allocates a block of A24 memory for the digitizer and writes the A24 base starting address into the digitizer s offset register also in A16 space Figure 3 12 is an example of how the digitizer registers are mapped into A16 and A24 address space Appendix C contains additional register programming information 146 Understanding the HP E1429 Digitizer Chapter 3 E C Size VXlbus Mainframe Y EF pe a AA O2 gt HP 82335 HP IB Interface and Command Library O eang eee mann 155 COON npapanpppnpaR 888 GEE pp El REJ ESB HP E1406 HP E1429 Command Module a E Digitizer A24 Register Address A24 Base Address Register Offset E1406 Register i ADDRESS MAP Offset 24 Bits A24 Base Address is obtained by reading the A16 offset register pt by executing the VXI CONFigure DeviceLIST command or by noting js a the offset assigned by the E1406 Resource Manager during the oc DATA Register power on sequence TIO T
450. with this command for the user to have tables of calibration constants which are downloaded for usage whenever the load characteristics of what is connected to the front panel of the HP E1429 change The storage to and retrieval from memory of these tables would be under the control of the host controller external to the HP E1429 e The query form of this command will return the calibration constants that the digitizer is currently using note that these may not be the same values which are stored in non volatile calibration memory unless the CALibration STORe command has been previously executed on these constants e Related commands CALibration lt chan gt STORe e RST Condition none Example 1 Sending an array of new cal constants HP BASIC program ASSIGN X TO 70905 FORMAT OFF Turn format off for array data OUTPUT 70905 USING K CAL DATA 3124 Specify 124 bytes coming 62 constants OUTPUT x Array CHR 10 END Send the array of calibration constants Example 2 Querying the calibration constants on channel 2 HP BASIC program DIM Ndig 1 Count 9 Dimension parameters for header ASSIGN To TO 70905 I O path to digitizer ASSIGN From TO 70905 FORMAT OFF VO path from digitizer Turn format off for array data OUTPUT To FORM PACK Set packed data format OUTPUT To CAL2 DATA Query for calibration data ENTER From USING X K K Ndig Count 1 VAL Ndig Strip the header preceeding the data ALLOCATE I
451. y precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this product Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the product Hewlett Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Ground the equipment For Safety Class 1 equipment equipment having a protective earth terminal an uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or fumes For continued protection against fire replace the line fuse s only with fuse s of the same voltage and current rating and type DO NOT use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by service trained personnel only Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the equipment switched off To avoid dangerous electrical shock DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualified to do so DO NOT operate damaged equipment Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into this product have been im p
452. zer is set to the GENerate mode and the inner digitizer is set to the INSert mode Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt include lt cfunc h gt This file is from the HP IB Command Library Disk define ADDR_G 70905L VO path from the PC to the generator digitizer define ADDR_ 70906L 1 0 path from the PC to the inserter digitizer define ADDR_MEM 70903L 1 0 path from the PC to the memory card Function Prototypes void rst_clr long address void configure void void initiate void void check_error char func_tion long address Continued on Next Page 408 Local Bus Interleaved Transfers Appendix D PHS ana III void main void run the program clrscr rst_clr ADDR_G reset generator digitizer rst_clr ADDR_1 reset inserter digitizer rst_clr ADDR_MEM reset memory card configure configure the digitizers and the memory card initiate initiate the digitizers and the memory card retrieve the readings from the memory card SOPPPE SOSA LEAL ESTES SARE LESTE LESTE TESTS LSS S TSS e Cee Te Tee eee Tee ee Teese ee void configure void int length 0 loop 0 use the digitizer1 array to configure the generator digitizer char static digitizer1 CONF1 ARR VOLT 10 5 3 set 10 readin
453. zer will return FETCh or recover FETCh RECover between one and TRIGger STARt COUNt number of readings Because the digitizer processor does not know when the arm occurs the readings returned may be pre arm only post arm only or a combination of both If less than TRIGger STARt COUNt readings have been taken then that number of readings are returned If greater than TRIGger STARt COUNt readings have been taken then TRIGger STARt COUNt readings are returned e Related Commands SENSe SWEep POINts TRIGger STARt COUNt ARM STARt COUNt e RST Condition SENSe SWEep OFFSet POINts 0 Example Setting 50 pre arm readings on channel 1 input port 3 CONF1 ARR VOLT 100 5 3 Configure channel I for 100 readings 5V range SENS1 SWE OFFS POIN 50 Of the 100 total readings set 50 to be pre arm SENSe lt chan gt SWEep Subsystem Command Reference 259 SENSe lt chan gt SWEep POINts lt count gt POINts lt count Parameters SENSe lt chan gt SWEep POINts lt count gt specifies how many readings will be taken during each ARM STARt COUNt cycle of the trigger system This command is the same as and is coupled to TRIGger STARt COUNt Changing either changes the value of the other as well Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units chan numeric 1 2 none count numeric 1 7 through 16 777 215 none MINimum MAXimum 9 9E 37 INFinity MINimum selects 1 reading Memory post

HP E1429A User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents